EPA450/4-92-008a
           United States
           Environmental Protection
           Agency
Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
EPA-450/4-92-008a
March 1992
           Air
           USER'S GUIDE FOR THE
           INDUSTRIAL SOURCE COMPLEX
           (ISC2) DISPERSION MODELS
           VOLUME I - USER INSTRUCTIONS

-------
                                   EPA-450/4-92-008a
         USER'S GUIDE FOR THE
     INDUSTRIAL SOURCE COMPLEX
       (ISC2) DISPERSION MODELS

    VOLUME I - USER INSTRUCTIONS
b
f
          U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
           Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
               Technical Support Division
           Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711

                  March 1992

-------

-------
                            NOTICE

     The information in this document has been reviewed in its
entirety by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and
approved for publication as an EPA document.  Mention of trade
names, products, or services does not convey, and should not be
interpreted as conveying official EPA approval, endorsement, or
recommendation.
     The following trademarks appear in this guide:
IBM, IBM/MVS, IBM VS FORTRAN, and IBM 3090 are registered
trademarks of International Business Machines Corp.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corp.
VAX/VMS is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corp.
Lahey F77L-EM/32 is a registered trademark of Lahey Computer
Systems, Inc.
OS/386 is a registered trademark of Ergo Computing, Inc.
INTEL, 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486, 80287, and 80387 are
registered trademarks of Intel, Inc.
SunOS is a registered trademark of Sun Microelectronics, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T Bell Laboratories
Cray and UNICOS are registered trademarks and CFT77, CRAY Y-MP,
and SEGLDR are trademarks of Cray Research, Inc.

-------

-------
                            PREFACE

     This volume of the User's Guide for the Industrial Source
Complex (ISC2) Dispersion Models (Version 2) provides user
instructions for setting up and running the ISC2 models.  The
volume is organized to provide different levels of detail to
meet the different needs of various types of users, from novice
users to experienced modelers.  The ISC2 User's Guide has been
developed as part of a larger effort to restructure and
reprogram the original ISC models,  and to improve the
"end-user" documentation for the models.  Volume II of the ISC2
User's Guide provides a technical description of the dispersion
algorithms utilized in the ISC2 models.  Volume III provides a
guide to programmers, including a description of the structure
of the computer code and information about installing and
maintaining the code on various computer systems.
                              111

-------

-------
                        ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

     The User's Guide for the original version of the ISC
Models was written by J.F. Bowers, J.R. Bjorklund, and C.S.
Cheney (1979) of the H.E. Cramer Company, Inc., Salt Lake City,
Utah.  That work was funded by the Environmental Protection
Agency under Contract No. 68-02-3323, with George Schewe as the
Project Officer.  The second edition of the User's Guide for
the original models was prepared by David J. Wackter and John
A. Foster, TRC Environmental Consultants, Inc., East Hartford,
Connecticut  (EPA, 1987a).  That effort was funded by the
Environmental Protection Agency under Contract No. 68-02-3886
with Russell F. Lee as Project Officer.  The User's Guide for
the ISC2 Models has been prepared by Roger W. Erode and JieFu
Wang of Pacific Environmental Services, Inc., Durham, North
Carolina.  This effort has also been funded by the
Environmental Protection Agency under Contract No. 68D00124,
with Russell F. Lee as Work Assignment Manager.
                               xv

-------

-------
                           CONTENTS

PREFACE	iii

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS  	  iv

FIGURES	ix

TABLES  	   x

1.0 INTRODUCTION	1-1
     1.1 HOW TO USE THE ISC2 MANUALS	1-1
          1.1.1 Novice Users	1-2
          1.1.2 Experienced Modelers  	 1-2
          1.1.3 Management/Decision Makers  	 1-3
          1.1.4 Programmers/Systems Analysts  	 1-4
     1.2 OVERVIEW OF THE ISC2 MODELS	1-4
          1.2.1 Regulatory Applicability  	 1-5
          1.2.2 Basic Input Data Requirements 	 1-5
          1.2.3 Computer Hardware Requirements  ....:. 1-6
          1.2.4 Overview of Available Modeling Options  .  . 1-8
     1.3 RELATION TO PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF ISC	1-15
          1.3.1 Brief Background of Restructuring Effort   1-15
          1.3.2 Differences Between the Original ISC and
               the ISC2 Models	1-16
          1.3.3 Suggestions for Converting Previous Input
               Files	1-17

2.0 GETTING STARTED - A BRIEF TUTORIAL  	 2-1
     2.1 DESCRIPTION OF KEYWORD/PARAMETER APPROACH  . .  .  .2-1
          2.1.1 Basic Rules for Structuring Input
               Runstream Files	2-3
          2.1.2 Advantages of the Keyword Approach  .... 2-5
     2.2 REGULATORY DEFAULT OPTION  	 2-6
     2.3 MODEL STORAGE LIMITS 	 2-8
     2.4 SETTING UP A SIMPLE RUNSTREAM FILE	2-10
          2.4.1 A Simple Industrial Source Application  .  2-12
          2.4.2 Selecting Modeling Options - CO Pathway .  2-12
          2.4.3 Specifying Source Inputs - SO Pathway .  .  2-16
          2.4.4 Specifying a Receptor Network - RE
               Pathway	2-20
          2.4.5 Specifying the Meteorological Input - ME
               Pathway	2-21
          2.4.6 Selecting Output Options - OU Pathway .  .  2-24
          2.4.7 Using the Error Message File to Debug the
               Input Runstream File	2-27
          2.4.8 Running the Model and Reviewing the
               Results	2-33
     2.5 MODIFYING AN EXISTING RUNSTREAM FILE	2-42
          2.5.1 Modifying Modeling Options  	  2-42
          2.5.2 Adding or Modifying a Source or Source
               Group	2-44
          2.5.3 Adding or Modifying a Receptor Network  .  2-44

-------
          2.5.4 Modifying Output Options  	  2-45

3.0 DETAILED KEYWORD REFERENCE  	 3-1
     3.1 AN OVERVIEW OF SHORT TERM VS.  LONG TERM MODEL
          INPUTS	3-2
     3.2 CONTROL PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS 	 3-2
          3.2.1 Title Information 	 3-3
          3.2.2 Dispersion Options	 3-3
          3.2.3 Averaging Time Options	3-6
          3.2.4 Specifying the Pollutant Type	3-10
          3.2.5 Modeling With Exponential Decay 	  3-10
          3.2.6 Options for Elevated Terrain Heights  .   .  3-11
          3.2.7 Flagpole Receptor Height Option 	  3-12
          3.2.8 To Run or Not to Run -  That is the
               Question	3-13
          3.2.9 Generating an Input File for the Short
               Term EVENT Model	3-13
          3.2.10 The Model Re-start Capability  	  3-14
          3.2.11 Performing Multiple Year Analyses for
               PM-10	'.....  3-16
          3.2.12 Detailed Error Listing File  	  3-18
     3.3 SOURCE PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS  	  3-19
          3.3.1 Identifying Source Types and Locations   .  3-20
          3.3.2 Specifying Source Release Parameters  .   .  3-21
          3.3.3 Specifying Building Downwash Information   3-25
          3.3.4 Using Variable Emission Rates ......  3-30
          3.3.5 Adjusting the Emission Rate Units for
               Output ........... 	  3-33
          3.3.6 Specifying Variables for Settling, Removal
               and Deposition Calculations  	  3-35
          3.3.7 Using Source Groups 	  3-36
     3.4 RECEPTOR PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS  	  3-38
          3.4.1 Defining Networks of Gridded Receptors   .  3-39
          3.4.2 Using Multiple Receptor Networks  ....  3-45
          3.4.3 Specifying Discrete Receptor Locations   .  3-46
          3.4.4 Specifying Plant Boundary Distances . .   .  3-49
     3.5 METEOROLOGY PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS 	  3-50
          3.5.1 Specifying the Input Data File and Format  3-51
          3.5.2 Specification of Anemometer Height  , ,   .  3-57
          3.5.3 Specifying Station Information  	  3-58
          3.5.4 Specifying the Meteorological STAR Data
                (Applies Only to ISCLT2)	3-59
          3.5.5 Specifying a Data Period to Process
                (Applies Only to ISCST2)	3-61
          3.5.6 Correcting Wind Direction Alignment
               Problems	3-63
          3.5.7 Specifying Wind Speed Categories  ....  3-64
          3.5.8 Specifying Wind Profile Exponents ....  3-64
          3.5.9 Specifying Vertical Temperature Gradients  3-66
          3.5.10 Specifying Average Wind Speeds for the
               Long Term Model	3-67
          3.5.11 Specifying Average Temperatures for the
               Long Term Model	3-68


                               vi

-------
          3.5.12 Specifying Average Mixing Heights for the
               Long Term Model	3-68
     3.6 EVENT PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS (APPLIES ONLY TO
          ISCEV2)	3-69
          3.6.1 Using Events Generated by the ISCST2
               Model	3-71
          3.6.2 Specifying Discrete Events  	  3-73
     3.7 OUTPUT PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS  	  3-73
          3.7.1 Short Term Model Options	3-73
          3.7.2 Short Term EVENT Model (ISCEV2) Options  .  3-84
          3.7.3 Long Term Model Options	3-85
     3.8 CONTROLLING INPUT AND OUTPUT FILES 	  3-89
          3.8.1 Description of ISC2 Input Files	3-89
          3.8.2 Description of ISC2 Output Files  ....  3-91
          3.8.3 Control of File Inputs and Outputs (I/O)   3-98

4.0 COMPUTER NOTES	4-1
     4.1 MINIMUM HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS  	 4-1
          4.1.1 Requirements for Execution on a PC  .... 4-1
          4.1.2 Requirements for Execution on a DEC VAX
               Minicomputer 	 4-3
          4.1.3 Requirements for Execution on an IBM
               Mainframe	4-3
     4.2 COMPILING AND RUNNING THE MODELS ON A PC 	 4-3
          4.2.1 Microsoft Compiler Options  	 4-3
          4.2.2 Modifying PARAMETER Statements for Unusual
               Modeling Needs 	 4-6
     4.3 PORTING THE MODELS TO OTHER HARDWARE
          ENVIRONMENTS  	 4-9
          4.3.1 Non-DOS PCs	4-9
          4.3.2 DEC VAX	4-10
          4.3.3 IBM 3090	4-12
          4.3.4 Various UNIX machines (CRAY, SUN,  DEC VAX,
               AT&T)  	4-13
          4.3.5 Advanced Topics	4-15

5.0 REFERENCES	5-1

APPENDIX A. ALPHABETICAL KEYWORD REFERENCE  	 A-l

APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONAL KEYWORD/PARAMETER REFERENCE  . .  .  . B-l

APPENDIX C. UTILITY PROGRAMS  	 C-l
     C.I CONVERTING INPUT RUNSTREAM FILES - STOLDNEW  .  .  . C-l
     C.2 CONVERTING UNFORMATTED RAMMET FILES TO ASCII
          FORMATTED FILES - BINTOASC  	 C-3
     C.3 LISTING HOURLY METEOROLOGICAL DATA - METLIST .  .  . C-4

APPENDIX D. BATCH FILE DESCRIPTIONS FOR COMPILING AND
     RUNNING THE MODELS ON A PC	D-l
     D.I MICROSOFT/DOS VERSIONS 	 D-l
     D.2 LAHEY/EXTENDED MEMORY VERSIONS 	 D-4
                              vil

-------
APPENDIX E. EXPLANATION OF ERROR MESSAGE CODES  ...... E-l
     E.I INTRODUCTION	  . E-l
     E.2 THE OUTPUT MESSAGE SUMMARY	 E-2
     E.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE DETAILED MESSAGE LAYOUT .... E-3
     E.4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE ERROR/MESSAGE CODES   . E-6

APPENDIX F. DESCRIPTION OF FILE FORMATS	F-l
     F.I ASCII METEOROLOGICAL DATA	F-l
     F.2 RAMMET METEOROLOGICAL DATA	F-2
     F.3 STAR SUMMARY JOINT FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTIONS .... F-4
     F.4 THRESHOLD VIOLATION FILES (MAXIFILE OPTION)   .  .  . F-5
     F.5 POSTPROCESSOR FILES (POSTFILE OPTION)  	 F-6
     F.6 HIGH VALUE RESULTS FOR PLOTTING (PLOTFILE
          OPTION)	F-8

APPENDIX G. QUICK REFERENCE CARD PULL-OUT FOR ISCST2 AND
     ISCLT2 MODELS  	 G-l

APPENDIX H. QUICK REFERENCE CARD PULL-OUT FOR ISCEV2
     (EVENT) MODEL  	 H-l

GLOSSARY	  GLOSSARY-1

INDEX	INDEX-1
                              viii

-------
                            FIGURES

Figure                                                     Page

2-1. EXAMPLE INPUT FILES FOR ISCST (top) AND ISCST2
     (bottom) MODELS FOR SAMPLE PROBLEM 	  2-11

2-2. EXAMPLE INPUT RUNSTREAM FILE FOR SAMPLE PROBLEM  . .  2-26

2-3. EXAMPLE MESSAGE SUMMARY TABLE FOR RUNSTREAM SETUP  .  2-32

2-4. EXAMPLE OF KEYWORD ERROR AND ASSOCIATED MESSAGE
     SUMMARY TABLE  	  2-33

2-5. ORGANIZATION OF ISCST2 MODEL OUTPUT FILE	2-35

2-6. EXAMPLE MODEL OPTION SUMMARY TABLE FROM AN ISC2 MODEL
     OUTPUT FILE	2-39

2-7. EXAMPLE OUTPUT TABLE OF HIGH VALUES BY RECEPTOR  . .  2-40

2-8. EXAMPLE OF RESULT SUMMARY TABLES FOR THE ISC2 SHORT
     TERM MODEL	2-41

E-l. EXAMPLE OF AN ISC2 MESSAGE SUMMARY	 E-3
                               IX

-------

-------
                             TABLES

Table                                                      Page

3-1  SUMMARY OF SUGGESTED PROCEDURES FOR ESTIMATING INITIAL
     LATERAL DIMENSIONS a  AND INITIAL VERTICAL DIMENSIONS azo
     FOR VOLUME AND LINE SOURCES	3-24

B-l  DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PATHWAY KEYWORDS  	 B-3

B-2  DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND
     PARAMETERS	B-4

B-3  DESCRIPTION OF SOURCE PATHWAY KEYWORDS 	 B-7

B-4  DESCRIPTION OF SOURCE PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND
     PARAMETERS	B-8

B-5  DESCRIPTION OF RECEPTOR PATHWAY KEYWORDS 	  B-ll

B-6  DESCRIPTION OF RECEPTOR PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND
     PARAMETERS	B-12

B-7  DESCRIPTION OF METEOROLOGY PATHWAY KEYWORDS  ....  B-l5

B-8  DESCRIPTION OF METEOROLOGY PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND
     PARAMETERS	B-16

B-9  DESCRIPTION OF EVENT PATHWAY KEYWORDS  	  B-19

B-10 DESCRIPTION OF EVENT PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS  B-20

B-ll DESCRIPTION OF OUTPUT PATHWAY KEYWORDS 	  B-21

B-12 DESCRIPTION OF OUTPUT PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND
     PARAMETERS	B-22

-------

-------
                        1.0  INTRODUCTION

     The Industrial Source Complex (ISC2) dispersion models
described in this document refer to restructured and
reprogrammed versions of the original ISC models described in
the ISC Dispersion Model User's Guide - Second Edition
(Revised) (EPA, 1987a).  The models were reprogrammed in order
to improve the overall quality of the computer code, to improve
the user interface, and to improve the end user documentation
of the models.

     This section provides an overall introduction to the ISC2
models and to the ISC2 User's Guide.   It also serves
specifically as an introduction to the user instructions
contained in this volume for setting up and running the ISC2
models.  Some suggestions are offered on how various users
would best benefit from using the manuals.  Also provided is an
overview of the model's applicability, range of options, basic
input data and hardware requirements, and a discussion of the
relation of the ISC2 models to previous versions of ISC.  The
input file needed to run the ISC2 models is based on an
approach that uses descriptive keywords and allows for a
flexible structure and format.  This is quite different from
the earlier versions of the models which used a
rigidly-formatted file with numeric option switches.  Hence,
this volume of the ISC2 Model User's Guide bears little
resemblance to the previous ISC User's Guide.

1.1 HOW TO USE THE ISC2 MANUALS

     The ISC2 Model User's Guide has been designed in an
attempt to meet the needs of various types of users, depending
on their level of experience with the models.  This section
describes briefly how different types of users would benefit
most from their use of the manual.
                              1-1

-------
1.1.1 Novice Users

     Novice users are those whose exposure to or experience
with the ISC2 models has been limited.  They may be new to
dispersion modeling applications in general, or new to the ISC2
models and therefore unfamiliar with the keyword/parameter
approach utilized for the input file.  These users should
review the remainder of this Introduction to gain an overall
perspective of the use of ISC2 models, particularly for
regulatory modeling applications.  They should then concentrate
their review on Section 2, which provides a brief tutorial on
setting up an input file that illustrates the most commonly
used options of the ISC2 Short Term model.  Section 2 provides
a basic description of the input file structure and explains
some of the advantages of the keyword/parameter approach to
specifying modeling options and inputs.  As the user becomes
more familiar with the operation of the models and encounters
the need to use more advanced features of the models, he/she
will want to review the contents of Section 3, which provides a
more detailed and complete reference of the various options for
running the models.

1.1.2 Experienced Modelers

     Experienced modelers will have had considerable experience
in applying the ISC2 models in a variety of situations.  They
should have basic familiarity with the overall goals and
purposes of regulatory modeling in general, and with the scope
of options available in the ISC2 models in particular.
Experienced modelers who are new to the ISC2 models will
benefit from first reviewing the contents of Section 2 of this
volume, which will give them a basic orientation to the
structure, organization and philosophy of the keyword/parameter
approach used for the input runstream file.  Once they have a
basic grasp of the input file structure and syntax rules, they
will benefit most from using Section 3 of this volume as a
                              1-2

-------
reference to learn the overall capabilities of the models, or
to understand the mechanics for implementing particular
options.  The information in Section 3 has a functional
organization with detailed descriptions of each of the
individual keyword options by functional pathway.  Once they
are familiar with most or all of the keywords, they may find
the functional keyword reference provided in Appendix B useful
to quickly review the proper syntax and available
options/parameters for a particular keyword.  They may also
find the Quick Reference Card pull-out available at the end of
the user's guide sufficient as a simple reminder of the
available keywords for each pathway and to ensure the proper
order of parameters for each input image.

     Modelers who have considerable experience with the
previous versions of the ISC models should review the
discussion at the end of this Introduction to understand the
relation of the current version to previous versions of the
models.

     Experienced modelers may also have occasion to peruse the
contents of Volume II, which describes the technical details of
the dispersion modeling algorithms utilized in the ISC2 models.
They may also have an interest in or need to review the
contents of Volume III to learn about the structure and
organization of the computer code, particularly if they are
involved with installing the code on another computer system,
or with compiling the code to meet the memory storage
requirements for a particular application.

1.1.3 Management/Decision Makers

     Those involved in a management or decision-making role for
dispersion modeling applications will be especially interested
in the remainder of this section, which provides an overview of
the models, including their role in various regulatory
                              1-3

-------
programs, a brief description of the range of available
options, and basic input data and computer hardware
requirements needed to run the models.  From this information
they should understand the basic capabilities of the ISC2
models well enough to judge the suitability of the models for
particular applications.  They may also want to review the
brief tutorial provided in Section 2 to learn about the nature
and structure of the input runstream file, in order to better
be able to review the modeling results.

1.1.4 Programmers/Systems Analysts

     Programmers and systems analysts, specifically those
involved with installing the ISC2 code on other computer
systems or charged with maintaining the code, should review the
contents of Volume III.  This will acquaint them with the
structure and organization of the computer code, give specific
details on compiling and linking the code for various
situations, and explain in detail the memory storage
requirements and control of input and output (I/O).  They may
also wish to review the remainder of this Introduction and the
brief tutorial in Section 2 of this volume in order to have a
basic understanding of the nature and overall capabilities of
the models, and to understand the basic input runstream file
structure and organization.

1.2 OVERVIEW OF THE ISC2 MODELS

     This section provides an overview of the ISC2 models,
including a discussion of the regulatory applicability of the
models, a description of the basic options available for
running the models, and an explanation of the basic input data
and hardware requirements needed for executing the models.
                              1-4

-------
1.2.1 Regulatory Applicability

     The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) maintains a
Guideline on Air Quality Models which provides the agency's
guidance on regulatory applicability of air quality dispersion
models in general.  Any regulatory application of the ISC2
models should conform to the guidance set forth in the
Guideline on Air Quality Models (Revised) (EPA,  1987b),
including the most recent Supplements to the guideline.  Any
non-guideline application of the models should meet the
requirements of the applicable reviewing agency, such as an EPA
Regional Office, a State or a local air pollution control
agency.  In general, regulatory modeling applications should be
carried out in accordance with a modeling protocol that is
reviewed and approved by the appropriate agency prior to
conducting the modeling.  The modeling protocol should identify
the specific model, modeling options and input data to be used
for a particular application.

1.2.2 Basic Input Data Requirements

     There are two basic types of inputs that are needed to run
the ISC2 models.  One of the inputs is the runstream setup file
which contains the selected modeling options, as well as source
location and parameter data, receptor locations, meteorological
data file specifications, and output options.  The second basic
type of input data needed to run the model is the
meteorological data.  There are various options for
meteorological data file formats available with the ISC2
models.  These are described briefly later in this section, and
in more detail in Sections 2 and 3.
                              1-5

-------
1.2.3 Computer Hardware Requirements

     1.2.3.1 PC Hardware Requirements.

     Given the rapid increase in speed and capacity of personal
computers (PCs) available for modeling in recent years, and
their relative ease of use and access,  the PC has become the
most popular environment for performing dispersion modeling
applications within the modeling community (Bauman and Dehart,
1988; Rorex, 1990).  This trend can be expected to continue in
the future.  The current versions of the ISC2 models were
developed on an IBM-compatible PC using the Microsoft FORTRAN
Optimizing Compiler (Version 5.1), and have been designed to
run on such machines with a minimum of 64OK bytes of RAM and
MS-DOS Version 3.2 or higher.  In order to handle the input
data files  (runstream setup and meteorology)  and the output
files, it is highly recommended that the system have a hard
disk drive.  The amount of storage space required on the hard
disk for a particular application will depend greatly on the
output options selected.  Some of the optional output files of
concentration data can be rather large.  More information on
output file products is provided in Sections 2 and 3.

     While a math coprocessor chip is optional for execution of
the ISC2 models on a PC, it is highly recommended, especially
for the Short Term model, due to the large increase in
execution speed that will be experienced.  The model may be
expected to run about five to ten times faster with a math
coprocessor than without one.

     For particularly large applications, involving a large
number of sources, source groups, receptors and averaging
periods, the user may find that the 640K RAM limit available
with DOS is not enough.  In addition to the DOS executable
versions of the models, extended memory versions are available
for use on  80386 and 80486 PCs with at least 4 MB of RAM.
                              1-6

-------
Section 4.2.2 of this volume and Volume III of the ISC2 User's
Guide contain information on increasing the capacity of the
model and setting it up to run on systems (with 80386
processors and higher) that make use of extended memory beyond
the 640K limit of DOS.  There are special requirements for the
operating system and Fortran language compiler needed to
utilize the extended memory on these machines.

     1.2.3.2 DEC VAX Requirements.

     The models have also been uploaded and tested on a DEC VAX
minicomputer.  As with the IBM 3090, the VAX has some
advantages of speed and greater memory capacity over the PC
environment.  There are no particular hardware requirements for
running the models on the VAX.  The user must be familiar with
the operating system and Fortran language compiler being
utilized on the VAX in order to properly setup and run the
model and control the input and output files.  Instructions for
setting up and running the models on the DEC VAX are included
in this volume and in more detail in Volume III of the User's
Guide.

     1.2.3.3 IBM 3090 Requirements.

     While the models were developed on the PC, they have been
uploaded and tested on EPA's IBM 3090 mainframe computer.  The
mainframe has advantages of speed and greater memory capacity
over the PC environment.  There are no particular hardware
requirements for running the models on the IBM 3090.  However,
the user must be familiar with the IBM Job Control Language
(JCL) and the VS FORTRAN Version 2.0 compiler in order to
properly setup and run the models and control the input and
output files in the mainframe environment.  Instructions for
setting up and running the models on the IBM 3090 are included
in this volume and in Volume III of the User's Guide,
                              1-7

-------
1.2.4 Overview of Available Modeling Options

     The ISC2 models include a wide range of options for
modeling air quality impacts of pollution sources, making them
popular choices among the modeling community for a variety of
applications.  The following sections provide a brief overview
of the options available in the ISC2 models.

     1.2.4.1 Dispersion Options.

     Since the ISC2 models are especially designed to support
the EPA's regulatory modeling programs, the regulatory modeling
options, as specified in the Guideline on Air Quality Models
(Revised), are the default mode of operation for the models.
These options include the use of stack-tip downwash,
buoyancy-induced dispersion, final plume rise (except for
sources with building downwash), a routine for processing
averages when calm winds occur, default values for wind profile
exponents and for the vertical potential temperature gradients,
and the use of upper bound estimates for super-squat buildings
having an influence on the lateral dispersion of the plume. The
user can easily ensure the use of the regulatory default
options by selecting a single keyword on the modeling option
input card.  To maintain the flexibility of the model, the
non-regulatory default options have been retained, and by using
descriptive keywords to specify these options it is evident at
a glance from the input or output file which options have been
employed for a particular application.

     As with the earlier version of the ISC models, the user
may select either rural or urban dispersion parameters
(although the non-regulatory options of Urban Mode 1 and Urban
Mode 2 have been eliminated), depending on the characteristics
of the source location.  The user also has the option of
calculating either concentration values or deposition values
for a particular run.  The user can specify several short term
                              1-8

-------
averages to be calculated in a single run of the ISC2 Short
Term model, as well as requesting the overall period (e.g.
annua1)  averages.

     1.2.4.2 Source Options.

     The model is capable of handling multiple sources,
including point, volume and area source types.  Line sources
may also be modeled as a string of volume sources.  Several
source groups may be specified in a single run, with the source
contributions combined for each group.  This is particularly
useful for PSD applications where combined impacts may be
needed for a subset of the modeled background sources that
consume increment, while the combined impacts from all
background sources (and the permitted source) are needed to
demonstrate compliance with the National Ambient Air Quality
Standards  (NAAQS).  As with earlier versions of ISC, the models
contain algorithms for modeling the effects of aerodynamic
downwash due to nearby buildings on point source emissions, and
algorithms for modeling the effects of settling and removal
(through dry deposition) of large particulates.  As noted
above, for applications involving large particulates, the user
can select either concentration or deposition values to be
calculated.  Once a run has been setup for either concentration
or deposition, then a trivial change of one keyword is all that
is needed to switch the model to calculate the other.

     Source emission rates can be treated as constant
throughout the modeling period, or may be varied by month,
season,  hour-of-day, or other optional periods of variation.
These variable emission rate factors may be specified for a
single source or for a group of sources.
                              1-9

-------
     1.2.4.3 Receptor Options.

     The ISC2 models have added flexibility in the
specification of receptor locations compared to the previous
versions of the model.  The user now has the capability of
specifying multiple receptor networks in a single run, and may
also mix Cartesian grid receptor networks and polar grid
receptor networks in the same run.  This is useful for
applications where the user may need a coarse grid over the
whole modeling domain, but a denser grid in the area of maximum
expected impacts.  There is also greater flexibility in
specifying the location of the origin for polar receptors than
in the earlier models, which assumed that all polar receptors
were referenced to an origin at (0,0) in x,y, coordinates.

     As with the earlier version of the ISC models, the user
can input elevated receptor heights in order to model the
effects of terrain above (or below) stack base, and may also
specify receptor elevations above ground level to model
flagpole receptors.  Any terrain heights input above the
release height for a particular source are "chopped-off" at the
release height for that source's calculations.  The ISC2 models
do not include algorithms to model the impacts of sources on
complex terrain, i.e., terrain above the release height.

     1.2.4.4 Meteorology Options.

     The ISC2 Short Term (ISCST2) model can utilize the
unformatted, sequential files of meteorological data generated
by the RAMMET and the MPRM preprocessors, provided the data
file was generated by the same Fortran compiler as was used for
the model.  The user also has considerable flexibility to
utilize formatted ASCII files that contain sequential hourly
records of meteorological variables.  For these hourly ASCII
files, the user may use a default ASCII format, may specify the
ASCII read format, or may select free-formatted reads for
                              1-10

-------
inputting the meteorological data.  A utility program called
BINTOASC is provided with the ISC2 models to convert
unformatted meteorological data files of several types to the
default ASCII format used by ISCST2 and ISCEV2.  This greatly
improves the portability of applications to different computer
systems.  The BINTOASC program is described in Appendix C.

     The previous version of the ISCST model allowed the user
to specify hourly meteorological data in a "card image" format
within the input option file.  Applications of the earlier
ISCST model using card image meteorological data can easily be
duplicated using the ASCII file options available in the ISCST2
model.  The model will process all available meteorological
data in the specified input file by default, but the user can
easily specify selected days or ranges of days to process.

     The ISC2 Long Term (ISCLT2) model uses joint frequency
distributions of wind speed class, by wind direction sector, by
stability category, known as STAR summaries (for STability
ARray).  These STAR summaries are available from the National
Climatic Data Center in Asheville, North Carolina.  They may
also be generated from sequential data files using the STAR
utility program available on EPA's SCRAM Bulletin Board System
or by the MPRM meteorological processor for on-site data.  The
meteorological data for ISCLT2 are read in from a separate data
file rather than being included in the input option file, as
was done in the earlier versions of ISCLT.

     1.2.4.5 Output Options.

     The ISC2 models retain options for all of the basic types
of outputs available with the previous versions, and also
include some new output options.  The basic types of printed
output available with ISCST2 are:
                              1-11

-------
        Summaries of high values (highest/ second highest,
        etc.)  by receptor for each averaging period and source
        group combination;
        Summaries of overall maximum values (e.g., the maximum
        50) for each averaging period and source group
        combination; and
        Tables of concurrent values summarized by receptor for
        each averaging period and source group combination for
        each day of data processed.  These "raw" concentration
        values may also be output to unformatted  (binary)
        files, as described below.
     For the Long Term model, the user can also select output
tables of values for each receptor, and/or tables of overall
maximum values.  The tables by receptor and maximum value
tables can be output for the source group values or for the
individual source values, or both.  In addition, when maximum
values for individual sources are output, the user has the
option of specifying whether the maximum source values are to
be the maximum values for each source independently, or the
contribution of each source to the maximum group values, or
both.

     In addition to the tabular printed output products
described above, the new models provide options for several
types of file output products.  One of these options for ISCST2
corresponds to the option for an unformatted ("binary") file of
all concentration values available with the previous versions
of ISCST.  These files are often used for special
postprocessing of the data.  In addition to the unformatted
concentration files, ISCST2 provides options for two additional
types of file outputs.  One option is to generate a file of
(X,Y) coordinates and design values (e.g., the second highest
values at each receptor for a particular averaging period and
source group combination) that can be easily imported into many
graphics plotting packages to generate contour plots of the
concentration values.  Separate files can be specified for all
                              1-12

-------
of the averaging period and source group combinations of
interest to the user.

     Another output file option of the ISCST2 model is to
generate a file of all occurrences when a concentration value
equals or exceeds a user-specified threshold.  Again, separate
files are generated for only those combinations of averaging
period and source group that are of interest to the user. These
files include the date on which the threshold violation
occurred, the receptor location, and the concentration value.

     In addition to the availability of these new options for
output products from ISCST2, the user has more flexibility to
select only the output desired for a particular application. As
an example, the option in the old ISCST model to generate an
unformatted ("binary") file of concentration values for
postprocessing combined the results for each receptor, source
group and averaging period combination into a single file. This
file of raw concentration values could be very large for even
routine size runs, and the structure of the file made it
cumbersome to work with.  Often the user may be interested in
postprocessing a single averaging period and source group of
interest that is a small subset of the file for a full
application.  For the original ISCST model, a separate run may
have been set up to generate the concentration file for only
that combination.  In ISCST2, the unformatted concentration
files are separated for each averaging period and source group
combination, and the user can specify that files be generated
for only those combinations that are of interest for
postprocessing.  Similar flexibility is available with all of
the output options for the new model.
                              1-13

-------
     1.2.4.6 Source Contribut ion Analyses.

     In air quality dispersion modeling applications, the user
may have a need to know the contribution that a particular
source makes to an overall concentration value for a group of
sources.  This section provides a brief introduction to how
these types of source contribution (sometimes referred to as
source culpability) analyses are performed using the ISC2
models.  More detailed information about exercising these
options is provided in Section 3.

     In the previous version of the ISCLT model, the user had
an option (controlled by option switch ISW(ll)) to have the
highest 10 values for each source and source group reported
independently, or to have the 10 highest values from the
combined source group and the contributions from the individual
sources to those highest group values.  This option is retained
in the ISCLT2 model, as mentioned briefly in the previous
section.

     The previous version of the ISCST model provided the
option of specifying source groups for which the model
calculates high values independently.  However, there was no
easy mechanism for obtaining the same kind of source
contribution information that was provided by the ISCLT model.
Users would often have to run the model a second time selecting
only specific days where the high values occurred, and setting
up each source in its own source group in order to obtain
source contribution results.

     Recognizing that source contribution information is also
important to many short term modeling analyses, the ISCST2
model has been designed to make it much easier for users to
perform this type of analysis.  This is accomplished with the
introduction of an additional model, referred to as the ISC2
Short Term - EVENT model  (ISCEV2).  The ISCST2 model treats
                              1-14

-------
source groups independently, in the same manner as the old
ISCST model.  The ISCEV2 (EVENT) model is set up specifically
to provide the contributions from individual sources to the
concentration values for particular events.  These events may
be the design concentrations (e.g., the high-second-high
24-hour average concentration for a particular group of
sources) that were generated from an execution of the ISCST2
model.  Other events of interest might be occurrences of
violations of a particular standard, for which it is necessary
to determine whether the source being permitted contributes
above a significance level.  The models are set up in such a
way that both of these types of events can be passed directly
from an execution of the ISCST2 model to an input file for the
EVENT model.  The user is thus able to run the models in a
batch mode to obtain the overall design value results from
ISCST2 and the source contribution information from ISCEV2 in a
single step.  The EVENT model can also be run separately and
accepts user-specified events for source contribution
processing.

1.3 RELATION TO PREVIOUS VERSIONS OF ISC

1.3.1 Brief Background of Restructuring Effort

     The ISC2 models came about as a result of a major effort
to restructure and reprogram the models that began in April
1989, and was completed in January 1992.  The effort was
largely motivated by the need to improve the quality,
reliability, and maintainability of the code when numerous
"bugs" were discovered after the implementation of the revised
downwash algorithms for shorter stacks.  It became widely
recognized that the code, originally developed in the 1970's
and modified numerous times since, had become impossible to
reliably modify, debug or maintain.  However, the goals of the
reprogramming effort also included improving the user interface
by modifying the input file structure and the output products,
                              1-15

-------
and to provide better "end user" documentation for the revised
models.  The ISC2 models were developed as replacements for and
not updates to the previous versions of the models.  The
purpose of the reprogrammina effort was NOT to modify any of
the ISC model algorithms.

1.3.2 Differences Between the Original ISC and the ISC2 Models

     During the course of reprogramming and testing the models,
several discrepancies with the older versions of the models
were discovered.  These discrepancies were resolved, and
corrections were incorporated into the ISC2 models prior to
their release.  Because of the nature of some of these bugs in
the earlier versions, it was not practical to "fix" the
previous versions prior to releasing the new models.  However,
for most applications, the design values estimated by the ISC2
models will not differ significantly from the design values
estimated by the original models.  The most significant
discrepancies are likely to occur for sources whose plume rise
is dominated by momentum rather than buoyancy, and for certain
source situations involving the building downwash algorithms.
Impacts for area sources for the ISCST2 model will be about
11.4 percent lower than previous versions of ISCST due to the
correction of an error in the derivation of the area source
equation for a finite line segment.  There was also an error in
the original ISCLT model in the treatment of lateral virtual
distances that effects area sources, volume sources and point
sources with building downwash.  The largest differences due to
this error are likely to be for receptors located relatively
close to the source.

     The only technical change between ISC2 and old versions of
ISC, not involving correction of an error, is the extension of
the direction-specific treatment of building downwash
influences from the Schulman-Scire algorithm for shorter stacks
                              1-16

-------
to the Huber-Snyder algorithm for stacks up to the Good
Engineering Practice (GEP) stack height.

1.3.3 Suggestions for Converting Previous Input Files

     In order to make the transition from the old models to
ISC2 as easy as possible, a file conversion utility (STOLDNEW)
has been developed that converts input files for the old ISCST
model to the format required to run the ISCST2 model.   Since
there is considerable flexibility in structuring and formatting
the input file for the ISCST2 model, and there are options
available in ISCST2 that weren't available in the old model,
the file generated by the conversion program may not always be
in a form that will best meet the user's needs relative to
ISCST2.  However, user's will be able to make use of old input
files and easily setup previous applications to run with the
ISCST2 model.  The file conversion utility is described in more
detail in Appendix C.  Due to similarities between the ISCST2
and ISCLT2 inputs, it is now much easier to setup an ISCLT2 run
from an ISCST2 input file.
                              1-17

-------

-------
             2.0 GETTING  STARTED  - A BRIEF TUTORIAL

     This section provides a brief tutorial for setting up a
simple application problem with the ISC2 Short Term model,
which serves as an introduction for novice users to the ISC2
models.  The example illustrates the usage of the most commonly
used options in the ISC2 models for regulatory applications.  A
more complete description of the available options for setting
up the ISC2 models is provided in Section 3.

     The example problem presented in this section is a simple
application of the ISCST2 model to a single point source.  The
source is a hypothetical stack at a small isolated facility in
a rural setting.   Since the stack is below the Good Engineering
Practice (GEP) stack height, the emissions from the source are
subject to the influence of aerodynamic downwash due to the
presence of nearby buildings.  The tutorial leads the user
through selection and specification of modeling options,
specification of source parameters,  definition of receptor
locations,  specification of the input meteorological data, and
selection of output options.  Since this discussion is aimed at
novice users of the ISC2 models,  a general description of the
input file keyword/parameter approach is provided first.

2.1 DESCRIPTION OF KEYWORD/PARAMETER APPROACH

     The input file for the ISC2 models makes use of a
keyword/parameter approach to specifying the options and input
data for running the models.  The descriptive keywords and
parameters that make up this input runstream file may be
thought of as a command language through which the user
communicates with the model what he/she wishes to accomplish
for a particular model run.  The keywords specify the type of
option or input data being entered on each line of the input
file, and the parameters following the keyword define the
specific options selected or the actual input data.   Some of
                              2-1

-------
the parameters  are also input as descriptive secondary
keywords.

     The runstream file is divided  into five functional
"pathways."   These pathways are identified by a two-character
pathway ID placed at the beginning  of  each runstream image.  The
pathways and the order in which they are input to the model  are
as follows:

     CO - for specifying overall job control options;
     SO - for specifying source information;
     RE - for specifying REceptor information;
     ME - for specifying MEteorology information; and
     OU - for specifying output options.

     Each line  of the input runstream  file consists of a
pathway ID,  an  8-character keyword, and a parameter list.  An
example of a line of input from a runstream file, with its
various parts identified, is shown  below:
      Column: 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
            CO HODELOPT 0FAULT RURAL COMC
                                   Parameters
                                   	 8-Character Keyword
                                   	 2-Character Pathway ID
     The  following sections describe the rules for structuring
the input runstream file, and explain some of the advantages of
the keyword/parameter approach.
                                2-2

-------
2.1.1 Basic Rules for Structuring Input Runstream Files

     While the input runstream file has been designed to
provide the user with considerable flexibility in structuring
the input file, there are some basic syntax rules that need to
be followed.  These rules serve to maintain some consistency
between input files generated by different users, to simplify
the job of error handling performed by the models on the input
data, and to provide information to the model in the
appropriate order wherever order is critical to the
interpretation of the inputs.  These basic rules and the
various elements of the input runstream file are described in
the paragraphs that follow.

     One of the most basic rules is that all inputs for a
particular pathway must be contiguous, i.e., all inputs for the
CO pathway must come first, followed by the inputs for the SO
pathway, and so on.  The beginning of each pathway is
identified with a "STARTING" keyword, and the ending of the
pathway with the "FINISHED" keyword.  Thus the first functional
record of each input file must be "CO STARTING" and the last
record of each input file must be "OU FINISHED."  The rest of
the input images will define the options and input data for a
particular run.

     Each record in the input runstream file is referred to as
a runstream "image."  These records are initially read into the
model as 80-character images.  The information on each input
image consists of a "pathway," a "keyword," and one or more
"parameters."  Each of these "fields" on the runstream image
must be separated from other fields by at least one blank
space.  To simplify the interpretation of the runstream image
by the model, the runstream file must be structured with the
two-character pathway in columns 1 and 2, the eight-character
keyword in columns 4 through 11, followed by the parameters in
columns 13 through 80, as necessary.  (For reasons that are
                              2-3

-------
explained in Section 2.4.8,  the models will accept  input  files
where all inputs are shifted by up to three columns to  the
right.)  For most  keywords,  the order of parameters following
the keyword is  important —  the exact spacing of the parameters
is not important,  as long as they are separated from each other
by at least one blank space  and do not extend beyond the  80
character limit.   The example of a runstream image  from the CO
pathway shown above is repeated here:
      CoIumn: 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
           CO MODELOPT OFAULT RURAL CONC
                                   Parameters
                                  	 8-Character Keyword
                                  	 2-Character Pathway ID
     Alphabetical  characters can be input as either  lower case
or upper case  letters.   The models convert all character input
to upper case  letters internally, with the exception of the
title fields and file names to be discussed later.   Throughout
this document,  the convention of using upper case  letters is
followed.  For numeric input data, it should be noted that all
data are assumed to be in metric units, i.e., length units of
meters, speed  units of meters per second, temperature units of
degrees Kelvin,  and emission units of grams per second.   In a
few instances,  the user has the option of specifying units of
feet for length and the model will perform the conversion to
meters.  These exceptions are the input of receptor  heights for
elevated terrain and the specification of anemometer height,
since these values are often more readily available  in feet
than in meters.

     Certain keywords are mandatory and must be present in
every runstream file, such as the MODELOPT keyword shown in the
                               2-4

-------
example above which identifies the modeling options.  Other
keywords are optional and are only needed to exercise
particular options, such as the option to allow for the input
of flagpole receptor heights.  Some of the keywords are
repeatable, such as the keywords to specify source parameters,
while other keywords may only appear once.  The keyword
references in Section 3, Appendices A and B and the Quick
Reference Card at the end of this volume identify each keyword
as to its type, either mandatory or optional, and either
repeatable or non-repeatable.

     With a few exceptions that are described below, the order
of keywords within each pathway is not critical.  For the CO
pathway, an exception is that the MODELOPT and POLLUTID
keywords must be specified before the DCAYCOEF or HALFLIFE
keyword because of the link between the urban default option
and the decay coefficient for S02.   For the SO pathway,  the
LOCATION keyword must be specified before other keywords for a
particular source, and the SRCGROUP keyword must be the last
keyword before SO FINISHED.  For keywords on the SO pathway
that accept a range of source IDs, the source parameters
specified by those keywords will only be applied to the sources
already defined, and will exclude any sources that are
specified latter in the input file.

2.1.2 Advantages of the Keyword Approach

     The keyword approach provides some advantages over the
type of input file used by the earlier versions of ISC.  One
advantage is that the keywords are descriptive of the options
and inputs being used for a particular run, making it easier
for a reviewer to ascertain what was accomplished in a
particular run by reviewing the input file.  Another advantage
is that the user has considerable flexibility in structuring
the inputs to improve their readability and understandability,
as long as they adhere to the few basic rules described above.
                              2-5

-------
     Some special provisions have been made to increase the
flexibility to the user in structuring the input files.  One
provision is to allow for blank records in the input file. This
allows the user to separate the pathways from each other, or to
separate a group of images, such as source locations, from the
other images.  Another provision is for the use of "comment
cards," identified by a "**" in the pathway field. Any input
image that has "**" for the pathway ID will be ignored by the
model.  This is especially useful for labeling the columns in
the source parameter input images, as illustrated in the
example problem later in this section.  It may also be used to
"comment out" certain options for a particular run without
deleting the options and associated data (e.g., elevated
terrain heights) completely from the input file.  Because of
the descriptive nature of the keyword options and the
flexibility of the inputs it is generally much easier to make
modifications to an existing input runstream file to obtain the
desired result.

     Another reason for improved "user-friendliness" of the new
models over the previous versions of the models is that much
more detailed error-liandling has been built into the models.
The new model provides descriptions of the location and nature
of all of the errors encountered for a particular run.  Rather
than stopping execution at each occurrence of an input error,
the new model will read through and attempt to process all
input records and report all errors encountered.  If a fatal
error occurs, then the model will not attempt to execute the
model calculations.

2.2 REGULATORY DEFAULT OPTION

     The regulatory default option is controlled from the
MODELOPT keyword on the CO pathway.  As its name implies, this
keyword controls the selection of modeling options.  It is a
mandatory, non-repeatable keyword, and it is an especially
                              2-6

-------
important keyword for understanding and controlling the
operation of the ISC2 models.  As noted in Section 1, the
regulatory default options, as specified in the Guideline on
Air Quality Models, are truly the default options for the ISC2
models.  That is to say that, unless specified otherwise
through the available keyword options, the ISC2 models
implement the following regulatory options:

        Use stack-tip downwash (except for Schulman-Scire
        downwash);
        Use buoyancy-induced dispersion (except for
        Schulman-Scire downwash);
        Do not use gradual plume rise (except for building
        downwash);
        Use the calms processing routines;
        Use upper-bound concentration estimates for sources
        influenced by building downwash from super-squat
        buildings;
        Use default wind profile exponents; and
        Use default vertical potential temperature gradients.

Rather than specifying options with numeric switches as in the
earlier version of the ISC model, the parameters for the
MODELOPT keyword are character strings,  called "secondary
keywords," that are descriptive of the option being selected.
For example, to ensure that the regulatory default options be
used for a particular run, the user would include the secondary
keyword "DFAULT" on the MODELOPT input.   The presence of this
secondary keyword tells the model to override any attempt to
use a non-regulatory default option.  The model will warn the
user if a non-regulatory option is selected along with the
DFAULT option, but will not halt processing.  For regulatory
modeling applications, it is strongly suggested that the DFAULT
switch be set, even though the model defaults to the regulatory
options without it.
                              2-7

-------
     For any application in which a non-regulatory option is to
be selected, the DFAULT switch must not be set, since it would
otherwise override the non-regulatory option.  The
non-regulatory options are also specified by descriptive
secondary keywords, such as "NOBID" to specify the option not
to use buoyancy-induced dispersion.  (A programmer note:  these
modeling option keywords also correspond to the Fortran logical
variable names used to control the options in the ISC2 computer
code.  This is one reason why they are limited to six
characters, .e.g., DFAULT instead of DEFAULT, since the
standard Fortran language (ANSI, 1978) only allows variable
names up to six characters in length).

     The MODELOPT keyword, which is also used to specify the
selection of rural or urban dispersion parameters, and
concentration or deposition values, is described in more detail
in the Section 3.2.2.

2.3 MODEL STORAGE LIMITS

     The ISC2 models have been designed using a static storage
allocation approach, where the model results are stored in data
arrays, and the array limits are controlled by PARAMETER
statements in the Fortran computer code.  These array limits
also correspond to the limits on the number of sources,
receptors, source groups and averaging periods that the model
can accept for a given run.  Depending on the amount of memory
available on the particular computer system being used, and the
needs for a particular modeling application, the storage limits
can easily be changed by modifying the PARAMETER statements and
recompiling the model.  Section 4.2.2 of this volume and Volume
III of the User's Guide provide more information about
modifying the storage limits of the models.

     The limits on the number of receptors, sources, source
groups, averaging periods, and events  (for ISCEV2 model) are
                              2-8

-------
initially set as follows for the three models for the DOS and
extended memory (EM) versions on the PC:
PARAMETER
Name
NREC
NSRC
NGRP
NAVE
NEVE
Limit
Controlled
Number of
Receptors
Number of
Sources
Number of
Source
Groups
Number of
Short Term
Averages
Number of
Events
ISCST2
600 (DOS)
1200 (EM)
100 (DOS)
300 (EM)
2 (DOS)
5 (EM)
2 (DOS)
4 (EM)
-
ISCEV2
-
100 (DOS)
500 (EM)
25 (DOS)
50 (EM)
4 (DOS)
4 (EM)
2500 (DOS)
5000 (EM)
ISCLT2
500 (DOS)
1200 (EM)
100 (DOS)
300 (EM)
3 (DOS)
5 (EM)
-
-
     Fortran PARAMETER statements are also used to specify the
array limits for the number of high short term values by
receptor to store for the ISCST2 model (NVAL, initially set to
6),  and the number of overall maximum values to store (NMAX,
initially set to 50 for ISCST2 and to 10 for Long Term).  The
NMAX limits correspond to the limits available in the previous
versions of the model, but can also be modified by the user and
the model recompiled in order to meet particular needs.

     In addition to the parameters mentioned above, parameters
are used to specify the number of gridded receptor networks in
a particular run (NNET),  and the number of x-coordinate (or
distance) and y-coordinate (or direction) values (IXM and IYM)
for each receptor network.  Initially, the models allow up to 5
receptor networks (of any type), and up to 50 x-coordinates (or
distances) and up to 50 y-coordinates (or directions).  The
source arrays also include limits on the number of variable
emission rate factors per source (NQF, initially set to 96 for
SEASHR in Short Term and to 36 for the DOS version of Long Term
                              2-9

-------
and 144 for the EM version of Long Term),  the number of sectors
for direction-specific building dimensions (NSEC, initially set
to 36 for Short Term and 16 for Long Term),  and the number of
settling and removal categories (NVSMAX,  initially set to 20).

2.4 SETTING UP A SIMPLE RUNSTREAM FILE

     This section goes through a step-by-step description of
setting up a simple application problem,  illustrating the most
commonly used options of the ISCST2 model.  The example problem
is based on the test example file provided with the previous
version of the ISCST model.  The input files for the previous
version of the ISCST model and the new version are shown
together in Figure 2-1.  The remainder of this section explains
the various parts of the input file for the ISCST2 model, and
also illustrates some of the flexibility in structuring the
input file.
                              2-10

-------
  TEST RUNSTREAM - RURAL  DOUMUASH TEST  -  35M STACK, "TALL" BUILDING
   141001001000011011101101211112
                 36
                 200.
1
 100.
  10.
  6.1
      300.
          500.
 1000.
                  10.
  11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
  11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
  11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
  11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
  1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
   94823
      1
   34.0
   34.0
   34.0
     64 94823
          1.0
   34.0 34.0
   34.0 34.0
   34.0 34.0
  64

34.0
34.0
34.0
              35.  432. 11.70   2.4 -34. 33.33
34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0 34.0  34.0
34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0 34.0  34.0
34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0  34.0 34.0  34.0
                               15.
   35.43 36.45 36.37 35.18 32.92 29.66 25.50 20.56  15.00 20.56 25.50  29.66
   32.92 35.18 36.37 36.45 35.43 33.33 35.43 36.45  0.00 35.18 32.92  29.66
   25.50 20.56 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18  36.37 36.45 35.43  33.33
  CO STARTING
  CO TITLEONE A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
  CO HOOELOPT  DFAULT  RURAL  CONC
  CO AVERT I ME  3  24  PERIOD
  CO POLLUTID  S02
  CO  RUNORNOT
  CO  FINISHED

  SO  STARTING
  SO  LOCATION
  SO  SRCPARAM
  SO  BUILDHGT
  SO  BUILDHGT
  SO  BUILDHGT
  SO  BUILDUID
  SO  BUILDUID
  SO  BUILDUID
  SO  BUILDUID
  SO  BUILDUID
  SO  SRCGROUP
  SO  FINISHED

  RE  STARTING
  RE  GRIDPOLR
  RE  GRIDPOLR
  RE  GRIDPOLR
  RE  GRIDPOLR
  RE  GRIDPOLR
  RE  FINISHED

  ME  STARTING
  ME  INPUTFIL
  ME  ANEMHGHT
  ME  SURFDATA
  ME  UAIRDATA
  ME  FINISHED

  OU  STARTING
  OU  RECTABLE
  OU  MAXTABLE
  OU  FINISHED
        RUN
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        STACK1
        ALL
POINT  0.0
1.00  35.0
34. 34. 34.
34. 34. 34.
34. 34, 34.
35.43 36.45
15.00 20.56
35.43 33.33
25.50 20.56
36.37 36.45
       0.0   0.0
      432.0  11.7
      34.  34. 34.
      34.  34. 34.
      34.  34. 34.
      36.37 35.18
      25.50 29.66
      35.43 36.45
      15.00 20.56
      35.43 33.33
 2.4
34. 34.  34.
34. 34.  34.
34. 34.  34.
32.92 29.66
32.92 35.18
 0.00 35.18
25.50 29.66
34. 34.  34.
34. 34.  34.
34. 34.  34.
25.50 20.56
36.37 36.45
32.92 29.66
32.92 35.18
POL1
POL1
POL1
POL1
POL1
STA
ORIG
DIST
GDIR
END

0.0
100.
36


0.0
200.
10.



300.
10.

                                    500.  1000.
        PREPIT.BIN  UNFORM
        20  FEET
        94823  1964  PITTSBURGH
        94823  1964  PITTSBURGH
        ALLAVE
        ALLAVE
 FIRST
 50
  SECOND
FIGURE  2-1.  EXAMPLE  INPUT FILES  FOR  ISCST  (top)  AND  ISCST2

                   (bottom)  MODELS FOR  SAMPLE  PROBLEM
                                               2-11

-------
2.4.1 A Simple Industrial Source Application


     For this simple tutorial,  an application is selected

involving a single point source of SO2 that  is  subject  to the

influences of building downwash.  The source consists of a

35-meter stack with a buoyant release that is adjacent to a

building.  We will assume that the stack is situated in a rural

setting with relatively flat terrain within 50 kilometers of

the plant.  A polar receptor network will be placed around the

stack location to identify areas of maximum impact.


2.4.2 Selecting Modeling Options - CO Pathway


     The modeling options are input to the model on the control

pathway.  The mandatory keywords for the CO pathway are listed

below.  A complete listing of all keywords is provided in

Appendix B.


     STARTING - Indicates the beginning of inputs for the
                pathway; this keyword is mandatory on each of
                the pathways.

     TITLEONE - A user-specified title line (up to 68
                characters) that will appear on each page of
                the printed output file (an optional second
                title line is also available with the keyword
                TITLETWO).

     MODELOPT - Controls the modeling options selected for a
                particular run through a series of secondary
                keywords.

     AVERTIME - Identifies the averaging periods to be
                calculated for a particular run.

     POLLUTID - Identifies the type of pollutant being modeled.
                At the present time, this option only
                influences the results if SO, is modeled with
                urban dispersion in the regulatory default
                mode, when a half-life of 4 hours is used to
                model exponential decay.

     •RUNORNOT - A special keyword that tells the model whether
                to run the full model executions or not.  If


                              2-12

-------
                the user selects not to  run,  then the runstream
                setup file will be processed  and any input
                errors reported, but no  dispersion calculations
                will be made.
     FINISHED - Indicates that the user  is  finished with the
                inputs for this pathway;  this keyword is also
                mandatory on each of the other pathways.

     The first two keywords are fairly self-explanatory.  As
discussed above in Section 2.2, the MODELOPT  keyword on the CO
pathway is pivotal to controlling the modeling options used for
a particular run.  For this example, we  intend to use the
regulatory default options, so we will include the "DFAULT"
keyword on our MODELOPT input image.  We also need to identify
whether the source being modeled is in a rural or an urban
environment (see Section 8.2.8 of the Guideline on Air Quality
Models for a discussion of rural/urban determinations).   For
this example we are assuming that the facility is in a rural
setting.  We also need to identify on this  input image whether
we want the model to calculate concentration  values or
deposition values.  For this example, we are  calculating
concentration values.  After the first three  input records our
input file will look something like this:
      CO STARTING
      CO TITLEONE A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
      CO MODELOPT DFAULT RURAL CONC
Note that the title parameter  field  does  not need to be in
quotations, even though it represents  a single parameter.   The
model simply reads whatever appears  in columns 13 through 80 of
the TITLEONE card as the title field,  without changing the
lower case to upper case letters.  Leading blanks are therefore
significant if the user wishes to  center  the title within the
field.  Note also that the spacing and order of the secondary
                              2-13

-------
keywords on the MODELOPT card are not significant.  A MODELOPT
card that looked  like this:
      CO HOOELOPT  RURAL  CONG           DFAULT
would have an  identical result as the example above.   It is
suggested that the  user adopt a style that is consistent and
easy to read.  A  complete description of the available modeling
options that can  be specified on the MODELOPT keyword is
provided in Section 3.

     Since the pollutant in this example is SO2, we will
probably need  to  calculate average values for 3-hour  and
24-hour time periods,  and we also need to calculate averages
for the full annual time period.  Our runstream file  might
therefore look something like this after adding two more
keywords:
      CO STARTING
      CO TITLEONE A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
      CO MOOELOPT DFAULT RURAL  CONC
      CO AVERT I ME 3 24  PERIOD
      CO POLLUTID S02
Note again that  the order of the parameters on the  AVERTIME
keyword  is not critical,  although the order of the  short term
averages given on the AVERTIME keyword will also  be the order
in which the  results are presented in the output  file.   The
order of the  keywords within each pathway is also not critical
in most cases, although the intent of the input runstream file
may be easier to decipher if a consistent and logical order is
followed.  It is suggested that users follow the  order in which
the keywords  are presented in Section 3, in Appendix B, and in
the Quick Reference Card, unless there is a clear advantage to
doing otherwise.
                               2-14

-------
     The  only remaining mandatory keywords  for the CO pathway
are RUNORNOT and FINISHED.   We will set the RUNORNOT switch to
RUN for this example.  If a user is unsure  about the operation
of certain options, or is setting up a complex runstream file
to run for the first time,  it may be desirable to set the model
NOT to run,  but simply to read and analyze  the input file and
report any errors or warning messages that  are generated.   Once
the input file has been debugged using these descriptive
error/warning messages, then the RUNORNOT switch can be  set to
RUN, avoiding a possible  costly waste of resources generating
erroneous results.  Even  if the model is set NOT to run,  all of
the inputs are summarized in the output file for the user to
review.


     Our  complete runstream file for the CO pathway may  look
something like this:
       CO STARTING
       CO TITLEONE A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
       CO MODELOPT  DFAULT RURAL CONC
       CO AVERT!ME  3  24 PERIOD
       CO POLLUTID  S02
       CO RUNORNOT  RUN
       CO FINISHED
The following set of runstream images has  a more structured
look, but  it is equivalent to the example  above:
      CO STARTING
        TITLEONE A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
        MODELOPT  DFAULT  RURAL CONC
        AVERT IME  3  24 PERIOD
        POLLUTID  S02
        RUNORNOT  RUN
      CO FINISHED
Since the  pathway ID is  required to begin  in column 1  (see
Section  2.4.8 for a discussion of this restriction), the  model
will assume-that the previous pathway is in effect if  the
                               2-15

-------
pathway field is left blank.  The model will do the same for
blank keyword fields, which will be illustrated in the next
section.

     In addition to these mandatory keywords on the CO pathway,
the user may select optional keywords to specify that elevated
terrain heights will be used (the default is flat terrain), to
allow the use of receptor heights above ground-level for
flagpole receptors, to specify a decay coefficient or a
half-life for exponential decay, and to generate an input file
containing events for processing with the EVENT model.  The
user also has the option of having the model periodically save
the results to a file for later re-starting in the event of a
power failure or other interruption of the model's execution.
These options are described in more detail in Section 3 of this
volume.

2<>4.3 Specifying Source Inputs ^ SO Pathway

     Besides the STARTING and FINISHED keywords that are
mandatory for all pathways, the SOurce pathway has the
following mandatory keywords:

     LOCATION - Identifies a particular source ID and specifies
                the source type and location of that source.
     SRCPARAM - Specifies the source parameters for a
                particular source ID identified by a previous
                LOCATION card.
     SRCGROUP - Specifies how sources will be grouped for
                calculational purposes.  There is always at
                least one group, even though it may be the
                group of ALL sources and even if there is only
                one source.
Since the hypothetical source in our example problem is
influenced by a nearby building, we also need to include the
optional keywords BUILDHGT and BUILDWID in our input file.
                              2-16

-------
     The input file for the SO pathway for this example will
look something like this:
SO STARTING
SO LOCATION
SO SRCPARAH
SO BUILDHGT
SO BUILDHGT
SO BUILDHGT
SO BUILDWID
SO BUILDWID
SO BUILDUID
SO BUILDUID
SO BUILDWID
SO SRCGROUP
SO FINISHED

STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
ALL


POINT 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.00 35.0 432.0 11.7 2.4
34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34.
34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34.
34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34.
35.43 36.45 36.37 35.18 32.92 29.66 25.50 20.56
15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18 36.37 36.45
35.43 33.33 35.43 36.45 0.00 35.18 32.92 29.66
25.50 20.56 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18
36.37 36.45 35.43 33.33


     There are a few things to note about these inputs.
Firstly, the source ID (STACK1 in this example) is an
alphanumeric parameter (up to eight characters) that identifies
the inputs for different keywords with a particular source.  It
is crucial that the source be identified with a LOCATION card
before any other keyword makes reference to that source, since
this identifies the source type (POINT in this case), and
therefore which parameters the model will allow.  Besides POINT
sources, the current versions of the ISC2 models also allow
VOLUME and AREA sources to be specified.

     Another thing to note is that since the new versions of
the models use direction-specific building dimensions for all
sources with downwash, there are 36 building heights and 36
building widths entered on the appropriate keywords, one value
for each 10 degree sector beginning with the 10 degree flow
vector  (direction toward which the wind is blowing), and
continuing clockwise.  Since the user could not fit all 36
values on a single record, the pathway, keyword and source ID
were repeated as many times as were necessary.  In this case
there were 12 values given on each of three lines for the
building heights, and eight values on each of four lines plus a
line of four values for building widths.  There could have been
fewer or more lines as long as exactly 36 values were entered
                              2-17

-------
before starting with a new keyword.  Since all of the building
heights were the same across the sectors (fairly realistic for
the height but not for widths, unless the structure was
circular), there is a short cut available for specifying
numeric input in the runstream files for the new models.  The
user can specify "repeat values" by entering a field such as
"36*34.0" as a parameter for the BUILDHGT keyword.  The model
will interpret this as "36 separate entries, each with a value
of 34.0," and store the values in the appropriate arrays within
the model.  Since the model must identify this as a single
parameter field, there must not be any spaces between the
repeat-value and the value to be repeated.

     The final keyword before finishing the SO pathway must be
the SRCGROUP keyword.  In this example, since there is only one
source, we have taken advantage of a short cut provided by the
model by specifying a source group ID  (which may be up to eight
characters) of ALL.  Whenever this card appears in an input
file, it will generate a source group with a source-group ID of
ALL, consisting of all sources defined for that run.  The
sources do not have to be explicitly identified.  In a run
involving multiple sources, the user may specify multiple
source groups by repeating the SRCGROUP keyword.  The use of
the SRCGROUP card is explained in more detail in Section 3.
                              2-18

-------
     Using some of the formatting  options discussed above,  the
SO pathway for our example may look like this, with the same
result  as above:
       SO STARTING
         LOCATION STACK1 POINT  0.0  0.0  0.0
                     QS
                         HS
                             TS
VS  DS
** Point Source
** Parameters:     --	-- 	 —
  SRCPARAM STACK1  1.00 35.0 432. 11.7 2.4
  BUILDHGT STACK1  36*34.
  BUILDUID STACK1  35.43 36.45 36.37 35.18 32.92 29.66 25.50 20.56
        STACK1  15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66,32.92 35.18 36.37 36.45
        STACK1  35.43 33.33 35.43 36.45  0.00 35.18 32.92 29.66
        STACK1  25.50 20.56 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18
        STACK1  36.37 36.45 35.43 33.33
  SRCGROUP ALL
SO FINISHED
This version of the  SO pathway  inputs illustrates the use  of
the comment card to  label the stack parameters  on the SRCPARAM
card,  i.e., QS for emission rate  (g/s),  HS for  stack height
(m), TS  for stack exit temperature (K),  VS for  exit velocity
(m/s), and DS for stack diameter  (m).  A complete description
of the source parameter card, with a list of parameters for
each source type, is provided in  Section 3.3 and in Appendix B.

     Other optional  inputs that may be entered  on the SO
pathway  include specifying variable emission rate factors  for
sources  whose emissions vary as a function of month, season,
hour-of-day, STAR category, or  season and hour-of-day (see
Section  3.3.4 for more details).   The number of factors entered
depends  on the option selected, and factors may be input for
single sources or for a range of  sources.  Other keywords  allow
the user to specify  settling velocity categories, mass
fractions, and reflection coefficients for sources of large
particulates that experience settling and removal of the
pollutant as it is dispersed and  transported downwind.  This
option is also explained in more  detail in Section 3.
                                2-19

-------
2.4.4 Specifying a Receptor Network  - RE  Pathway

     As mentioned above, this example will  illustrate the use
of a single polar receptor network centered on the stack
location.  Other options available on the REceptor pathway
include specifying a Cartesian grid  receptor network,
specifying discrete receptor locations  in either a polar or a
Cartesian system, and specifying the location of receptors
along the boundary around a particular  source.  These other
options are described in more detail in Section 3.4.

     For this example we will specify a polar network with
receptors located at five downwind distances for every
10-degree flow vector around the plant.   There will be a total
of 180 receptors.  The RE pathway for this  example will look
something like this:
      RE STARTING
        GRIDPOLR POL1  STA
              POL1  ORIG  Q.Q  0.0
              POL1  OIST  100. 200.  300. 500. 1000.
              POL1  GDIR  36  10.  10.
              POL1  END
      RE FINISHED
     The first thing to note  about these inputs is that there
is a new set of keywords,  including something that looks like a
STArting and ENDing.   In  fact the GRIDPOLR keyword can be
thought of as a "sub-pathway," in that all of the information
for a particular polar network must be in contiguous records,
and that the starting  and ending of the sub-pathway are
identified.  The order of secondary keywords within the
sub-pathway is not  critical,  similar to the main pathways. Each
card must be identified with  a network ID (up to four
alphanumeric characters),  in  this case it is "POLL"  Multiple
networks may be specified in  a single model run.  The model
waits until the END secondary keyword is encountered to set the
                              2-20

-------
variables, which may include terrain heights for receptors on
elevated terrain or flagpole receptor heights if those options
are being exercised by the user.  The use of these optional
secondary keywords is described in detail in Section 3.4.

     For this example, the ORIG secondary keyword specifies the
location of the origin, in (X,Y) coordinates, for the polar
network being defined.  This network is centered at the same
(X,Y) location as the source specified above.  The ORIG keyword
is optional, and the model will default to an origin of (0.0,
0.0) if it is omitted.  The DIST keyword identifies the
distances along each direction radial at which the receptors
will be located.  In this case there are five distances.  More
could be added by adding values to that input card or by
including a continuation card, if needed.  The GDIR keyword
specifies that the model will Generate DIRection radials for
the network, in this case there will be 36 directions,
beginning with the 10 degree flow vector and incrementing every
10 degrees clockwise.  The user may elect to define Discrete
DIRection radials instead by using the DDIR keyword in place of
the GDIR keyword.

2.4.5 Specifying the Meteorological Input - ME Pathway

     The MEteorolgy pathway has the following three mandatory
keywords  (besides STARTING and FINISHED, of course):

     INPUTFIL - Specifies the filename and format for the input
                meteorological data file.
     ANEMHGHT - Specifies the anemometer height for the wind
                data to be used for the modeling run.
     SURFDATA - Specifies information about the surface
                meteorological data which will be used in the
                modeling.
     UAIRDATA - Specifies' information about the upper air
                meteorological data (i.e. mixing heights)  which
                will be used in the modeling.
                              2-21

-------
For the purposes of this  example we will assume that the
meteorological data file  is  an unformatted (sometimes called
"binary") file that was generated by the RAMMET meteorological
preprocessor program.  The filename is PREPIT.BIN (the sample
file that is provided  on  the SCRAM BBS with the RAMMET model),
and it consists of one year  of data for Pittsburgh, PA from
1964.  The runstream images  for the MEteorology pathway would
look something like this:
      ME STARTING
        INPUTFR PREPIT.BIN  UNFORM
        ANEMHGHT 20 FEET
        SURFDATA 94823 1964 PITTSBURGH
        UAIROATA 94823 1964 PITTSBURGH
      ME FINISHED
     The first parameter  on the INPUTFIL keyword is the
filename, which can  be  entered as a full DOS pathname,
including the drive  specification and subdirectories, up to a
total of 40 characters.   The second parameter is the format of
the meteorology data file.   In this case the secondary keyword
of UNFORM is used  to specify that the meteorological data  file
is of the UNFORMatted type  generated by RAMMET (or MPRM).
Another option to  the user  would be to leave the format
parameter field blank,  in which case the model will assume a
default read format  for an  ASCII file of hourly records.   The
order of variables assumed  for the ASCII file input is as
follows:  year, month,  day,  hour, flow vector, wind speed
(m/s), temperature (K), stability category, rural mixing height
(m), and urban mixing height (m).  Other user options for
specifying the format for ASCII meteorology files are described
more fully in Section 3.5.1.

     The ANEMHGHT  keyword is important because the input wind
speed data are adjusted from the anemometer height to the
release height for model  calculations, so that differences in
anemometer height  can significantly effect the modeled results.

                              2-22

-------
For National Weather Service (NWS) data, the user should check
records (e.g. the Local Climatological Data summary report) for
the particular station to determine the correct anemometer
height for the data period used in the modeling, since the
anemometer location and height may change over time.  The model
will assume that the anemometer height is in meters, unless the
secondary keyword "FEET" is included in the runstream image, as
illustrated in this example.  The model will convert inputs in
feet to meters.

     The final two mandatory inputs identify the location and
data period of the input meteorological data.  A separate
keyword is used for the surface meteorological data and for the
upper air (mixing height) data.  The parameters on these cards
are the station number (e.g. WBAN number for NWS stations), the
data period (year), and a station name.  It is important that
these inputs be provided correctly since the model compares the
station number and year from the runstream input file with
values provided in the first record of the meteorology file.
The user may also optionally input the (X,Y) coordinates for
the location of the station(s), although these values are not
currently used by the model.

     Other optional keywords available on the ME pathway
provide the user with options to specify selected days to
process from the meteorological data file, a wind direction
rotation correction term, and user-specified wind speed profile
exponents and/or vertical potential temperature gradients.  The
wind profile exponents and potential temperature gradients are
ignored (and a warning message generated) if the regulatory
default option is selected.  These optional inputs are
described in more detail in Section 3.5.
                              2-23

-------
2.4.6 Selecting Output Options - OU Pathway

     All of the keywords on the output pathway are optional,
although the model will warn the user if no printed outputs are
requested and will halt processing if no outputs (printed
results or file outputs) are selected.  The following three
keywords correspond to the printed result output options
available in the previous version of the ISCST model, although
the user has greater flexibility to select only the outputs
that are needed for a particular application.  The printed
table keywords are:

     REGTABLE - Specifies the selection of high value by
                receptor table output options.
     MAXTABLE - Specifies the selection of overall maximum
                value table output options.
     DAYTABLE - Specifies the selection of printed results  (by
                receptor) for each day of data processed (this
                option can produce very large files and such be
                used with care).

     The RECTABLE keyword corresponds to the option for
highest, second-highest and third-highest values by receptor
available in the old ISCST model.  The MAXTABLE keyword
corresponds to the maximum 50 table option available in the old
ISCST model.  For both of these keywords, the user has
additional flexibility to specify for which short term
averaging periods the outputs are selected.  For the MAXTABLE
keyword the user can also specify the number of overall maximum
values to summarize for each averaging period selected, up to a
maximum number controlled by a parameter in the computer code.
For this example problem we will select the highest and
second-highest values by receptor, and the maximum 50 values
                              2-24

-------
for all averaging periods.   These OU pathway inputs will  look
something like this:
      OU STARTING
        RECTABLE ALLAVE FIRST  SECOND
        MAXTABLE ALLAVE 50
      OU FINISHED
     To simplify the  input for users who request the same
printed table output  options for all averaging periods, these
keywords recognize  the secondary keyword "ALLAVE" as the first
parameter for that  purpose.   In order to obtain the overall
maximum 10 values for the 24-hour averages only, then the  OU
pathway images would  look like this:
      OU STARTING
        RECTABLE ALLAVE FIRST  SECOND
        MAXTABLE 24  10
      OU FINISHED
It should also be  noted that these output table options  apply
only to the short-term averaging periods, such as the  3-hour
and 24-hour averages  used in our example.  If the user has
selected that PERIOD  averages be calculated (on the CO AVERTIME
keyword), then the output file will automatically include a
table of period averages summarized by receptor (the RECTABLE
option does not apply since there is only one period value for
each receptor).  In addition,  the printed output file  will
include tables summarizing the highest values for each
averaging period and  source group.

     Other options on the OU pathway include several keywords
to produce output  files for specialized purposes, such as
generating contour plots of high values, identifying
occurrences of violations of a particular threshold value  (e.g.
a NAAQS), and for  postprocessing of the raw concentration data.
These options are  described in detail in Section 3.6.

                               2-25

-------
     The complete input runstream file for this simple example
is shown in Figure 2-2.  Note that a consistent style has been
used for formatting and structuring the file in order to
improve its readability.  This input file is comparable to the
version shown earlier in Figure 2-1, which used a somewhat
different style.
                              2-26

-------
 CO STARTING
    TITLEONE A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
    MODELOPT DFAULT RURAL CONC
    AVERT1ME 3 24 PERIOD
    POLLUTID S02
    RUNORNOT RUN
 CO FINISHED

 SO STARTING
    LOCATION STACK1 POINT 0.0  0.0  0.0

 ** Point Source     QS   HS   TS  VS  DS
 ** Parameters:     	  	 	 —
    SRCPARAM STACK1 1.00  35.0 432.  11.7 2.4

    BUILDHGT STACK1 36*34.
    BUILDWID STACK1 35.43 36.45 36.37 35.18 32.92 29.66 25.50 20.56
           STACK1 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18 36.37 36.45
           STACK1 35.43 33.33 35.43 36.45  0.00 35.18 32.92 29.66
           STACK1 25.50 20.56 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18
           STACK1 36.37 36.45 35.43 33.33
    SRCGROUP ALL
 SO FINISHED

 RE STARTING
    GRIDPOLR POL1  STA
           POL1  ORIG 0.0  0.0
           POL1  DIST 100.  200.  300.  500. 1000.
           POL1  GDIR 36   10.  10.
           POL1  END
 RE FINISHED

 ME STARTING
    INPUTFIL PREPIT.BIN UNFORM
    ANEMHGHT 20 FEET
    SURFDATA 94823 1964  PITTSBURGH
    UAIRDATA 94823 1964  PITTSBURGH
 ME FINISHED

 OU STARTING
    RECTABLE ALLAVE FIRST SECOND
    MAXTABLE ALLAVE 50
 OU FINISHED
FIGURE  2-2.  EXAMPLE INPUT  RUNSTREAM FILE  FOR  SAMPLE PROBLEM
2.4.7  Using the Error  Message  File to  Debug the Input Runstream
      File


      The previous  sections in  this tutorial have  lead through
the step-by-step construction  of a sample  runstream  input file
for ISCST2.   This  simple example problem illustrated the  usage
of  the most commonly used  options  of the ISCST2 model. However,
many real-time applications of the model will  be  much more
complex than this  example,  perhaps involving multiple sources
                                     2-27

-------
and source groups, multiple receptor networks, the addition of
discrete receptor locations, and/or elevated terrain heights.
Since humans are prone to make errors from time to time, an
effort has been made to develop improved error handling
capabilities for the ISC2 models.

     The error handling capabilities of the ISC2 models are
designed to accomplish two things for the user.  First, the
model should read through the complete input file and report
all occurrences of errors or suspect entries before stopping,
rather than stopping on the first instance (and every instance
thereafter) of an error in the input file.  Second, the model
should provide error and warning messages that are detailed and
descriptive enough that they will help the user in his/her
effort to debug the input file.  The remainder of this section
provides of brief introduction to the use of the model's error
handling capabilities.  Appendix E of this volume provides more
details about the error handling provided by the ISC2 models,
including a listing and explanation of all error and other
types of messages generated by the models.

     The ISC2 models generate messages during the processing of
the input data and during the execution of model calculations.
These messages inform the user about a range of possible
conditions including:

        Errors that will halt any further processing, except to
        identify additional error conditions;
        Warnings that do not halt processing but indicate a
        possible errors or suspect conditions; and
        Informational messages that may be of interest to the
        user but have no direct bearing on the validity of the
        results.

     As the model encounters a condition for which a message is
generated, the model writes the message to a temporary storage
file.  At the completion of the setup processing for a run, and
                              2-28

-------
at the completion of the model  calculations, the model rereads
the message file and generates  a summary of the messages which
is included in the main printed output file.  If the processing
of the model setup information  indicates no errors  or warnings,
and the user has selected the option to RUN the model
calculations on the CO RUNORNOT card, then the model will
simply write a statement to the print file that the model setup
was completed successfully.  Otherwise, the model will report a
summary of  the messages encountered.  The summary of model
setup messages that would be generated for the example problem
if the option NOT to run was chosen is shown in Figure 2-3.
This summary table reports the  total number of occurrences for
each of the message types, and  lists the detailed message for
any fatal errors or warning messages that were generated.  In
this case,  since there were no  errors or suspicious conditions
in the setup file, there are no error or warning messages
listed.

     An example of the warning  message that would have been
generated had we left out the card on the RE pathway that
specifies the origin of the polar receptor network  is shown
below:
       RE U220 39 REPOLR: Missing Origin (Use Default = 0,0) In GRIDPOLR
POL1
                                                   Hints
                   Detailed error/warning message
             Subroutine from which message is generated
           Line number of file where message occurred
        Message code. - including message type (E, W, I) and message number
      Pathway ID where message originated
Since this  is a warning message,  it would have appeared at the
end of the  message summary table  in the output file,  but it
would not have halted processing  of the data.  The  last item on
                               2-29

-------
the message line, "Hints," may include such information as the
keyword or parameter name causing the error, the source ID,
group ID or (as in this case) the network ID involved, or
perhaps the date variable identifying when the message occurred
during the processing of the meteorological data, such as an
informational message identifying the occurrence of a calm
wind.

     For new users and for particularly complex applications,
it is strongly recommended that the model first be run with the
RUNORNOT keyword (on the CO pathway) set NOT to run.  In this
way, the user can determine if the model is being setup
properly by the runstream file before committing the resources
to perform a complete run.  The user should make a point of
examining any warning messages carefully to be sure that the
model is operating as expected for their application, since
these messages will not halt processing by the model.  In most
cases, the detailed messages will provide enough information
for the user to determine the location and nature of any errors
in the runstream setup file.  If the intent of the message is
not immediately clear, then the user should refer to the more
detailed descriptions provided in Appendix E for the particular
error code generated.

     In deciphering the error and warning messages, the line
number provided as part of the message may be particularly
helpful in locating the error within the input file.  However,
if it is an error of omission that is caught by the error
checking performed at the completion of inputs for a pathway,
then the line number will correspond to the last record for
that pathway.  The user may need to examine all of the messages
carefully before locating the error or errors, especially since
a•single occurrence of certain types of errors may lead to
other error conditions being identified later in the input file
which do not really constitute errors in themselves.  An
example of this is provided  in Figure 2-4, which shows some
                              2-30

-------
inputs for the SO pathway where the building dimension keywords
have been typed incorrectly, and the associated list of error
messages.  Since continuation cards were being used for the
building width inputs, and the keyword was entered incorrectly
on the first line, the subsequent records were also taken by
the model to be invalid keyword inputs.  While the error
messages are the same for these records, the message originates
from a different part of the model (SUBROUTINE SOCARD) for the
records with the blank keyword.

     Since the detailed error and warning messages are listed
in the output file as part of the message summary table, there
will generally not be a need for the user to examine the
contents of the detailed message file.  For this reason, the
default operation of the model is to write the messages that
are generated by a particular run to a temporary file that is
deleted when the run is completed.  If the user wishes to
examine the complete list of detailed messages (of all types),
there is an optional keyword available on the CO pathway for
that purpose.  The ERRORFIL keyword, which is described in
                              2-31

-------
detail in Section 3.2.7,  allows the user  to  save the  complete

list of detailed messages to a user-specified filename.
   *** Message Sumiary For ISC2 Model Setup ***
           Summary of Total Messages
 A Total of         0 Fatal Error Message(s)
 A Total of         0 Warning Message(s)
 A Total of         0 Information Message(s)
    ******** FATAL ERROR MESSAGES ********
             ***  NONE  ***
    ********  WARNING MESSAGES  ********
             ***  NONE  ***
    ***********************************
    *** SETUP Finishes Successfully ***
    ***********************************
 FIGURE  2-3.    EXAMPLE  MESSAGE SUMMARY TABLE FOR RUNSTREAM  SETUP
                                      2-32

-------
 SO STARTING
   LOCATION STACK1  POINT  0.0   0.0  0.0
 ** Point Source      OS    HS    TS    VS  DS
 ** Parameters:      	  	  	--  —
   SRCPARAM STACK1  1.00  35.0  432.0 11.7  2.4
   BUILOHTS STACK1  36*34.
   BUILDUTS STACK1  35.43 36.45 36.37 35.18 32.92 29.66 25.50 20.56
           STACK1  15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18 36.37 36.45
           STACK1  35.43 33.33 35.43 36.45  0.00 35.18 32.92 29.66
           STACK1  25.50 20.56 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18
           STACK1  36.37 36.45 35.43 33.33
   SRCGROUP ALL
 SO FINISHED
  *** Message Summary For ISC2 Model Setup ***
  	 Summary of Total Messages 	
 A Total of         6 Fatal Error Message(s)
 A Total of         0 Warning Message(s)
 A Total of         0 Information Message(s)

   ******** FATAL ERROR MESSAGES ********
 SO E105   17 EXKEY : Invalid Keyword Specified. The Troubled Keyword is BUILDHTS
 SO E105   18 EXKEY : Invalid Keyword Specified. The Troubled Keyword is BUILDUTS
 SO E105   19 SOCARD: Invalid Keyword Specified. The Troubled Keyword is BUILDUTS
 SO E105   20 SOCARD: Invalid Keyword Specified. The Troubled Keyword is BUILDUTS
 SO E105   21 SOCARD: Invalid Keyword Specified. The Troubled Keyword is BUILDUTS
 SO E105   22 SOCARD: Invalid Keyword Specified. The Troubled Keyword is BUILDWTS

   ********  UARNING MESSAGES   ********
            ***  NONE ***

   **************************************
   *** SETUP Finishes UN-successfully ***
   **************************************
FIGURE  2-4.  EXAMPLE OF KEYWORD ERROR AND  ASSOCIATED MESSAGE
                SUMMARY TABLE
2.4.8  Running the Model  and  Reviewing the  Results

      Now that we have  a  complete  and error-free runstream  input
file,  we are  ready  to  run the  model  and then review  the
results.    Running the  model  on the PC is similar to  running the
previous version of the  model  on  the PC, although  we now have
to specify the meteorology filename  from the runstream  file-
                                        2-33

-------
instead of on the command line.  Also,  the PC-executable files
available on the SCRAM BBS open the runstream input and printed
output files explicitly within the model, so there is no need
to "redirect" the I/O on the command line using the DOS
redirection symbols '<• and •>'.  The command line to run the
sample problem might look something like this on the PC:

          C:\>ISCST2 TEST-ST.INP TEST-ST.OUT

The "c-prompt" of DOS has been represented by the characters
"C:\>", but may appear different on different machines.  The
important points are that the ISCST2.EXE file either be in the
directory from which you are attempting to run the model, or in
a directory that is included on the DOS PATH command when the
system is "booted-up."  The runstream input filename must
appear first  (without any DOS "redirection" symbol), followed
by the desired output filename  (also without the DOS
redirection symbol), and these files must also be located in
the directory from which the model is being executed, unless a
complete DOS pathname is provided on the command line.

     As mentioned above, the SCRAM PC-executable files for ISC2
open the input and output files explicitly.  One reason for
this is to allow for the models to write an update on the
status of processing to the PC terminal screen.  For the ISCST2
model, the model first indicates that setup information is
being processed and then gives the Julian day currently being
processed.  If no status message is seen then the model did not
load into memory properly.  If the model stops after completing
the setup processing, then either the RUNORNOT option was set
NOT to run, or a fatal error was encountered during the setup
processing.  Another reason for not sending the printed output
to the default output device (i.e., to the screen or redirected
to a file), is so that any DOS error messages will be visible
on the screen and not be written to the printed file.  One such
message might be that there is insufficient memory available to
                              2-34

-------
run the program.  Handling of DOS error messages may require
some knowledge of DOS, unless the meaning of the message is
obvious.


     The order of contents and organization of the main output
file for the ISC2 models is presented in Figure 2-5.
 Echo of Input Runstream Images

 Summary of Runstream Setup Messages

 Summary of Inputs
      Summary of Modeling Options
      Summary of Source Data
      Summary of Receptor Data
      Summary of Meteorology Data

 Model Results

      Daily Results for Each Averaging Period Selected for
         Each Day  Processed (If  Applicable)
         - DAYTABLE Keyword

      Period Results for Each Source Group (If Applicable)
         - PERIOD  Parameter on AVERTIME Keyword

      Short Term Average Results  (High,  Second High,  etc.)
         by Receptor for Each Source Group  (If Applicable)
         - RECTABLE Keyword

      Overall Maximum Short Term  Average Results  for Each
         Source Group (If  Applicable)
         - MAXTABLE Keyword

 Summary Tables of High Values for Each Averaging Period  and
      Source Group  (Always provided if PERIOD averages or the
      RECTABLE keyword are used)

 Summary of Complete Model Execution Messages
     FIGURE 2-5.  ORGANIZATION OF ISCST2 MODEL OUTPUT FILE


Each page of the output file, except for the echo of the input

file images, is labeled with the model name and version number,

user-specified title(s), page number, and, for the PC version

of the model, the date and time of the particular run.  Also


                              2-35

-------
included as part of the header information for each page is a
one-line summary of the modeling options used for that
particular run.  The modeling options are listed as the
secondary keywords used to control the options, such as URBAN
or RURAL, CONG or DEPOS, DFAULT, NOCALM, etc.  (Details about
the date/time routines used on the PC version and how these
non-standard routines are bypassed on other systems are
provided in Volume III.)

     Since the complete input file is normally echoed back as
part of the output file, and since processing of the inputs
stops when the OU FINISHED card is reached, the run can be
duplicated by simply specifying the output filename as the
input runstream file.  Alternatively, the input records could
be "cut and pasted" from the output file to a separate file
using a text editor.  Since the outputs are not being printed
to the default output device by the DOS PC version, the input
records in the printed output file will all be shifted by one
column to the right (the first column is normally used for
Fortran carriage control, and is left blank in case the model
is ported to a system where the default output device is used).
The model will still run properly with these inputs, since it
has been written to allow a shift of up to three columns to the
right, as long as each input record is shifted by the same
amount.  However, each successive run of the model will shift
the inputs one more column, and there will be the risk that
parts of the record beyond column 80 will be lost, possibly
resulting in an error message or invalid results.

     By default, the models will echo each line of the input
runstream file to the printed output file.  This provides a
convenient record of the inputs as originally read into the
model, without any rounding of numerical values that may appear
in the input summary tables.  As noted above, it also means
that the output file can be used as .an input file to the model
to reproduce a particular application.  However, for some
                              2-36

-------
applications, the length of the input runstream file may be too
cumbersome to include the entire set of inputs at the beginning
of each output file.  This may happen, for example, if a large
number of sources are being defined or if a large number of
discrete receptor locations are used.  For this reason, the
user is provided with the option to "turn off" the echoing of
the input file at any point within the runstream file.  This is
accomplished by entering the keywords "NO ECHO" in the first
two fields anywhere within the runstream file.  In other words,
place NO in the pathway field, followed by a space and then
ECHO.  None of the input runstream images after the NO ECHO
will be echoed to the output file.  Thus, a user may choose to
place NO ECHO after the control pathway in order to keep the
control options echoed, but suppress echoing the rest of the
input file.

     The details of the message summary tables were discussed
in the previous section.  An example of the summary of modeling
option inputs is shown in Figure 2-6 for the simple example
described in this section.  For the new model, the summary of
source parameter input data includes separate tables for each
source type, rather than combining all sources onto a single
table.  In this way the column headings are specific to the
source type, and avoid the confusion of the earlier model.

     Figure 2-7 presents an example of the results output for
the second highest values by receptor for our sample problem.
These values are the second highest 24-hour averages at each
receptor location.  Note that several of the numbers are
followed by a 'c.'  This flag indicates that the average
included at least one calm hour during the averaging period.
The number in parentheses following each concentration value is
the date corresponding to each value.  The date is given as an
eight digit integer variable that includes the year (2-digits),
month, day, and hour corresponding to the end of the averaging
period.  Since these are 24-hour averages and are based on
                              2-37

-------
block (end-to-end) rather than running averages, all of the
dates end on hour 24.

     For each of the different types of model result tables,
the controlling keyword is identified above at the end of the
description.  All of the outputs of the same type, e.g. high
values by receptor, are printed together, and the order of
tables loops through all source groups for a particular
averaging period, and then loops through all averaging periods.
The summary tables of high values at the end of the model
results follow the same order of loops.  An example of the
summary tables for our sample problem is shown in Figure 2-8.
The summaries for all averaging periods have been combined onto
a single figure, but would appear on separate pages of the
actual output file.
                              2-38

-------
   _> u/
X. •* (3
822
« «
{ i
1
<\J
1—
Vt
u
(O
01
j:
4V
L.
O
M-
I
|
Q.
01
1
U,
01
1
M
<
II
*
*
*
nj
S
Si
8
Vt
Of
s

* ISCST2 -
*
*

D FAULT
u.
_J
<
Q£
=)
oe
u

S
C/J
3
en
g
h-
g.

* MODEL INC
*
*

MODEL SETUP OPTIONS SUMMARY «**
Centration Values.
* o
* i U
*
i 01
O)
i 10
1_
• 01
1 H-
o
1
• °

1 *-»
10
1 — *
3
i U
i tO
u
L.
i O
u.
1
, §•
4V
i 01
Vt
at
i —t
*
• «





persion
at
0
_l
<
s
Ctf
1
1
z
*
«



'i
o
4-*
&
iV •
— 1 0)
i-2
S«
O Of
>» s
f- — *
O 0.
4-»
a — *
3§
ro-
ll u.
ac
U> T-
1
1
z
*
*
outine.
ature Gradients.
at Buildings.
de
at i- 3 o
o> o-z
?• a. IA
to E i- — •
. ._ 4V S 01 10
• 01 09 C ft— O. t~
§C W 01 33
IP- 01 c — ' co at
•*" 4V O O ID
IA 3 O O.— I- t-
l- O t- X V O O
Vat a. uj c M- M-
0) Ol 10 0> 4V ») X
• •— C 4V — • O 0) 10
-c o — 10 M- a. 3 o
CO M O «4- — • 0)
to ^ &o o — * ID a
X 01 01 O) (. ID >
c o u c a. o _ —
O"Q c_ o)'D4rf^'^
aca.iACc-C4->
.». — •— 01 3 C
Q->- 09Z3> O Ol
•*- X {= GO C
f U — • 0) +•• 4J Q
i c «o to — • — • «- a.
^OJO3330»X
U X ID ID O.UJ
ID o o) 4J •*-•*- a.
4^3cflOOIO)OO
oca^zaa: z

rJM>4-m-Oh-eoo




c
a
t_
i_
0)
i—
i—
u.
§
(A
L.
o
s.
0)
u
01
ae
IA

at
(A
<
i

*

(A
«->
."1
'5
z
1_
0
4V
8-
u
01
K
UJ
_J
O
a.
o
<
_i
u.
O
X
at
1
at
at
<
«
*
at
i
3
oc
a:
i
ro
»*-
o
*^
CO
Sn>*
0)
o»
CO
8
<  —
ae
(M UJ
a.
IA IA
01 01
4V 4v
ID «*
4J — •
8 (A — '
01 03
•-• -C t.
tt O) 
a, a: o
H- H- H-
O o o


a
4V
3
O
«
*
a
L
C
3
j
V
u
3
21
3 II
?£E
Igl
E '« J:
—•
U
§
U
.?
3
O
O
u_
L.
(0
1
*
z
IA
O)
ID
Ik
.i?
'5
o
"o
u.
01
v=
1—
Ul
|
*
*
Decay Coef. = .0000 ; Rot. Angle = .0
Emission Rate Unit Factor = .10000E+07
*3
•XAMPLE MODEL OPTION SUMMARY TABLE FROM AN ISC2 MODEL OUTPUT FILE
2-39
* UJ
Z
• »x.
"• VI J
cj z ~Q
O UJ ^ J,
«- vi at ^
1 X. C3 ...
11 i
C3Z -
II II II
r* «1
e 4v
^v .^ |A
C 4v
4V=>'E
Si =
'^- 4J
E^S
01 •— 4V
56 3
Ul O
.
-------
                      (M O
                      O O Ul
                      --. .. a
                        SCM <
                        «— a.
                                                            IfMCMCMfMCMjMCMCMfMCMfMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMOIl	  	  _._  	  	  _


                                                            I^S^^CMCMoSSSicMCM^rOrrT^iM^O^OcQgfMCMOwWoSgO
                                                  8
                                                  O
                                                  §
                                                          O U U  U    U O      O            O
                                                            S-* » »-OrO «-0 «-
                      I I
                      (M
                      I—
                      tn
                      L.

                      O
                      I

                      I
                      Q.
                      01


                      I
                      Ul
                      01
                                   (3

                                   a
     S
     Ik

     U)

S
in
                                             o u    u    u  u
             ineocM~*-»>»eg-j-^incM«-eororo>ocooocM
             4fN>o«~inveo^t^inooc>roinof^cMO
                                                                                                                  «- •* 1
                                                                                                                  (M^»
                                                                                        I CO CM «- O CM I
                                                                                        . in O» CM >» in i
                                                                                                                                            -

                                                                                                                                       $ 3^S P S Jo
                                                                               »  r>  ro ro M ro
                                                      I  CMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCM
                                                                                       (M(M I o
>- I «^o
t- <    ro
  Ot Ul
^ o o



Ssl
Ul Z •-
Z   Q
                                                                          *O 'O 'O *O '
                                               'O ^9 'O Mj ^J ^O ^3 *O ^O *O
                                                                                                     -mo



                                                                                                      *O 'O '
                                                                                                                                            *2 ^3 'O
                           U U
                          ss^
             oo.c>^ooininr..r-ro«-cMN»^oeofo-->or^«-coo>*«-in
      _.   ..cMr.5>^oOin«-CM.jin<>.ocMOin-incor*-t>r«.o»»cMt>o>*-*^-N.»-cocMCM-»ocMrooK.incM>oroocMoo^CM
      cM-ooocJooe>~*>Q-«-eoinoc>»-tMin«-t^'O-oro»-o>O'i-~*roo3mt~^oa
      •*t>ineo«cMoaN-<)fMCM«-co»-O(Xo«»-*in«-too>Oro>oroocOOCM«-ro>»o
                o    u
«-incMro«-r^T-«o»-
- -^>t^or-rog
                                                                                                                           Q.

                                                                                                                           B
                                                                                                                           IU
                                                                                                                           at
                                                                                                                                                                 I

                                                                                                                                                                fM
                                                                                                                            £


                                                                                                                            I
«      2

O   I/) Ul
     Ul U
i-   x at

**•   i£ S
u-   X C/l

     O (3
                                           S
                             CM»-«-OOCMCMCMO»-«-O{M«-«-rOO«-O'-rO«-
                                                                  o- oo -o o o
                                                                  a ro 10 •* CM
                                                        oeotor«.<-cMocM>or>-
                                                                                                                               «—tnooooinaoON-
                      (M
                      o-
                      (A

                      CJ

                      (A
                              ot



                              u
                              o
                              Ul
                              &

                              19
        §
     Ul U
S
                                                                   «-«-o»-«-^tMtoeoo>»«-
                                                                   o»-o«-»-o«-oo^oo
                     o

                     o
                                                                                               ooooooooooo«-ooo<
                                                        in CM «- o CM ro in i
                                                           ^* N. in *o m CM •
                                                           «* «- o «- ro o <
                          «- ~» s. in


                          CM

                                                                                                  ro r>- ro      «- CM o in i
                                                                                                                               «->o ra r>-ro
                                                t- Ul
                                                U at
                                                ui u
                          oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo

                          oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo

-------

  , ..
ro CM
o «-
*  *
«  *
*  «
                CO
                ae
                x

                o
CM

I—

CO


CO
 §

I
a.
 01
UJ


a
*  «
«  *
*  «
                u. ^^
                o
          i    2
          u.
          O    UJ I
          -I    «
          Ik    «
                *
                  : O

                   u
CO
ae
ui
CO
u
CO
         i
          CJ

          1
         CO
         §

         i
1
1
1
M 1
g .
s !
t- 1
0- •
t
1
*\
o •
-J 1

IM I
>"
UI i
_J
UJ I
IM


ae i
>•

oc •
X
1
g I

Q. i
U i
ae i
'




i

1
i

i

u
w '.
«t i
ae
UI 1
>
< i

'

;
i
•

1
»
•
•


a
^ — i


5 g (
zS ,
22
SS
o o
0 0

o o
o o






00 O
CM O
3 m




ss












OO CM
fc CM






CO CO

111 UJ
* >
CO CO
UI UJ
CD C3

31
Si
«- CM





_l
_J
<
22
&&
o o
0 0

§o
0






S*o
in
-» oo
•O CM
1 «—




O CM
jO ro











gl
3 "*






CO CO

33
•* *
CO CO
UI UI
U C3


ae i—
ro -±







22
Sa
3§

o o
o o






CO 0
CM O
"^J o
w—




 >
CO CO
UI UJ
C3 C3


t- r-
in >o







«
CO
t—
1
111
ae
ae

ro

t—
CO
UI
x
CJ
u.
O

ae
|
3

ui
X



«
*





























«
«




ro
«
«
X


ae
8
S

X
Z






(/)

Ik


2

*
*
























22 •
in ae i
UI 1
a.
>- i
ik
0 i
i
^ »
C9
< i
_l
U. 1
IM
>* 1
UI
_l i
111
INI 1
• 1
ae
>- i

ae
X i

g '
i- i
a.
UI i
CJ
UI 1
ae
'
,

i
i
•x.
in a




>• i

1
i

i
u
§ i
s ;
£ ,
< i



1

•
•
,

•
•
i
•

•
0



g I
ae
0 >
a. a.
^N ^S
o o
o o
§"o*
0
* %
ss

35



» %
ss

}Sf2




< <
«^ ^
pjpf

ro CM
0 0

3 3

53


r»- ro
o »»
3 oo
>O in
00 5



CO CO

UI UI

_l _l
< <
5 u
X X

H- a
(O Z
«= CM

X X
u o

X X




_1
_l
<
*
«
*
CO
f-
_l
3
CO
UJ
ae

ae
•*
CM


UJ
S
U.
O


ae
|
CO

UI

t-

*
«
*





























«
*




ro
*


CO
ae
S
ae
u

X
z




CM
O
CO

Ik
o

CJ


41
«
























^
t- 1
Ik 1
o
1
1
r\
_J 1
Ik
N 1
» i
UI 1
—I
UJ I
IM
i
ae i
>-
i
M
ae i
X
*^ i
i
g ,
a. i
UJ
U i
UJ
ae i

i
i

i
•
/•S 1
X 1
UI O

< X
O X i
>-
>- 1

1
1

1
u
g '
CJ i
UJ i
UI
<. 1
S .
< 1



1
1
f
1
,

1
1
,
,


o


a. i
1 -

22
^N ^
§s
M «
o o
o o
oo"oo"
CM CM

33




So
•o

r5fS




< <
-*-*
CM CM
O CM
«- O

0 0

IO *O

0 0


«- 00
in «-
CM CM
»* o
CM «-
i— ae i— ae >-

u a. cj a. o
CO CO O O CJ CJ Z

UJ UI C9 C3 Q O O3
3 3
—1 -1 II II II II II
> > cj a. cj a. a
C3 C3 Q Q CD
C3 C3
XX CO
UI
H- a a.
CO Z V
«- CM 1—
Of
a a t~
« — 0,
XX UI
CJ
UJ
ae

*
—i *
— 1 -1C
<
                                                                                                                                                                 I

                                                                                                                                                                 CO

                                                                                                                                                                 CM
                                                                                                                                                                 U
                                                                                                                                                                 CO
                                                                                                                                                                 3
                                                                                                                                                                 Ik

                                                                                                                                                                 CO
                                                                                                                                                                         CM

-------
2.5 MODIFYING AN EXISTING RUNSTREAM FILE

     As noted earlier, one of the advantages of the
keyword/parameter approach and the flexible format adopted for
the input runstream file is that it will be easier for the user
to make modifications to the runstream file and obtain the
desired result.  This section briefly illustrates some examples
of how a runstream file can be modified.  It is assumed that
the reader is familiar with the operation of and basic editing
commands for a text editor (i.e., a program that edits ASCII
files), and is familiar with the previous sections of this
tutorial.

2.5.1 Modifying Modeling Options

     Depending on the type of analysis being performed, the
user may need to modify the modeling options and run the model
again.  Because of the descriptive nature of the keywords and
the secondary keywords used to control the modeling options,
this can easily be done with the new runstream file, and
usually without having to refer back to the user's guide each
time a modification is attempted.

     One example where a modeling option would need to be
changed is if a modeler wanted to obtain both concentration
estimates and estimates of dry deposition for a source or
sources of large particulates.  The only change needed to
accomplish this is to replace the secondary keyword of CONG
(for CONCentration) with the secondary keyword of DEPOS (for
DEPOSition) on the MODELOPT input card.  None of the source
information needs to be changed since the model automatically
converts the emission rates to the proper units for deposition
calculations.  It is equally easy to modify a run to use urban
dispersion instead of rural dispersion  (or vice versa) by
replacing the RURAL secondary keyword with URBAN on the
                              2-42

-------
MODELOPT card.  As noted earlier, the order and exact spacing
of the secondary keywords on the MODELOPT card is not
important.

     Another modeling option change that will be discussed here
is switching between flat and elevated terrain modeling.  As
noted earlier, the model assumes flat terrain, i.e., all
receptors are assumed to be at the same elevation as the base
elevation for the source as the default mode of operation.  If
the user wishes to model receptors on elevated terrain, then
the TERRHGTS keyword must be included on the CO pathway.  This
keyword, which is described in more detail in Section 3.2.3,
accepts one of two possible secondary keywords, either FLAT or
ELEV.  Their meaning should be obvious.  Note that the input
runstream image:
      CO TERRHGTS  FLAT
has the same effect as having no TERRHGTS keyword at all.  One
difference between ISC2 and the older version of ISC is that if
the user elects to perform FLAT terrain modeling for a
particular application, the model will ignore any elevated
terrain height information given on the RE pathway.  Processing
will continue as flat terrain, and warning messages will be
generated to warn the user that elevated terrain heights were
present in the file, but ignored for processing.  The advantage
of this approach is that if an application is setup for
elevated terrain modeling, a simple change of the secondary
keyword on the TERRHGTS card from ELEV to FLAT is all that is
needed to run the model in flat terrain mode.  The terrain
height information does not need to be removed from the input
file as in the previous versions of the model.
                              2-43

-------
2.5.2 Adding or Modifying a Source or Source Group

     Modifying the input file to add a source or a source
group, or to add a source to a source group, is as simple as
just adding it.  There is no need to specify the total number
of sources in the run, which would then have to be changed if
more sources were added.  The same applies to the number of
groups, or the number of sources per group.  If the user
attempts to input more than the total number of sources or
groups allowed for a particular run, an error message will be
generated to that effect.  Also, modifying a source group to
delete a source is as easy as just deleting it from the input
card, without having to change any other inputs.

     Another way of "deleting" a source or a group from an
input file is to place a "**" in the pathway field of the card
or cards which define the source or group to "comment out"
those inputs.  This approach, which was discussed above in
Section 2.1.2, has the advantage of leaving the input data for
the source or group in the input file for possible later use.
It doesn't matter whether the "**" is entered with the text
editor in "insert" mode, in which case the other inputs of that
line are moved over, or if it is in "overtype" mode, which
would replace the pathway ID that was already there.

2.5.3 Adding or Modifying a Receptor Network

     As with source data, adding to or modifying the receptor
information in the ISC2 MODELS is relatively straight forward.
The problem of having to make several changes to accomplish one
small modification, such as adding a distance to a polar
receptor network, has been avoided.in the new model.  All that
the user needs to do is to add the new distance on the
appropriate input card, which is easily identifiable because of
the use of descriptive keywords.  The model checks to ensure
that the user does not attempt to specify more than the maximum
                              2-44

-------
number of receptors for a particular run, and generates an
appropriate message if too many are input.

2.5.4 Modifying Output Options

     Modifying the output options involves many of the same
principles that are described above.  In addition, all of the
output options are structured in a way that allows the user to
select options for specific averaging periods, so that the user
may find it useful to copy a record or group of records set up
for one averaging period and simply change the averaging period
parameter.  The other important short cut that is available for
the printed table output options is to use the secondary
keyword ALLAVE to indicate that the option applies to all
averaging periods that are calculated.  In this way, there will
be no need to change the output options if a new averaging
period is added to a run or if one is deleted.
                              2-45

-------
                 3.0 DETAILED KEYWORD REFERENCE

     This section of the ISC2 User's Guide provides a detailed
reference for all of the input keyword options for the ISC2
Short Term and Long Term models.  The information provided in
this section is more complete and detailed than the information
provided in the Brief Tutorial in Section 2.  Since this
section is intended to meet the needs of experienced modelers
who may need to understand completely how particular options
are implemented in the model, the information for each keyword
should stand on its own.  This section assumes that the reader
has a basic understanding of the keyword/parameter approach
used by the new models for specification of input options and
data.  Novice users should first review the contents of Section
2 in order to obtain that understanding.

     The information in this section is organized by function,
i.e., the keywords are grouped by pathway, and are in a logical
order based on their function within the model.   The order of
keywords presented here is the same as the order used in the
functional keyword reference in Appendix B, and the Quick
Reference Card pull-out at the end of the volume.  The syntax
for each keyword is provided, and the keyword type is specified
- either mandatory or optional and either repeatable or
non-repeatable.  Unless noted otherwise, there are no special
requirements for the order of keywords within each pathway,
although the order in which the keywords are presented here and
in Appendix B is recommended.  Any keyword which has special
requirements for its order within the pathway is so noted
following the syntax and type description.

     The syntax descriptions in the following sections use
certain conventions.  Parameters that are in all capital
letters and underlined in the syntax description are secondary
keywords that are to be entered as indicated for that keyword.
Other parameters are given descriptive names to convey the
                              3-1

-------
meaning of the parameter, and are listed with an initial
capital letter.  Many of the parameter names used correspond to
variable names used in the computer code of the models.
Parentheses around a parameter indicate that the parameter is
optional for that keyword.  The default that is taken when an
optional parameter is left blank is explained in the discussion
for that keyword.

3.1 AN OVERVIEW OF SHORT TERM VS. LONG TERM MODEL INPUTS

     One of the goals of the reprogramming effort was to make
the inputs for the new Short Term and Long Term models as
consistent as possible.  As a result, the majority of keywords
are the same for both models.  Because of this similarity, and
because the Short Term model is the more widely used of the
two, the discussions in the following sections are oriented
toward the Short Term model.  Any differences in the parameters
for a keyword for the Long Term model are highlighted so that
they are easily distinguishable.  Also, any keyword that
applies to only one of the models includes a note to that
effect.  There is no separate reference for the Long Term model
inputs as there was in the user's guide for the previous
versions of the models.

     Also, unless otherwise noted, the input keywords described
below apply to both the ISCST2 and the ISCEV2 (EVENT) Short
Term models.  In addition to the isolated keywords noted that
apply to only one or the other model, the entire REceptor
pathway applies only to ISCST2, and the EVent pathway applies
only to the ISCEV2 model.

3.2 CONTROL PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS

     The control pathway contains the keywords that provide the
overall control of the model run.  These include the dispersion
options, averaging time options, terrain height options, and
                              3-2

-------
others that are described  below.  The CO pathway must be the
first pathway in the runstream input file.

3.2.1 Title Information

     There are two keywords  that allow the  user to specify  up
to two lines of title  information that will appear on each  page
of the main output file  from the model.  The first keyword,
TITLEONE,  is mandatory,  while the second keyword,  TITLETWO,  is
optional.   The syntax  and  type for the keywords are summarized
below:
      Syntax: co TITLEONE
              CO TITLETWO TitleZ
     Type:     TITLEONE - Mandatory, Non-repeatable
               TITLETWO - Optional, Non-repeatable
The parameters Titlel and  Title2 are character parameters  of
length  68,  which are read  as a single field  from columns 13 to
80 of the  input record.  The title information is taken as it
appears in the runstream file without any conversion of lower
case to upper case letters.   If the TITLETWO keyword is not
included in the runstream  file, then the second line of the
title in the output file will appear blank.

3.2.2 Dispersion Options

     The dispersion options  are controlled by the MODELOPT
keyword on the CO pathway.   The syntax, type,  and order of the
MODELOPT keyword are summarized below:
       Syntax:  co MODELOPT D FAULT CONG RURAL GRDRIS NOSTD NOB ID  NOCALH HSGPRO
                              or   or
                             DEPPS URBAN
                Mandatory, Non-repeatable
      Order:   Must precede POLLUTID, HALFLIFE and DCAYCOEF
                                3-3

-------
where the secondary keyword parameters are described below (the
order and spacing of the parameters is not critical):

     DFAULT - Specifies that the regulatory default options
              will be used;
     CONG   - Specifies that concentration values will be
              calculated;
     DEPPS  - Specifies that dry DEPOSition values will be
              calculated;
     RURAL  - Specifies that RURAL dispersion parameters will
              be used;
     URBAN  - Specifies that URBAN dispersion parameters will
              be used;
     GRDRIS - Specifies that the non-default option of gradual
              plume rise will be used;
     NOSTD  - Specifies that the non-default option of no
              stack-tip downwash will be used;
     NOBID  - Specifies that the non-default option of no
              buoyancy-induced dispersion will be used;
     NOCALM - Specifies that the non-default option to bypass
              the calms processing routine will be used (Short
              Term only); and
     MSGPRO - Specifies that the non-default option of the
              missing data processing routine will be used
              (Short Term only).

     If the DFAULT secondary keyword is included among the
parameter fields, then any non-default option will be
overridden.  This includes the non-default options that may be
specified on the MODELOPT keyword, and also any attempt to
enter non-default values of the wind profile exponents (see
keyword WINDPROF on the ME pathway) or vertical potential
temperature gradients  (see keyword DTHETADZ on the ME pathway).
If the DFAULT parameter is not specified, then the regulatory
default options will still be used unless a non-default option
is specified in the input runstream.  The model will also
assume RURAL dispersion if neither the RURAL or URBAN keywords

                              3-4

-------
are present, and will assume concentration calculations if
neither the CONC or DEPPS keywords are used.  Non-fatal warning
messages are generated in either case.

     The regulatory default options are identified in Appendix
A of the Guideline on Air Quality Models (Revised) (EPA,
1987b), and include the following:

        Use stack-tip downwash (except for Schulman-Scire
        downwash);
        Use buoyancy-induced dispersion (except for
        Schulman-Scire downwash);
        Do not use gradual plume rise (except for building
        downwash);
        Use the calms processing routines;
        Use upper-bound concentration estimates for sources
        influenced by building downwash from super-squat
        buildings;
        Use default wind speed profile exponents; and
        Use default vertical potential temperature gradients.
     The default wind profile exponents and vertical potential
temperature gradients are provided below:

Pasquill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F
Rural
Wind
Profile
Exponent
0.07
0.07
0.10
0.15
0.35
0.55
Urban
Wind
Profile
Exponent
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.30
Rural
Temperature
Gradient
(K/m)
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.020
0.035
Urban
Temperature
Gradient
(K/m)
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.020
0.035
                              3-5

-------
     The missing data processing routines,  that  are included in
the ISC2 Short Term model as a non-regulatory option,  allow the
model to handle missing meteorological data in the processing
of short term averages.  With this option  selected, the model
treats missing meteorological data in the  same way as  the calms
processing routine, i.e., it sets the concentration (or
deposition) values to zero for that hour,  and calculates the
short term averages according to EPA's calms policy.   Calms and
missing values are tracked separately for  the purpose  of
flagging the short term averages.  An average that includes a
calm hour is flagged with a  'c1, an average that includes a
missing hour is flagged with an  'm1, and an average that
includes both calm and missing hours is flagged  with a 'b1.  If
missing meteorological data are encountered without the missing
data processing option, then the model will continue to read
through and check the meteorological data,  but will not perform
any dispersion calculations.

3.2.3 Averaging Time Options

     The averaging periods for both the Short Term and Long
Term models are selected using the AVERTIME keyword.   Since the
averaging period options are different between the Short Term
and Long Term models, the syntax for the AVERTIME keyword is
somewhat different.

     3.2.3.1 Short Term Model Options.

     The syntax and type of the  Short Term AVERTIME keyword are
summarized below:
    Syntax:  CO AVERTIME  Timel  Time2 TimeS TimeA MONTH  PERIOD
             Mandatory, Non-repeatable
                               3-6

-------
where the parameters  Timel .  .  .  Time4 refer to the
user-specified  short  term averaging periods of 1,  2,  3,  4,  6,
8, 12, or 24 hours, the secondary keyword MONTH refers  to
monthly averages  (for calendar months), and the secondary
keyword PERIOD  refers to the  average for the entire data
period.  Any of the short term averaging periods  listed above
may be selected for a given run,  up to the maximum number of
short term averages set in the computer code by the parameter
NAVE.  The initial values for NAVE are given in Sections 2.3
and 4.2.2.  The monthly averages are treated as short term
averages, and selection of the MONTH average counts toward the
limit of NAVE.  Since the monthly averages are treated  as short
term averages,  the user can select appropriate output options,
such as the second highest values by receptor, on the output
pathway.  The PERIOD  keyword  may be used to calculate the
annual average  for a  full year of meteorological  data,  or to
calculate the period  average  for a period other than  a  year.

     The location of  the PERIOD keyword in the parameter list
is not critical.  The order of the short term averaging periods
(including MONTH) is  also not critical, although  it does
control the order of  the averaging period result  tables in the
main output file.  Generally, it is recommended that  the short
term averaging  periods be input in increasing order,  unless
there is a clear  advantage in doing otherwise.

     3.2.3.2 Long Term Model  Options.

     The syntax and type of the Long Term AVERTIME keyword are
summarized below:
     Syntax:   co AVERTIME  JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
                       WINTER SPRING SUMMER FALL
                       QUART1 QUART2 QUARTS QUART4
                       MONTH SEASON  QUARTR  ANNUAL
                       PERIOD
     Type!    Mandatory, Non-repeatable
                               3-7

-------
where all of the parameters are secondary keywords that  relate
to an averaging period or periods associated with a  single STAR
data summary or a group of STAR summaries.  The keywords for
individual months, seasons and quarters are fairly
self-explanatory.  If the secondary keyword of SEASON  is used,
then it is assumed that all four seasons are present in  the
STAR data file, and averages are calculated for each season.
Similarly, if the keyword MONTH or QUARTR is used, then  the
model assumes that all twelve months or all four quarters are
present in the STAR data file, and averages are calculated for
each averaging period.  The MONTH and SEASON keywords  or the
MONTH and QUARTR keywords can also be used together  in the same
run.  However, seasonal STAR summaries and quarterly STAR
summaries cannot be used together in the same run, since the
seasons and quarters occupy the same locations in data storage.
It is assumed that the STAR summaries for the individual
seasons, months or quarters are in the order listed  in above.
Thus, the following two cards produce the same result:
      CO AVERTIME WINTER SPRING SUMMER  FALL
and
       CO AVERTIME SEASON
     The ANNUAL secondary keyword  indicates  that averages are
to be calculated  for  an annual  STAR  summary.   This differs from
the PERIOD secondary  keyword, which  refers to an average
calculated for all  STAR summaries  included in the data file.
The PERIOD keyword  may be used  to  calculate  the annual average
from a data  file  consisting of  STAR  summaries for each of the
four seasons or for each of the twelve months.   Thus,  the
ANNUAL and PERIOD keywords cannot  both be present on the
AVERTIME card.  The PERIOD average cannot be used when monthly
                              3-8

-------
STARs are included with seasonal or quarterly STARS  in  the  same
data file.

     The following card can be used to calculate the averages
for each of the four seasons and for the annual period  from a
data file consisting of five STAR summaries, one for each
season and one for the annual period:
      CO AVERTIME SEASON ANNUAL
whereas the following card will calculate the averages  for  each
of the four seasons, and will then rewind the meteorology file
and calculate the averages for the annual period  from the four
seasonal STAR summaries:
      CO AVERTIME SEASON PERIOD
     The AVERTIME keyword works in conjunction with  the
STARDATA keyword on the ME pathway to control which  averaging
periods are calculated.  Both of these keywords recognize  the
same set of secondary keywords.  The CO AVERTIME card  defines
which averaging periods are to be calculated, and  is a
mandatory keyword.  The ME STARDATA card defines which STAR
summaries are included in the data file.  The STARDATA keyword
is optional, unless the AVERTIME card includes only  the  PERIOD
average, in which case the STARDATA keyword  is mandatory in
order to define which STAR summaries are included  in the period
average.  If the ME STARDATA keyword is omitted, then  the
ISCLT2 model assumes that the meteorological data  file contains
only the STAR summaries identified on the CO AVERTIME  card.
                               3-9

-------
3.2.4 Specifying the Pollutant Type

     The POLLUTID keyword is used to identify the type of
pollutant being modeled for a particular run.   The syntax,
type, and order of the POLLUTID keyword are  summarized below:
      Syntax:  co POLLUTID poiiut
      Type:
Mandatory, Non-repeatable
      Order:   Must follow MOOELOPT and precede HALFLIFE and DCAYCOEF
where the Pollut parameter may be name  of  up to eight
characters.   Examples include S02. NOX,  CO,  PM10.  TSP, and
OTHER.  The  only choices that currently have any impact on the
results are  the selection of SO2 in conjunction with URBAN
dispersion and the regulatory default option,  and the selection
of PM10  (or  PM-10) with the multi-year  option for generating
the high-sixth-high in five years.  For the  urban SO2 default
case, the model uses a half life of 4 hours  for exponential
decay of the S02.
3.2.5 Modeling With Exponential Decay

     The  models provide the option to  use exponential decay  of
the pollutant being modeled.  Two keywords are available  for
this purpose, the HALFLIFE and DCAYCOEF keywords.  The syntax,
type, and order of these keywords are  summarized below:
         Syntax:  co HALFLIFE
                 CO DCAYCOEF  Decay
                 Optional, Non-repeatable
         Order:   Must foiiou MOOELOPT and POLLUTID
where  the Hafiif parameter is used  to  specify the half  life  for
exponential decay in seconds, and the  parameter Decay is used
to specify the decay coefficient in units of s"1.  The
relationship between these parameters  is DECAY = 0.693/HAFLIF.
                               3-10

-------
     Only one of these keywords may be specified  in a  given
run.  If more than one is encountered, a non-fatal warning
message is generated and the first specification  is used in  the
modeling.  Also, since the regulatory default option includes  a
half life of 4 hours for exponential decay of S02 in urban
settings, any HALFLIFE or DCAYCOEF input conflicting with that
option will be overridden if the DFAULT option  is selected on
the CO MODELOPT card.

3.2.6 Options for Elevated Terrain Heights

     Two optional keywords are available on the control  pathway
to control the receptor options for modeling elevated  terrain
heights - the TERRHGTS and ELEVUNIT keywords.

     The TERRHGTS keyword controls whether the  model assumes
flat terrain or allows for the input of receptor  heights on
elevated terrain.  The syntax and type of the TERRHGTS keyword
are summarized below:
      Syntax: co TERRHGTS FLAT or ELEV
      Types   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the FLAT secondary keyword forces flat terrain
calculations to be used throughout, regardless of the  input  of
terrain heights on the REceptor pathway.  Any terrain  heights
that are entered on the REceptor pathway are ignored if  FLAT
terrain is specified, and a non-fatal warning message  is
generated.  The ELEV secondary keyword specifies that  receptor
heights on elevated terrain are allowed on the REceptor
pathway.  If elevated terrain is assumed and a receptor  height
is not specified, then it is assumed to have a value of  0.0
meters.  For terrain heights above the release height, the
models automatically truncate ("chop off") the terrain heights
at the physical release heights for modeling impacts at  those
                              3-11

-------
receptors.  The models assume  flat  terrain as the default if no
TERRHGTS keyword is present  in the  input runstream.

     The ELEVUNIT keyword allows  the  user to specify the input
units for receptor elevation data included in the RE pathway.
The syntax and type of the ELEVUNIT keyword are summarized
below:
      Syntax: co ELEVUNIT  METERS or FEET
      Types   Optional, Non-repeatable
The default units for all  receptor terrain height inputs to the
model is meters.  Since terrain data are frequently available
more easily in feet, the presence of this keyword with the FEET
parameter instructs the model  to convert all receptor
elevations from feet to meters.   No other variables are
effected by this keyword.

3.2.7 Flagpole Receptor Height Option

     The FLAGPOLE keyword  specifies that receptor heights above
local ground level  (i.e. flagpole receptors) are allowed on the
REceptor pathway.  The FLAGPOLE keyword may also be used to
specify a default flagpole receptor height other than 0.0
meters.  The syntax and type of the FLAGPOLE keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: c° FLAGPOLE (Fiagdf)
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatablc
where Fiagdf  is  an optional parameter to specify a default
flagpole receptor  height.   If no parameter is provided, then a
default flagpole receptor  height of 0.0 meters is used.  Any
flagpole receptor  heights  that are entered on the REceptor
pathway are ignored if the FLAGPOLE keyword is not present on
                              3-12

-------
the control pathway, and a non-fatal warning message  is
generated.

3.2.8 To Run or Not to Run - That is the Question

     Because of the improved error handling and the "defensive
programming" that has been employed in the design  of  the ISC2
model, it is intended that the model will read through all  of
the inputs in the runstream file regardless of any errors or
warnings that may be encountered.  If a fatal error occurs  in
processing of the runstream information, then further model
calculations will be aborted.  Otherwise, the model will
attempt to run.  Because of the great many options available in
the ISC2 models, and the potential for wasted resources  if  a
large run is performed with some incorrect input data, the
RUNORNOT keyword has been included on the control  pathway to
allow the user to specify whether to RUN the model and perform
all of the calculations, or NOT to run and only process  the
input runstream data and summarize the setup information.   The
syntax and type of the RUNORNOT keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: co RUNORNOT RUN or NOT
      Type:   Mandatory, Non-repeatable
3.2.9 Generating an Input File for the Short Term  EVENT  Model
     (ISCEV2)

     The Short Term model consists of two executable  files  -
one is used for routine processing  (ISCST2) and the other is
used for EVENT processing (ISCEV2).  The EVENTFIL  keyword
controls whether or not the ISCST2 model will generate an input
file for use with the EVENT model, and applies only to the
ISCST2 model.  The syntax and type of the EVENTFIL keyword  are
summarized below:
                              3-13

-------
      Syntax: co EVENTFIL  (EvfUe)  (Evopt)
              Optional, Non-repeatable
where the optional Evfile parameter specifies the name  of  the
EVENT input file to be generated  (up to 40 characters),  and  the
optional parameter, Evopt, specifies the level of detail to  be
used in the EVENT output file.  Valid inputs for the Evopt
parameter are the secondary keywords of SOCONT and DETAIL  (see
the EVENTOUT keyword on the Output pathway, Section 3.7.2).  The
default filename used if no parameters are specified is
PASSTWO.INP, and the default for the level of detail is DETAIL.
If only one parameter is present, then it is taken to be the
Evfile, and the default will be used for Evopt.

     The primary difference between routine ISCST2 and  EVENT
processing is in the treatment of source group contributions.
The ISCST2 model treats the source groups independently,
corresponding to the way source groups are treated in the
previous version of the ISCST model.  The EVENT model  is
designed to provide source contributions to particular  events,
such as the design concentrations determined from ISCST2,  or
user specified events.  The user may specify the "events"  to
process using the EVent pathway, which lists specific
combinations of receptor location, source group, and averaging
period.  By specifying the EVENTFIL keyword, an input runstream
file will be generated that can be used directly with the  EVENT
model.  The events included in the generated EVENT model input
file are the design concentrations defined by the RECTABLE
keyword and the threshold violations identified by the  MAXIFILE
keyword on the OU pathway.

3.2.10 The Model Re-start Capability

     The ISCST2 model has an optional capability to store
intermediate results into an unformatted file, so that  the
model run can be continued later  in case of a power failure  or
                              3-14

-------
a user interrupt.  This re-start option  is  controlled by the
SAVEFILE and INITFILE keywords on the CO pathway.   The syntax
and type of these keywords are summarized below:
      Syntax: co SAVEFILE 
-------
     The INITFILE keyword works in conjunction with the
SAVEFILE keyword, and instructs the model to initialize the
results arrays from a previously saved file.  The optional
parameter, Inifil, identifies the unformatted file of
intermediate results to use for initializing the model.   If no
Inifil parameter is specified, then the model assumes the
default filename of TMP.FIL.  If the file doesn't exist or if
there are any errors encountered in opening the file, then a
fatal error message is generated and processing is halted.

     Note;  It is important to note that if both the SAVEFILE
and INITFILE keywords are used in a the same model run, then
different filenames must be specified for the Savfil and  Inifil
parameters.  Otherwise, the model will encounter an error in
opening the files, and further processing will be halted.

3.2.11 Performing Multiple Year Analyses for PM-10

     The MULTYEAR keyword on the CO pathway provides an option
for the user to perform a multiple year analysis such as  would
be needed to determine the "high-sixth-high in five years"
design value for determining PM-10 impacts.  In the past, such
modeling would require extensive postprocessing of ISCST  binary
concentration files.  Since the multiple year option makes use
of the model re-start capabilities described in the previous
section, the MULTYEAR keyword is not compatible with the
SAVEFILE or INITFILE keywords.  The model will generate a fatal
error message if the user attempts to exercise both options  in
a single run.  The syntax and type of this keyword is
summarized below:
      Syntax: co MULTYEAR savfii  unifu>
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the Savfil parameter specifies the  filename  for saving
the results arrays at the end of each year of processing,  and
                              3-16

-------
the Inifil parameter specifies the filename to use for
initializing the results arrays at the beginning of the current
year.  The Inifil parameter is optional, and should be left
blank for the first year in the multi-year series of runs.

     The MULTYEAR option works by accumulating the high short
term average results from year to year through the mechanism of
the re-start save file.  The model may be setup to run in a
batch file with several years of meteorological data, and at
the end of each year of processing, the short term average
results reflect the cumulative high values for the years that
have been processed.  The PERIOD average results are given for
only the current year, but the model carries the highest PERIOD
values from year to year and includes the cumulative highest
PERIOD averages in the summary table at the end of the run.

     When setting up a batch file to perform a multiple year
analysis, the user would first create an input runstream file
for the first year with all of the applicable modeling options,
the source inventory data, the receptor locations, the
meteorology options for the first year and the output file
options.  To obtain the PM-10 design value, be sure to include
the SIXTH highest value on the OU RECTABLE card (see Section
3.7.1).  For the CO MULTYEAR card for the first year, the user
would only specify the Savfil parameter, and may use a card
such as:
      CO MULTYEAR YEAR1.SAV
For the subsequent years, the user could copy the input file
created for Year-1, and edit the files to change the year
parameters and meteorology filename on the ME pathway  (and
possibly in the title information), and edit the MULTYEAR
cards.  For the subsequent years, both the Savfil and  Inifil
parameters must be specified, with the Savfil for Year-1
                             '3-17

-------
becoming  the Inifil for Year—2,  and so on.
might  look like this:
The MULTYEAR cards
       CO HULTYEAR  YEAR1.SAV (First year)
       CO MULTYEAR  YEAR2.SAV  YEAR1.SAV (Second year)
       CO MULTYEAR  YEAR3.SAV  YEAR2.SAV (Third year)
       CO MULTYEAR  YEAR4.SAV  YEAR3.SAV (Fourth year)
       CO MULTYEAR  YEARS.SAV  YEAR4.SAV (Sixth year)
3.2.12  Detailed Error Listing File

     The ERRORFIL keyword  on the CO pathway  allows the user  to
request a detailed listing file of all the messages generated
by the  model.   This includes the error and warning messages
that are listed as part of the message summaries provided  in
the main output file, and  also any informational messages  (such
as occurrences of calm winds)  and quality assurance messages
that are generated.  The syntax and type of  the ERRORFIL
keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: co ERRORFIL (ErrfH) (DEBUG)
               Optional, Hon-repeatable
where  the Errfil parameter is the name of  the detailed message
file,  and the DEBUG secondary keyword implements an option to
obtain detailed output results including plume heights,  sigmas,
etc.,  for each hour calculated for debugging purposes.   Note:
The DEBUG option generates very large files and should be  used
with CAUTION!  If the optional Errfil parameter is left  blank,
then the model will use  a  default filename of ERRORS.LST.   A
complete description of  the error and other types of messages
generated by the models  is provided in Appendix E.
                               3-18

-------
3.3 SOURCE PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS

     The source pathway contains the keywords that define the
source information for a particular model run.  The model
currently handles three source types, identified as point,
volume or area sources.  The input parameters vary depending on
the source type.  For point sources, the user can also identify
building dimensions for nearby structure that cause aerodynamic
downwash influences on the source.  The user can also identify
groups of sources for which the models will combine the
results.  With the exception of the variable emission rate
options on the EMISFACT keyword, all of the SO pathway inputs
are identical between the Short Term and Long Term models.

     The LOCATION keyword, which identifies the source type and
location, must be the first card entered for each source.  The
only other requirement for order of the keywords is that the
SRCGROUP keyword must be the last keyword before the SO
FINISHED card.  The user may group all of the LOCATION cards
together, then group the source parameter cards together, or
they may want to group all input cards for a particular source
together as was done in the old ISC input file.  All sources
are given a source ID by the user, which is used to link the
source parameter inputs to the correct source or sources.  The
source ID can be any alphanumeric string of up to eight
characters.

     The number of sources allowed in a given run is controlled
by a Fortran PARAMETER statement in the computer code.  The
initial storage limits for each of the models is given in
Section 2.3, which discusses storage allocation in general.
These limits can easily be modified by the user and the code
recompiled to accommodate different user needs.
                              3-19

-------
3.3.1 Identifying Source Types and Locations

     The LOCATION keyword is used to  identify  the source type
and the location of each source to be modeled.   The LOCATION
card must be the first card entered for  each source since it
identifies the source type, which controls which parameters are
needed and/or accepted.  The syntax,  type and  order of the
LOCATION keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: so LOCATION srcid srctyp xs YS
              Mandatory, Repeatable
      Order!  Must be first card for each source input
where the Srcid parameter is the alphanumeric source ID defined
by the user (up to eight characters),  Srctyp is the source
type, which is identified by one of  the  secondary keywords -
POINT, VOLUMEf or AREA, and Xs, Ys,  and  Zs  are the x,  y, and z
coordinates of the source location in  meters.   Note that the
source elevation, Zs,  is an optional parameter.   If the source
elevation is omitted,  it will be given a default value of 0.0,
but the source elevation is only used  if the CO TERRHGTS ELEV
option is selected.  The x  (east-west) and  y (north-south)
coordinates are for the center of the  source for POINT and
VOLUME sources, and are for the southwest corner of the source
for AREA sources.  The source coordinates may be input as
Universal Transverse Mercator  (UTM)  coordinates, or may be
referenced to a user-defined origin.

     The volume source algorithms in the ISC2 models may also
be used to model the effects of certain  kinds of line sources,
such as conveyor belts and rail lines.   Section 1.2.2 of Volume
II provides technical  information on how to model a line source
with multiple volume sources.  Also, as  shown in Section 1.2.3
of Volume II, irregularly shaped areas may  be modeled with the
ISC2 MODELS by dividing up the area  into several square areas
of varying sizes.
                              3-20

-------
     The source ID  entered on the LOCATION card identifies that
source for the remainder of the SO pathway inputs.  Since the
model accepts alphanumeric strings of up to eight characters
for the source ID,  the  sources can be identified with
descriptive names,  such as STACK1, STACK2, BOILER3, SLAGPILE,
etc.  This may also be  especially useful if line sources or
irregularly-shaped  area sources are being modeled as multiple
volume or square areas,  as discussed above.  Since they are
part of the same physical source, they can be given names that
will identify them  as being related, such as LINE1A, LINE1B,
LINE1C, etc.

3.3.2 Specifying Source Release Parameters

     The main source parameters are input on the SRCPARAM card,
which is a mandatory keyword for each source being modeled.
Since the input parameters vary depending on the source type,
the three source types  handled by the ISC2 models  (POINT,
VOLUME and AREA) are discussed separately.

     3.3.2.1 POINT  Source Inputs.

     The ISC2 POINT source algorithms are used to model
releases from stacks and isolated vents, as well as other kinds
of sources.  The syntax,  type and order for the SRCPARAM card
for POINT sources are summarized below:
      Syntax: so SRCPARAM Srcid Ptemis Stkhgt Stktmp Stkvel Stkdia
      Type:   Mandatory, Repeatable
      Order:  Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
where the Srcid parameter is the same source ID that was
entered on the LOCATION card for a particular source, and  the
other parameters  are as follows:
                              3-21

-------
     Ptemis - point emission rate in g/s,
     Stkhgt - release height above ground in meters,
     Stktmp - stack gas exit temperature in degrees K,
     Stkvel - stack gas exit velocity in m/s, and
     Stkdia - stack inside diameter in meters.

It should be noted that the same emission rate is used  for  both
concentration and deposition calculations in the ISC2 models.
An example of a valid SRCPARAM input card for a point source is
given below:
      CO SRCPARAM STACK1  16.71 35.0  444.0 22.7  2.74
where the source ID is STACK1, the emission rate  is  16.71 g/s,
the release height is 35.0 m, the exit temperature is  444.0 K,
the exit velocity is 22.7 m/s, and the inside stack  diameter is
2.74 m.  All of the parameters must be present on the  input
card.

     Since the ISC2 models use direction-specific building
dimensions for all sources subject to building downwash,  there
are no building parameters entered on the SRCPARAM card.
Building dimensions are entered on the BUILDHGT and  BUILDWID
cards described below in Section 3.3.3.

     3.3.2.2 VOLUME Source Inputs.

     The ISC2 VOLUME source algorithms are used to model
releases from a variety of industrial sources, such  as building
roof monitors, multiple vents, and conveyor belts.   The syntax,
type and order for the SRCPARAM card for VOLUME sources are
summarized below:
                              3-22

-------
      Syntax: SO SRCPARAM Srcid Vtemis Rethgt Syinft Szfnit
              Mandatory, Repeatable
      Order!  Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
where the Srcid parameter is the same source ID that was
entered on the  LOCATION card for a particular source, and the
other parameters are as follows:

     Vlemis  - volume emission rate in g/s,
     Relhgt  - release height (center of volume)  above ground,
              in meters,
     Syinit  - initial lateral dimension of  the volume in
              meters, and
     Szinit  - initial vertical dimension  of the volume in
              meters.

It should be noted that the same emission rate is used for both
concentration and deposition calculations in the ISC2 models.
The following table, which is explained in  more detail in
Section 1.2.2 of Volume II of the User's  Guide,  summarizes the
suggested procedures to be used for estimating the initial
lateral and  vertical dimensions for various types of volume and
line sources.
                               3-23

-------
                           TABLE 3-1.

         SUMMARY OF SUGGESTED PROCEDURES FOR ESTIMATING

               INITIAL LATERAL DIMENSIONS  <7yo AND

  INITIAL VERTICAL DIMENSIONS CTZO FOR VOLUME AND LINE SOURCES
         Type of Source
                  Procedure for Obtaining
                     Initial Dimension
              (a)
Initial Lateral Dimensions  (gyo)
 Single Volume Source


 Line Source Represented by
 Adjacent Volume Sources  (see
 Figure 1-8(a))

 Line Source Represented by
 Separated Volume Sources  (see
 Figure 1-8(b))
                yo
                yo
length of side  divided
by 4.3

length of side  divided
by 2.15


center to center
distance divided by
2.15
             (b)  Initial Vertical Dimensions (a )
 Surface-Based Source  (he - 0)


 Elevated Source  (he > 0) on or
 Adjacent to a Building

 Elevated Source  (he > 0) not
 on or Adjacent to a Building
                zo
                zo
vertical dimension of
source divided by 2.15

building height divided
by 2.15

vertical dimension of
source divided by 4.3
     3.3.2.3 AREA  Source  Inputs.


     The ISC2 AREA source algorithms are used to model  releases

from storage piles,  slag  dumps, lagoons, as well as from  a

variety of air toxic release sites.   The current versions of

the ISC2 models accept  only square areas whose sides are

oriented north-south and  east-west.   The syntax, type and order

for the SRCPARAM card for AREA sources are summarized below:
      Syntax: so SRCPARAM Srcid Aremis Relhgt Xinit
      Type:   Mandatory, Repeat able
      Order:  Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
                              3-24

-------
where the Srcid parameter is the same source ID that was
entered on the LOCATION card for a particular source, and the
other parameters are as follows:

     Aremis - area emission rate in g/s/m2,
     Relhgt - release height above ground in meters, and
     Xinit  - length of the side of the square area in meters.

It should be noted that the same emission rate is used for both
concentration and deposition calculations in the ISC2 models.
It should also be noted that the emission rate for the area
source is an emission rate per unit area, which is different
from the point and volume source emission rates, which are
total emissions for the source.

     In order to model irregularly-shaped areas, the user may
have to subdivide the area into smaller square areas of varying
sizes.  In addition, there are restrictions on the placement of
receptors relative to area sources, and it is recommended that
if the source-receptor separation is less than the source
width, Xinit, then the area source should be subdivided into
smaller area sources.  More technical information about the
application of the ISC2 area source algorithm is provided in
Section 1.2.3 of Volume II of the User's Guide.

3.3.3 Specifying Building Downwash Information

     As noted above, the ISC2 models include algorithms to
model the effects of buildings downwash on emissions from
nearby or adjacent point sources.  The building downwash
algorithms do not apply to volume or area sources.  For a
technical description of the building downwash algorithms, the
user is referred to Volume II of the ISC2 User's Guide.  The
ISC2 models use direction-specific information for all building
downwash cases, unlike the earlier version of the ISC models
                              3-25

-------
which only used direction-specific information for shorter
stacks which satisfied the  Schulman-Scire criterion.

     There are three keywords  that are used to specify building
downwash information, BUILDHGT,  BUILDWID, and LOWBOUND.  The
syntax, type and order for  the BUILDHGT keyword, used to input
direction specific building heights,  are summarized below:
      Syntax: SO BUILDHGT Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsbh
-------
the trailing part consists of more than one alphabetical or
numeric field, it is all lumped into one character field.  For
example, the source ID 'STACK2' consists of the parts 'STACK'
plus '2' plus a single trailing blank, ' '.  By comparing the
separate parts of the source IDs, it can be seen that STACK2
falls between the range 'STACK1-STACK10.'   For a three-part
example, it can also be seen that VENT1B falls within the range
of VENT1A-VENT1C.  However, VENT2 does not fall within the
range of VENT1A to VENT3B, since the third part of VENT2 is a
single blank, which does not fall within the range of A to C.
This is because a blank character will preceed a normal
alphabetical character.  Normally, the source ranges will work
as one would intuitively expect for simple source names.  Most
importantly, for names that are made up entirely of numeric
characters, such as for old input files converted using
STOLDNEW (see Appendix C), the source ranges will be based
simply on the relative numerical values.  The user is strongly
encouraged to check the summary of model inputs to ensure that
the source ranges were interpreted as expected, and also to
avoid using complex source names in ranges, such as
AA1B2C-AB3A3C.  Since the order of keywords within the SO
pathway is quite flexible, it is also important to note that
the building heights will only be applied to those sources that
have been defined previously in the input file.

     Following the Srcid or the Srcrng parameter, the user
inputs 36 direction-specific building heights  (Dsbh parameter)
in meters for the Short Term model, beginning with the 10
degree flow vector (wind blowing toward 10 degrees from north),
and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise direction.  For
the Long Term model, the Dsbh parameter consists of 16
direction-specific building heights beginning with the flow
vector for the north sector, and proceeding clockwise to
                              3-27

-------
north-northwest.
presented below:
Some examples of building height inputs are
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34.
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34.
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34. 34.

       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 36*34.0
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1-STACK10 33*34.0 3*0.0
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 35.43 36.45 36.37 35.18 32.92 29.66 25.50 20.56
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18 36.37 36.45
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 35.43 33.33 35.43 36.45  0.00 35.18 32.92 29.66
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 25.50 20.56 15.00 20.56 25.50 29.66 32.92 35.18
       SO BUILDHGT STACK1 36.37 36.45 35.43 33.33
The first example  illustrates  the use of  repeat cards  if more
than  one card is needed to input all of the values.  The values
are processed in the order in  which they  appear in the input
file,  and are identified as being repeat  cards by repeating the
Srcid parameter.   The first and second examples produce
identical results  within the model.  The  second one  illustrates
the use of a repeat value that can simplify numerical  input in
some  cases.  The field "36*34.0" is interpreted by the model as
"repeat the value  34.0 a total of 36 times."  This is  also used
in the third example where the building height is constant for
directions of 10 degrees through 330 degrees,  and then is set
to 0.0 (e.g. the stack may be  outside the region of  downwash
influence) for directions 340  through 360.   The third  example
also  uses a source range rather than a single source ID.  The
last  example illustrates building heights which vary by
direction, and shows that the  number of values on each card
need  not be the same.  For improved readability of the input
file,  the user may want to put the numerical inputs  into
"columns," but there are no special rules regarding  the spacing
of the parameters  on this keyword.

      The BUILDWID  keyword is used to input direction-specific
building widths for downwash analyses.  The syntax for this
                                3-28

-------
keyword, which is very similar to the BUILDHGT keyword,  is
summarized  below, along with the type and order information:
      Syntax: SO BUILDWID  Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsb«(i},i=1,36   (16 for LT)
      Types   Optional, Repeatable
      Order:  Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
For a description of the Srcid and  Srcrng parameters, and  for a
discussion  and examples of the numeric input options, refer to
the BUILDHGT  keyword above.  The Dsbw(i)  parameter contains the
direction-specific building widths,  36 for the Short Term
model, and  16 for the Long Term model.   The directions proceed
in a clockwise direction, beginning with the 10 degree flow
vector for  the Short Term model and beginning with the flow
vector for  the north sector for the Long Term model.

     The LOWBOUND keyword is used to exercise the
non-regulatory default option of calculating "lower bound"
concentration or deposition values  for downwash sources  subject
to enhanced lateral plume spread by super-squat buildings
(width is more than five times the  height).  The syntax, type
and order of  this keyword is summarized below:
      Syntax: SO LOWBOUND  Srcid (or Srcrng) Idswak(i),i=1,36 (16 for LT)
      Types
Optional, Repeatable
      Order:  Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
where the  Srcid and Srcrng parameters  are described above  for
the BUILDHGT  keyword, and the Idswak(i)  parameter is an array
of lower bound wake option switches  beginning with the 10
degree flow vector and incrementing  by 10 degrees clockwise  for
the Short  Term model and beginning with the flow vector for  the
north sector  for the Long Term model.   A value of 0 means  to
use the upper bound  (regulatory default)  for that sector,  and a
value of 1 means to use the lower bound for that sector.   The
use of repeat values is permitted for  inputting the Idswak
                               3-29

-------
array, e.g., a field of  '36*1'  indicates to use the lower bound
for all 36 sectors.  Since this is  a non-regulatory default
option, if the DFAULT option  has been selected on the MODELOPT
keyword (CO pathway), then any  LOWBOUND inputs will be ignored,
and the model will calculate  the upper bound estimates.  The
model will generate a non-fatal warning message in such a case.

     For a technical description of the "lower bound" option,
the reader is referred to Section 1.1.5.3 of Volume II.

3.3.4 Using Variable Emission Rates

     The ISC2 models provide  the option of specifying variable
emission rate factors for individual sources or for groups of
sources.  The factors may vary  on different time scales, such
as by season, hour-of-day, etc.  Since the Short Term and Long
Term models work  on different averaging periods, the variable
emission rate factors are somewhat different.  Therefore the
models are discussed separately.

     3.3.4.1 Short Term  Model Options.

     The EMISFACT keyword provides the user the option of
specifying variable emission  rate factors for sources modeled
by the Short Term model.  The syntax, type and order of this
keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: SO EMISFACT Sreid (or Srcrng)  Qflag Qfact(i),i=1,n
      Type:   Optional, Repeatable
      Order:  Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
where the  Srcid parameter is the same source ID that was
entered on the  LOCATION card for a particular source.  The  user
also has the  option of using the Srcrng parameter for
specifying a  range of sources for which the emission rate
factors apply,  instead of identifying a single source.  This  is
                              3-30

-------
accomplished by two source ID character strings separated by a
dash, e.g., STACK1-STACK10.  The use of the Srcrng parameter is
explained in more detail in Section 3.3.3 above for the
BUILDHGT keyword.

     The parameter Qflag is the variable emission rate flag,
and is one of the following secondary keywords:

     SEASON - emission rates vary seasonally (n=4),
     MONTH  - emission rates vary monthly (n=12),
     HROFDY - emission rates vary by hour-of-day  (n=24),
     STAR   - emission rates vary by speed and stability
              category (n=36), and
     SEASHR - emission rates vary by season and hour-of-day
              (n=96)

The Qfact array is the array of factors, where the number of
factors is shown above for each Qflag option.  The EMISFACT
card may be repeated as many times as necessary to input all of
the factors, and repeat values may be used for the numerical
inputs.  An example of each of these options is presented
below, with column headers to indicate the order in which
values are to be input.
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
so
so
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
STACK1
SEASON
MONTH
HROFDY
HROFDY
or, equivalently:
EMISFACT STACK1 HROFDY
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
Stab.
STACK1
STACK1
Cat.:
STAR
SEASHR
WINTER
0.50
JAN FEB
0.1 0.2
1 2
0.0 0.
13 14
1.0 1.
1-5
5*0.0
A
6*0.5
SPRING SUMMER
0.50 1.00
FALL
0.75



MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.0
3
0 0.0
15
0 1.0
6
0.5
B
6*0.6
4 5
0.0 0.0
16 17
1.0 1.0
7-17
11*1.0
C
6*0.7
6
0.5
18
0.5
18
0.5
D
6*0
enter 24 hourly scalars
seasons (winter, spring
7 8
1.0
9
1.0
19 20 21
0.0 0.0 0
19-24
6*0.
0
E F
.8 6*0.9
for each
, summer,
10
1.0
11 12
1.0 1.0 1.0
22 23 24
.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

(6
6*1

WS Cat.)
.0
of the four
fall)
                              3-31

-------
     3.3.4.2 Long Term Model  Options.

     The EMISFACT keyword  provides the user the option of
specifying variable emission  rate factors for sources modeled
by the Long Term model.  The  syntax,  type and order of this
keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: SO EMISFACT Srcid (or Srcrng)  Qflag Qfact(i),i=1,n
              Optional, Repeatable
      Order!  Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
where the Srcid parameter  is the same source ID that was
entered on the LOCATION  card for a particular source.  The user
also has the option  of specifying a range of sources for which
the emission rate  factors  apply, instead of identifying a
single source.  This is  accomplished by two source ID character
strings separated  by a dash,  e.g., STACK1-STACK10.  The use  of
the Srcrng parameter is  explained in more detail in Section
3.3.3 above for the  BUILDHGT keyword.

     The parameter Qflag is the variable emission rate flag,
and is one of the  following secondary keywords:
     SEASON - emission rates vary seasonally (n=4),
     QUARTR - emission rates vary by quarter (n=4),
     MONTH  - emission rates vary monthly (n=12),
     SSTAB  - emission rates vary by season and stability
               (n=24),
     SSPEED - emission rates vary by season and speed  (n=24),
     STAR   - emission rates vary by speed and stability
              only(n=36),  and
     SSTAR  - emission rates vary by season, speed and
              stability  (n=144),
The Qfact array is the array of factors, where the number of
factors is shown above for each Qflag option.  The EMISFACT
card may be repeated as  many times as necessary to input all of
the factors, and repeat  values may be used for the numerical
                               3-32

-------
inputs.  An example of each of these options is presented
below, with column headers to indicate the order in which
values are to be input.
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
**
so
**
so
**
so
**
so
EMISFACT
ENISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
EMISFACT
STACK1 SEASON
STACK1 QUARTR
STACK1 MONTH
STACK1 SSTAB
STACK1 SSPEEO
Stab. Cat.:
STACK1 STAR
Stab. Cat.:
Season 1:
STACK1 SSTAR
Season 2:
STACK1 SSTAR
Season 3:
STACK1 SSTAR
Season 4:
STACK1 SSTAR
WINTER SPRING SUMMER FALL
0.50 0.50 1.00 0.75
QUART 1 QUARTZ QUARTS QUART4
0.50 0.50 1.00 0.75
JAN
0.1
FEB MAR APR MAY
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
WINTER
6*0.50
WINTER
6*0.50
A
6*0.
A
6*0.
6*0.
6*0.
6*0.
5
5
5
5
5
B
6*0
B
6*0
6*0
6*0
6*0
SPRING
6*0.50
SPRING
6*0.50
C
.6 6*0.7
C
.6 6*0.7
.6 6*0.7
.6 6*0.7
.6 6*0.7
JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 1.0
SUMMER FALL
6*1.00 6*0.
SUMMER FALL
6*1.00 6*0.
0 E
6*0.8
D E
6*0.8
6*0.8
6*0.8
6*0.8
F
6*0.9
F
6*0.9
6*0.9
6*0.9
6*0.9
(6
75
(6
75
(6
6*1
NOV DEC
1.0 1.0
Stab Cat.)
WS
WS
.0
(6 WS
6*1.0
6*1.0
6*1.0
6*1.0
Cat.)
Cat.)
Cat.)
     If a monthly emission rate variation is selected, then the
factors will only to apply to monthly STAR summaries.  A
warning message will be generated if no monthly averages are to
be calculated.  For the other variable emission rate choices,
the model will determine the correct season or quarter and
apply that factor to any monthly STAR summaries for which
calculations are made.  Also, if quarterly averages are being
calculated, then none of the emission rate factors involving
seasonal variation may be used (SEASON. SSTAB. SSPEED. or
SSTAR).  If a seasonal variation of emission rates is needed in
the calculation of quarterly averages, then it must be
implemented through the use of the MONTHly variable emission
rate option.

3.3.5 Adjusting the Emission Rate Units for Output

     The default emission rate units for the ISC2 models are
grams per second for point and volume sources, and grams per

                              3-33

-------
second per square meter for area  sources.   By default, the
models convert these input units  to  output units of micrograms
per cubic meter for concentration calculations and grams per
square meter for deposition calculations.   This is accomplished
by applying a default emission  rate  unit factor of 1.0E06 for
concentration and 3600 for deposition.   The deposition factor
essentially converts the  emission rate  to grams per hour for
total deposition calculations.  For  the Long Term model, an
additional factor is applied  for  deposition calculations to
adjust the emissions for  the  number  of  hours in the STAR data
period.  This is done automatically  by  the ISCLT2 model, which
allows the user to use the same set  of  source parameter inputs
whether the model is calculating  concentration or deposition in
either model.

     The EMISUNIT keyword on  the  SO  pathway allows the user to
specify a different unit  conversion  factor, and to specify the
appropriate label for the output  units  for either concentration
or deposition calculations.   The  syntax and type of the
EMISUNIT keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: SO EMISUNIT Emifac Emilbl Conlbl (or Deplbl)
      TVP6«   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the parameter  Emifac is the emission rate unit factor,
Emilbl is the  label  for the emission units (up to 40
characters), and Conlbl and Deplbl are the output unit labels
(up to 40 characters)  for concentration and deposition
calculations,  respectively.  For example, to produce output
concentrations in milligrams per cubic meter, assuming input
units of grams per sec,  the following card could be input:
       SO EMISUNIT  1.0E3  GRAMS/SEC  MILLIGRAMS/M**3
                              3-34

-------
since there are  1.0E3 milligrams per gram.   The emission rate
unit factor applies to all sources for a given run.   Since the
model uses one or more spaces to separate different fields on
the input runstream images, it is important  that there not be
any spaces within the label fields on this card.   Thus, instead
of entering  'GRAMS PER SECOND1 for the emission label, a label
of 'GRAMS/SECOND1,  or 'GRAMS-PER-SECOND1 or  an equivalent
variation should be used.

3.3.6 Specifying Variables for Settling. Removal and Deposition
     Calculations

     The ISC2 models include algorithms to handle the
gravitational settling and removal by dry deposition of larger
particulates.  The input of source variables for settling and
removal are controlled by three keywords on  the SO pathway,
SETVELOC, MASSFRAX, and REFLCOEF.  As with building dimensions
and variable emission rate factors described above,  the
settling and removal variables may be input  for a single
source, or may be applied to a range of sources.

     The syntax,  type and order for these three keywords are
summarized below:
      Syntax: SO SETVELOC Srcid (or Srcrng) Vsn(i).i=1.Nvs
              SO MASSFRAX Srcid (or Srcrng) Phi(i),i=1,Nvs
              SO REFLCOEF Srcid (or Srcrng) Gamma(i),i=1,Nvs
      Type!   Optional, Repeat able
              Must follow the LOCATION card for each source input
where the Srcid  or Srcrng identify the source  or sources for
which the inputs apply,  and where the Vsn array consists of the
gravitational  settling velocities (m/s) for  each of the
settling categories (up to a maximum of 20 set by the NVSMAX
PARAMETER in the computer code), the Phi array is the
corresponding  mass fractions (between 0 and  1)  for each of the
categories, and  the Gamma array is the surface reflection

                              3-35

-------
coefficients (between 0 and 1)  for each of the categories.  The
use of the Srcrng parameter is explained in more detail in
Section 3.3.3 above for the BUILDHGT keyword.

     The number of categories for a particular source is Nvs.
The user does not need to explicitly tell the model the number
of categories being input, but all keyword inputs for a
particular source or source range must be contiguous, and the
number of categories must agree for each of the three keywords
input for a particular source.   For the best results, as many
categories as possible should be used.  As many continuation
cards as needed may be used to define the inputs for a
particular keyword.  The model checks the inputs to ensure that
the mass fractions sum to 1.0 (within 2 percent) for each
source input, and that the mass fractions and reflection
coefficients are within the proper range.  A reflection
coefficient of 0.0 means that plume material for that settling
category is completely removed when it reaches the surface.  A
reflection coefficient of 1.0 means that all of the plume
material is reflected from the surface without any deposition.
A settling velocity of 0.0 m/s means that the plume material
does not settle, i.e., the plume centerline remains horizontal,
although plume material may still be deposited on the surface.

     For a technical description of the ISC2 dry deposition
algorithms, refer to Sections 1.3 and 2.3 of Volume II of the
User's Guide, which includes technigues for calculating the
gravitational settling velocities as a function of particle
density and radius.

3.3.7 Using Source Groups

     The ISC2 models allow the user to group contributions from
particular sources together.  Several source groups may be
setup in a single run, and they may, for example, be used to
model impacts from the source being permitted, the group of
                              3-36

-------
increment consuming PSD- sources,  and the group of all sources
for comparison to a NAAQS  in  a  single run.   There is always at
least one source group  in  a run,  which may consist of all
sources, so the SRCGROUP keyword  has been made mandatory in the
ISC2 models.  The syntax,  type  and order of the SRCGROUP
keyword are summarized  below:
      Syntax: SO SRCGROUP Grpid Srcid's  and/or  Srcrng's
              Mandatory, Repeatable
      Order:  Must t* the last keyword in the SO pathway before FINISHED
where the Grpid parameter  is  an alphanumeric string of up to
eight characters that  identifies the group name.  The Srcid's
and Srcrng's are the individual source IDs and/or source ranges
that make up the group of  sources.   Source ranges, which are
described in more detail in the description of the BUILDHGT
keyword (Section 3.3.3), are  input  as two source IDs separated
by a dash, e.g., STACK1-STACK10.  Individual source IDs and
source ranges may be used  on  the same card.  If more than one
input card is needed to define  the  sources for a particular
group, then additional cards  may be input, repeating the
pathway, keyword and group ID.

     A special group ID has been reserved for use in specifying
the group of all sources.  When Grpid - ALL, the model will
automatically setup a  source  group  called ALL that includes all
sources modeled for that particular run.  If desired, the user
can setup a group of all sources with a different group ID by
explicitly specifying  all  sources on the input card(s).

     As described in Section  2.3, the maximum number of source
groups is controlled by a  Fortran PARAMETER statement in the
computer code.  If the user attempts to define more than the
allowable number of source groups,  the model will generate an
appropriate error message.
                              3-37

-------
     As discussed in Sections 1.2.4.6 and 3.2.9, it is
sometimes important for a user to know the contribution of a
particular source to the total result for a group.  These
source contribution analyses are facilitated in the Short Term
model by the introduction of the EVENT model.  The EVENT model
uses the same source groups that are identified by ISCST2 (when
the input file is generated using the CO EVENTFIL option), but
the model is structured in a way that it retains individual
source results for particular events.  The Long Term model is
able to provide source contribution information in the first
pass, because of the different data structures and memory
requirements for that model.  Refer to the sections noted above
for a more complete description of the EVENT model and its
uses.

3.4 RECEPTOR PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS

     The REceptor pathway contains keywords that define the
receptor information for a particular model run.  The receptor
pathway inputs are identical between the ISCST2 model and the
ISCLT2 model.  The RE pathway is not used at all by the ISCEV2
(EVENT) model, since the receptor locations are defined on the
EVent pathway in combination with particular time periods.

     The RE pathway contains keywords that allow the user to
define Cartesian grid receptor networks and/or polar grid
receptor networks, with either uniform or non-uniform grid
spacing, as well as discrete receptor locations referenced to a
Cartesian or a polar system.  The program is initially setup to
allow five  (5) gridded receptor networks of either (or both)
types in a single run, plus discrete receptors of either type,
up to a maximum limit on the total number of receptors.  The
limit on the number of receptors in a given run is controlled
by a Fortran PARAMETER in the computer code  (see Sections 2.3
and 4.2.2).  The number of receptor networks allowed is also
                              3-38

-------
controlled by  a PARAMETER statement and may be easily changed
by the user.

3.4.1 Defining Networks of Gridded Receptors

     Two types of receptor networks are allowed by the ISC2
models.  A Cartesian grid network, defined through the GRIDCART
keyword, includes an array of points  identified by their x
(east-west) and y (north-south) coordinates.  A polar network,
defined by the GRIDPOLR keyword, is an array of points
identified by  direction and distance  from a user-defined
origin.  Each  of these keywords has a series of secondary
keywords associated with it that are  used to define the
network, including any receptor elevations for elevated terrain
and flagpole receptor heights.  The GRIDCART and GRIDPOLR
keywords can be thought of as "sub-pathways," since their
secondary keywords include a STArt and an END card to define
the start and  end of inputs for a particular network.

     3.4.1.1 Cartesian Grid Receptor  Networks.

     Cartesian grid receptor networks are defined by use of the
GRIDCART keyword.  The GRIDCART keyword may be thought of as a
"sub-pathway," in that there are a series of secondary keywords
that are used  to define the start and the end of the inputs for
a particular network, and to select the options for defining
the receptor locations that make up the network.  The syntax
and type of the GRIDCART keyword are  summarized below:
      Syntax: RE GRIDCART Net id STA
                          XYINC  Xinit  Xnun Xdelta  Yim't Ynum Ydelta
                        or XPNTS  Gridxl  Gridx2 Gridx3 	  Gridxn, and
                          YPNTS  Gridyl  GridyZ Gridy3 	  Gridyn
                          ELEV  Row  Zelev!  ZelevZ Zelev3 ... Zelevn
                          FLAG  Row  Zflagl  ZflagZ Zflag3 ... Zflagn
                          END
      Type!   Optional, Repeatable
where the  parameters are defined as  follows:

                               3-39

-------
Net id
UA
XY1NC
Xinit
Xnun
Xdelta
Yinit
Ynum
Ydelta
XPNTS
Gridxl
Gridxn
YPNTS
Gridyl
Gridyn
ELEV
Row
Zelev
FLAG
Row
Zflag
END
Receptor network identification code (up to eight alphanumeric
characters)
Indicates the STArt of GRIDCART inputs for a particular network,
repeated for each new Netid
Keyword identifying uniform grid network generated from x and y
increments
Starting x-axis grid location in meters
Number of x-axis receptors
Spacing in meters between x-axis receptors
Starting y-axis grid location in meters
Number of y-axis receptors
Spacing in meters between y-axis receptors
Keyword identifying grid network defined by a series
of discrete x and y coordinates (used with YPNTS)
Value of first x- coordinate for Cartesian grid (m)
Value of 'nth1 x-coordinate for Cartesian grid (m)
Keyword identifying grid network defined by a series
of discrete x and y coordinates (used with XPNTS)
Value of first y-coordinate for Cartesian grid (m)
Value of "nth1 y-coordinate for Cartesian grid (m)
Keyword to specify that receptor elevations follow (optional)
Indicates which row (y-coordinate fixed) is being
input (Row=1 means first, i.e., southmost row)
An array of receptor terrain elevations (m) for a
particular Row (units of meters may be changed to feet by
use of CO ELEVUNIT keyword), number of entries per row equals
the number of x-coordi nates for that network
Keyword to specify that flagpole receptor heights
follow (optional)
Indicates which row (y-coordinate fixed) is being
input (Row=1 means first, i.e., southmost row)
An array of receptor heights (m) above local terrain
elevation for a particular Row (flagpole receptors), number of
entries per row equals the number of x-coordi nates for that
network
Indicates the END of GRIDCART inputs for a particular network,
repeated for each new Netid
     The ELEV and FLAG keywords are optional inputs, and are
only needed if elevated terrain or flagpole receptor heights
are to be used.  If the ELEV keyword is used and the model is
being run with the flat terrain option (see Section 3.2.6),
then the elevated terrain height inputs will be ignored by the
model, and a non-fatal warning message will be generated.  If
the elevated terrain option is selected, and no elevated
terrain heights are entered, the elevations will default to 0.0
meters, and warning messages will also be generated.  The model
handles flagpole receptor height inputs in a similar manner.

     The order of cards within the GRIDCART subpathway is not
important, as long as all inputs for a particular network are
contiguous and start with the STA secondary keyword and end
                              3-40

-------
with the END secondary keyword.  It is not even required that
all ELEV cards be contiguous, although the input file will be
more readable if a logical order is followed.  The network ID
is also not required to appear on each runstream image (except
for the STA card).  The model will assume the previous ID if
none is entered, similar to the use of continuation cards for
pathway and keywords.  Thus, the following two examples produce
the same 8X4 Cartesian grid network:
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART
RE GRIDCART










RE GRIDCART
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1
CAR1










CAR1
STA
XPNTS
YPNTS
ELEV
ELEV
ELEV
ELEV
FLAG
FLAG
FLAG
FLAG
END
STA
XPNTS
YPNTS
ELEV
FLAG
ELEV
FLAG
ELEV
FLAG
ELEV
FLAG
END


1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4




1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4

-500.
-500.
10.
20.
30.
40.
10.
20.
30.
40.


-500.
-500.
8*10
8*10
8*20
8*20
8*30
8*30
8*40
8*40

-400
-250
10.
20.
30.
40.
10.
20.
30.
40.


-400
-250
B
m
.
.
m
m
m
m



10
20
30
40
10
20
30
40













-200.
250.
. 10.
. 20.
. 30.
. 40.
. 10.
. 20.
. 30.
. 40.


-200.
250.









-100.
500.
10.
20.
30.
40.
10.
20.
30.
40.


-100.
500.









100

10.
20.
30.
40.
10.
20.
30.
40.


100












10
20
30
40
10
20
30
40


m










200. 400. 500.

. 10.
. 20.
. 30.
. 40.
. 10.
. 20.
. 30.
. 40.


200. 400. 500.










     The Row parameter on the ELEV and FLAG inputs may be
entered as either the row number, i.e., 1, 2, etc., or as the
actual y-coordinate value, e.g., -500., -250., etc. in the
example above.  The model sorts the inputs using Row as the
                              3-41

-------
index, so  the result is the same.  The above example could
therefore  be entered as follows, with the  same result:
       RE GRIDCART CAR1 STA
                 XPNTS  -500. -400.
                 YPNTS  -500. -250.
                 ELEV -500.  8*10.
                 FLAG -500.  8*10.
                 ELEV -250.  8*20.
                 FLAG -250.  8*20.
                 ELEV  250.  8*30.
                 FLAG  250.  8*30.
                 ELEV  500.  8*40.
                 FLAG  500.  8*40.
       RE GRIDCART CAR1 END
-200. -100.  100.  200.  400. 500.
 250. 500.
Of course,  one must use  either the row number or y-coordinate
value consistently within each network to have the desired
result.


     The  following simple example illustrates the use  of the
XYINC secondary keyword  to generate a uniformly spaced
Cartesian grid network.   The resulting grid is 11 x  11,  with a
uniform spacing of 1 kilometer (1000. meters), and is  centered
on the origin (0., 0.).   No elevated terrain heights or
flagpole  receptor heights are included in this example.
       RE GRIDCART CG1 STA
                 XYINC -5000. 11  1000.  -5000.  11 1000.
       RE GRIDCART CG1 END
      3.4.1.2 Polar Grid Receptor Networks.


      Polar receptor networks are defined by use of the GRIDPOLR
keyword.   The GRIDPOLR keyword may also  be thought of  as a
"sub-pathway," in that there are a series of secondary keywords
that  are  used to define the start and  the end of the inputs for
a particular network,  and to select the  options for defining
the receptor locations that make up the  network.  The  syntax
and type  of the GRIDPOLR keyword are summarized below:
                                3-42

-------
       Syntax: RE GRIDPOLR Net id STA
                           PRIG Xinit Yinit
                           D1ST Ringl Ring2  Ring3 ...  Ringn
                           DDIR Dir1  Dir2  Dir3 ... Dim,
                         or GDIR Dirnum Dirini Dirinc
                           ELEV Dir  Zelevl . ZelevZ Zelev3  ...
                           FLAG Dir  Zflagl Zflag2 Zflag3  ...
                           END
Zelevn
Zftagn
               Optional, Repeatable
where  the parameters are defined as follows:
Net id
STA
ORIG
Xinit
Yinit
DIST
Ringl
Ringn
PDIR
Dir1
Dim
GDIR
Dirnun
Dirini
Dirinc
ELEV
Dir
Zelev
FLAG
Dir
Zflag
END
Receptor network identification code (up to eight alphanumeric
characters)
Indicates STArt of GRIDPOLR inputs for a particular network,
repeat for each new Net id
Keyword to specify the origin of the polar network (optional)
x-coordinate for origin of polar network
y-coordinate for origin of polar network
Keyword to specify distances for the polar network
Distance to the first ring of polar coordinates
Distance to the 'nth1 ring of polar coordinates
Keyword to specify discrete direction radials for the
polar network
First direction radial in degrees (1 to 360)
The 'nth1 direction radial in degrees (1 to 360)
Keyword to specify generated direction radials for
the polar network
Number of directions used to define the polar system
Starting direction of the polar system
Increment (in degrees) for defining directions
Keyword to specify that receptor elevations follow (optional)
Indicates which direction is being input
An array of receptor terrain elevations for a
particular direction radial
Keyword to specify that flagpole receptor heights
follow (optional)
Indicates which direction is being input
An array of receptor heights above local terrain
elevation for a particular direction (flagpole
receptors)
Indicates END of GRIDPOLR subpathway, repeat for each
new Net id
      The ORIG secondary keyword is optional for the GRIDPOLR

inputs.   If omitted,  the model assumes  a default  origin of  (0.,

0.,)  in x,y coordinates.  The ELEV and  FLAG keywords are also

optional inputs,  and are only needed if elevated  terrain or

flagpole receptor heights are to be used.   If the ELEV keyword

is used and the model is being run with the flat  terrain option

(see  Section 3-. 2.6),  then the elevated  terrain height inputs

will  be ignored by the model,  and a non-fatal warning message
                                3-43

-------
will be generated.  If the elevated terrain option is selected,
and no elevated terrain heights are entered,  the elevations
will default to 0.0 meters, and warning messages will also be
generated.  The model handles  flagpole receptor height inputs
in a similar manner.

     As with the GRIDCART keyword  described above, the order of
cards within the GRIDPOLR subpathway  is not important, as long
as all inputs for a particular network are contiguous and start
with the STA secondary keyword and end with the END secondary
keyword.  It is not even required  that all ELEV cards be
contiguous, although the input file will  be more readable if a
logical order is followed.  The network ID is also not required
to appear on each runstream image  (except for the STA card).
The model will assume the previous ID if  none is entered,
similar to the use of continuation cards  for pathway and
keywords.

     The following example of  the  GRIDPOLR keyword generates a
receptor network consisting of 180 receptor points on five
concentric distance rings centered on an  assumed default origin
of  (O.,0.).  The receptor locations are placed along 36
direction radials, beginning with  10. degrees and incrementing
by 10. degrees in a clockwise  fashion.
       RE GRIDPOLR POL1 STA
                 DIST  100. 300.  500. 1000.  2000.
                 GDIS  36  10.  10.
       RE GRIDPOLR POL1 END
     Another  example is provided illustrating the use of a
non-zero  origin,  discrete direction radials and the
specification of  elevated terrain and flagpole receptor
heights.
                              3-44

-------
      RE GRIDPOLR POL1 STA
                 ORIG 500.  500.
                 DIST 100.  300. 500. 1000. 2000.
                 DDIR 90.  180. 270. 360.
                 ELEV 90. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
                 ELEV 180. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
                 ELEV 270. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
                 ELEV 360. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
                 FLAG 90. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
                 FLAG 180. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
                 FLAG 270. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
                 FLAG 360. 5. 10. 15. 20. 25.
      RE GRIDPOLR POL1 END
As with the  GRIDCART keyword described above, the user  has the
option of  specifying the radial number (e.g. 1, 2, 3, etc.)  on
the ELEV and FLAG inputs, or the  actual direction associated
with each  radial.
     For purposes of model calculations,  all receptor
locations, including those specified as polar, are stored in
the model  arrays as x, y and z coordinates and flagpole
heights.   For the purposes of reporting the results by  receptor
in the main  print file, the tables  are labeled with the polar
inputs, i.e.,  directions and distances.

3.4.2 Using  Multiple Receptor Networks

     For some modeling applications,  the user may need  a fairly
coarsely spaced network covering  a  large area to identify the
area of significant impacts for a plant,  and a denser network
covering a smaller area to identify the maximum impacts.   To
accommodate  this modeling need, the ISC2 models allow the user
to specify multiple receptor networks in a single model run.
The user can define either Cartesian grid networks or polar
networks,  or both.  With the use  of the ORIG option in  the
GRIDPOLR keyword, the user can easily place a receptor  network
centered on  the facility being permitted, and als,o place a
network centered on another background source known to  be a
significant  contributor to high concentrations.  Alternatively,
the polar  network may be centered on a receptor location of
special concern, such as a nearby Class I area.
                               3-45

-------
     As noted in the introduction to this section (3.4), the
model initially allows up to 5 receptor networks in a single
run.  This limit can be changed by modifying the Fortran
PARAMETER statement and recompiling the model.  The variables
that define each array, e.g., the distances and directions for
a polar network, are stored in arrays, so that results can be
presented for each network separately in the main output file
of the model.  Thus, increasing the number of networks allowed
will increase the amount of memory needed to run the model,
although the increase is relatively small.  There are also
limits on the number of distances or directions (or the number
of x-points and the number of y-points for Cartesian grids)
that can be specified for each network.  These are initially
set to 50 distances or x-points and 50 directions or y-points.
These limits are also controlled by Fortran PARAMETER
statements, and may be modified.  More information on
controlling the storage limits of the models is provided in
Section 4.2.2 of this volume and in Volume III.

3.4.3 Specifying Discrete Receptor Locations

     In addition to the receptor networks defined by the
GRIDCART and GRIDPOLR keywords described above, the user may
also specify discrete receptor points for modeling impacts at
specific locations of interest.  This may be used to model
critical receptors, such as the locations of schools or houses,
nearby Class I areas, or locations identified as having high
concentrations by previous modeling analyses.  The discrete
receptors may be input as either Cartesian x,y points  (DISCCART
keyword) or as polar distance and direction coordinates
(DISCPOLR keyword).  Both types of receptors may be identified
in a single run.  In addition, for discrete polar receptor
points the user specifies the source whose location is used as
the origin for the receptor.
                              3-46

-------
     In the previous ISC models, discrete receptors  were also
used to identify receptors located along the plant boundary.  In
the new versions of the models, a special option  has been
added, controlled by the BOUNDARY keyword, which  simplifies the
input of plant boundary distances in a polar framework.   This
option is described in Section 3.4.4 below.

     3.4.3.1 Discrete Cartesian Receptors.

     Discrete Cartesian receptors are defined by  use of  the
DISCCART keyword.  The syntax and type of this keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: RE DISCCART Xcoord  Ycoord  (Zelev) (Zflag)
      Type:   Optional, Repeat able
where the Xcoord and Ycoord parameters are the  x-coordinate and
y-coordinate  (m), respectively, for the receptor  location.   The
Zelev parameter is an optional terrain elevation  (m)  for the
receptor for use in elevated terrain modeling.  The  Zflag
parameter is the optional receptor height above ground (m)  for
modeling flagpole receptors.  All of the parameters  are in
units of meters, except for Zelev, which defaults to meters but
may be specified in feet by use of the CO ELEVUNIT keyword.

     If neither the elevated terrain option  (Section 3.2.6) nor
the flagpole receptor height option  (Section  3.2.7)  are used,
then the optional parameters are ignored if present.   If only
the elevated terrain height option is used  (no  flagpoles),  then
the third parameter (the field after the Ycoord)  is  read as the
Zelev parameter.  If only the flagpole receptor height option
is used (no elevated terrain), then the third parameter is  read
as the Zflag parameter.  If both options are  used, then the
parameters are read in the order indicated for  the syntax
above.  If the optional parameters are left blank, then default
values will be used.  The default value for Zelev is 0.0, and
                              3-47

-------
the default value for Zflag is defined by the CO  FLAGPOLE card
(see Section 3.2.7).  Note:  If both the elevated terrain and
flagpole receptor height options are used, then the  third
parameter will always be used as Zelev, and  it is not  possible
to use a default value for Zelev while entering a specific
value for the Zflag parameter.

     3.4.3.2 Discrete Polar Receptors.

     Discrete polar receptors are defined by use  of  the
DISCPOLR keyword.  The syntax and type of this keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: RE DISCPOLR Srcid Dist  Direct  (Zelev) (Zflag)
      Type:   Optional, Repeatable
where the Srcid is the alphanumeric source  identification for
one of the sources defined on the SO pathway  which will be used
to define the origin for the polar receptor location.   The Dist
and Direct parameters are the distance  in meters  and direction
in degrees for the discrete receptor location.  Degrees are
measured clockwise from north.  The Zelev parameter is an
optional terrain elevation for the receptor for use in elevated
terrain modeling.  The units of Zelev are in  meters, unless
specified as feet by the CO ELEVUNIT keyword.  The Zflag
parameter is the optional receptor height above ground (meters)
for modeling flagpole receptors.

     If neither the elevated terrain option (Section 3.2.6) nor
the flagpole receptor height option  (Section  3.2.7)  are used,
then the optional parameters are ignored if present.  If only
the elevated terrain height option is used  (no flagpoles), then
the third parameter  (the field after the Ycoord)  is read as the
Zelev parameter.  If only the flagpole  receptor height option
is used  (no elevated terrain), then the third parameter is read
as the Zflag parameter.  If both options are  used, then the
                              3-48

-------
parameters are read in the order indicated for the  syntax
above.  If the optional parameters are left blank,  then default
values will be used.  The default value for Zelev is  0.0,  and
the default value for Zflag is defined by the CO FLAGPOLE card
(see Section 3.2.7).  Note;  If both the elevated terrain and
flagpole receptor height options are used, then fourth
parameter will always be used as Zelev, and it is not possible
to use a default value for Zelev while entering a specific
value for the Zflag parameter.

3.4.4 Specifying Plant Boundary Distances

     The ISC2 models include a special option to simplify the
input of discrete receptor locations for plant boundary
distances.  This option is controlled by the BOUNDARY keyword.
The syntax and type of this keyword are summarized  below:
      Syntax: *E BOUNDARY srcid oistci),i=i,36
      Type!   Optional, Repeat able
where the Srcid is the alphanumeric source  identification for
one of the sources defined on the SO pathway for which  the
boundary distances are to be defined.  The  location  of  the
source will serve as the origin for 36 discrete polar receptors
located at every 10 degrees around the source.  The  Dist array
includes the distances (in meters) for each of the directions,
beginning with  the 10 degree radial and  incrementing every 10
degrees clockwise.  While the BOUNDARY keyword generates 36
discrete polar receptors, the results for these receptors are
summarized separately from receptors defined by the  DISCPOLR
keyword in the main output file.  The RE  BOUNDARY card  may be
repeated for-the source as many times as  needed to input the 36
distances.

     A related keyword, BOUNDELV, is used to define  terrain
elevations for the receptor locations identified with the
                              3-49

-------
BOUNDARY keyword.  The BOUNDELV keyword defines the terrain
elevations in meters (or feet if the CO ELEVUNIT FEET  card
appears) for each of the 36 boundary receptor points.  The
syntax and type for this keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: RE BOUMDELV srcid zeievc0,1=1.36
      Types   Optional, Repeat able
     The purpose of the BOUNDARY and BOUNDELV keywords  is  to
provide a short-cut for inputting the discrete polar  receptors
for the plant boundary.  There is no corresponding keyword for
inputting boundary receptor flagpole heights.  The easiest way
to input boundary receptors with flagpole receptor heights is
to define them as discrete polar receptors using the  DISCPOLR
keyword.  This method provides better assurance that  the
flagpole heights are associated with the correct receptor,  and
makes it easier to check and debug the input file.  For
applications where a uniform flagpole receptor height is used
for all receptors, which can be specified as a parameter on the
CO FLAGPOLE input card, those flagpole receptor heights will
also apply to any boundary receptors identified through the
BOUNDARY keyword.

3.5 METEOROLOGY PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS

     The MEeteorology pathway contains keywords that  define the
input meteorological data for a particular model run.   Because
of differences in the meteorological data needs for the Short
Term and Long Term models, some of the ME pathway inputs are
different between the two models.  These differences  are
highlighted in the discussions below.  An effort has  been  made
to keep the inputs as similar as possible.
                              3-50

-------
3.5.1 Specifying the Input Data File and Format

     The input meteorological data filename and  format are
identified by the INPUTFIL keyword on the ME pathway.   The
syntax of this keyword is very similar between the  Short Term
and Long Term models, but there are some differences due to the
different formats of data available for the two  types  of
models.  Therefore the Short Term and Long Term  model  inputs
are described separately.
     3.5.1.1 Short Term Model Options.

     The ISC2 Short Term model uses hourly meteorological data
as one of the basic model inputs.  The user has  several  options
for specifying the format of the meteorological  data  using the
INPUTFIL keyword.  The syntax and type of this keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: HE INPUTFIL Metfii  (Format)
      Type;   Mandatory, Non-repeatable
where the Metfii parameter is a character  field  of  up  to 40
characters that identifies the filename for the  meteorological
data file.  For running the model on an IBM-compatible PC,  the
Metfii parameter may include the complete  DOS pathname for  the
file, or will assume the current directory if only  the filename
is given.  The optional Format parameter specifies  the format
of the meteorological data file.  The user has the  following
five options for specifying the Format:

     1)  Use the default ASCII format for  a sequential hourly .
         file (if Format is left blank);
     2)  Specify the Fortran READ format for an  ASCII
         sequential hourly file;
                              3-51

-------
     3)  Use free-formatted READs for an ASCII sequential
         hourly file, by inputting the secondary keyword of
         FREE;
     4)  Use unformatted file generated by the RAMMET or MPRM
         preprocessors, by inputting the secondary keyword of
         UNFORM; or
     5)  Use "card image" data using a default ASCII format by
         specifying the secondary keyword of CARD - this option
         differs from option 1) by the addition of hourly wind
         profile exponents and hourly vertical potential
         temperature gradients in the input file.

     The first record of the meteorological data input file
contains the station number and year for both the surface
station and the upper air (mixing height) station.  For the
formatted ASCII files, these four integer variables are read
using a free-format READ, i.e., the variables must be separated
by either a comma or by one or more blank spaces.  For the
UNFORMatted files, the four variables are read as integers
without any format specification.  The order of these variables
is as follows:

     Surface Station Number, e.g., WBAN Number for NWS Stations
     Year for Surface Data (2 or 4 digits)
     Upper Air Station Number  (for Mixing Height Data)
     Year for Upper Air Data (2 or 4 digits)

The model checks these variables against the values input by
the user on the ME SURFDATA and ME UAIRDATA cards (see Section
3.5.3 below).

     The rest of the records in the file include the sequential
meteorological data.  The order of the meteorological variables
for the formatted ASCII files and the default ASCII format are
as follows:
                              3-52

-------
Variable
Year (last 2 digits)
Month
Day
Hour
Flow Vector (deg.)
Wind Speed (m/s)
Ambient Temperature (K)
Stability Class
(A=l, B=2, ... F=6)
Rural Mixing Height (m)
Urban Mixing Height (m)
Wind Profile Exponent
(CARD only)
Vertical Potential
Temperature Gradient (K/m)
(CARD only)
Fortran Format
12
12
12
12
F9.4
F9.4
F6.1
12
F7.1
F7.1
F8.4
F8.4
Columns
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-17
18-26
27-32
33-34
35-41
42-48
49-56
57-65
Thus the following two cards would have the  same effect, one
using the default read format (Format parameter left blank) and
the other explicitly providing the ASCII read format described
above:
      ME INPUTFIL C:\DATA\METDATA.INP
      ME INPUTFIL C:\DATA\METDATA.INP (4I2,2F9.4,F6.1,I2,2F7.1)
The user-specified ASCII format is input as  a  character field
of up to 60 characters,  and may be used to specify the READ
format for files  that differ from the default  format.  The
variables are  identified in the READ format  in the order given
above, but by  using the Fortran tab edit descriptor (Tx), the
order of variables within the file may be different.   A utility
program, BINTOASC,  is available for converting unformatted
RAMMET meteorological files to the default ASCII format.  This
utility program is described in Appendix C.
                               3-53

-------
     For FREJE-formatted reads, the model uses a Fortran
free-format READ statement, meaning that the variables in  the
meteorological data file must be in the order listed  above,  and
must be separated from each other by a comma or at  least one
blank.  The format does not need to be the same on  each record
as long as the variables are appropriately delimited.

     The UNFORM secondary keyword indicates to the  model that
the meteorological data are in an unformatted  (sometimes called
a "binary") file that was generated by the RAMMET or  the MPRM
preprocessor.  The preprocessed data files consist  of
unformatted records that include 24 hours of meteorology per
record.  The variables are read from the unformatted  records in
the following order:
     Year
     Month
     Julian Day  (1-366)
     Stability Class  (hours 1 to 24)
     Wind Speed, m/s  (hours 1 to 24)
     Ambient Temperature, K (hours  1 to  24)
     Flow Vector, deg.  (hours 1 to  24)
     Randomized  Flow  Vector, deg.  (hours 1 to  24)
     Mixing Heights,  m  (hr 1 rural, hr 1 urban,  ...  to hr 24)

The following example illustrates the use of the unformatted
file option:
      ME INPUTFIL C:\BIN\PREPIT.BIN  UNFORM
where the Metfil parameter has been  used  to identify a complete
DOS pathname.

     The ASCII file  input options  on the  INPUTFIL card allow
the user to read the "card image"  meteorological data that may
have been included in the input  option file from applications
of the previous ISCST model.  This includes the option for
inputting hourly wind profile exponents and vertical potential
                              3-54

-------
temperature gradients through use of the CARD format  option.
However, the hourly decay coefficients that were allowed as
part of the card image input in the original ISCST model are
not supported in the ISCST2 model.  If the CARD format  is not
used, then the default values of wind profile exponents and
vertical potential temperature gradients are used unless the
user specifies non-rdefault inputs using the ME WINDPROF or ME
DTHETADZ keyword options.

     3.5.1.2 Long Term Model Options.

     The ISC2 Long Term model uses joint frequency
distributions of wind speed and wind direction by stability
category as the main meteorological input.  These are sometimes
called STAR summaries for STability ARray.  The input of other
meteorological variables to the Long Term model, such as
average temperatures and average mixing heights, are  controlled
by separate ME pathway keywords described later in this
section.

     Unlike the previous version of ISCLT, which included the
STAR data in the input option file, the ISCLT2 model  reads the
STAR meteorological data from a separate data file.   The
meteorological data filename and format are defined by  the
INPUTFIL keyword, which has the following syntax and  type:
      Syntax: ME INPUTFIL Metm  (Format)
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the Metfil parameter is a character  field  of  up  to 40
characters that identifies the filename for the  meteorological
data file.  For running the model on an IBM-compatible PC, the
Metfil parameter may include the complete  DOS pathname for the
file, or will assume the current directory if only  the filename
is given.  The optional FORMAT parameter specifies  the format
                              3-55

-------
of the meteorological data file.  The user has the following
three options for specifying the Format:

     1)  Use the default ASCII format for the STAR file (if
         Format is left blank);
     2)  Specify the Fortran READ format for the ASCII STAR
         file; or
     3)  Use free-formatted READs for the ASCII STAR file, by
         inputting the secondary keyword of FREE.

     The default ASCII format corresponds to the format of the
data files generated by EPA's STAR utility program for the
ISCLT model, and also the default format used by the previous
version of ISCLT.  Each record of STAR meteorological data
consists of six values (default format of 6F10.0) corresponding
to the six wind speed classes for a particular wind direction
and stability category.  The program reads stability category A
first, and the first record contains the six values for the
north wind direction.  There are 16 cards for each stability
category corresponding to the 16 wind direction categories
entered clockwise from north  (north, north-northeast, etc.).
This pattern is repeated for each of the six stability
categories, A through F.

     The frequency data may be input as normalized frequencies,
in which case the total of all frequencies for a particular
STAR summary will add up to 1.0, or as the number of
occurrences for each combination.  If the total of normalized
frequencies is not within 2 percent of 1.0, then the model will
generate a non-fatal warning message.  If the total adds up to
2.0 or more and is a whole number, then the model divides the
number of occurrences for each STAR category by the total
number to obtain the normalized frequency.

     Without the optional STARDATA keyword (described in
Section 3.5.4), it is assumed that the STAR summaries in the
                              3-56

-------
input file corresponds to the averaging periods  selected on the
CO AVERTIME card (see Section 3.2.3.1).  If SEASON  averages are
selected, then the model will assume that the meteorological
data file consists of four seasons in the order  of  WINTER.
SPRING.  SUMMER, and FALL.  If an ANNUAL average  is  to  be
calculated from an annual STAR summary, then the annual  STAR
should follow any seasonal STAR summaries to be  used.  For
example, the following runstream image calculates averages  for
each of the four seasons and the annual average  from a data
file consisting of five STAR summaries (winter,  spring,  summer,
fall, and annual):
      CO AVERTIME SEASON ANNUAL
The following example calculates averages  for the  four  seasons,
and then calculates an annual average as a period  average for
the four seasons combined:
      CO AVERTIME SEASON PERIOD
and the input meteorological file for this example would
include only the four seasonal STAR summaries.

3.5.2 Specification of Anemometer Height

     An important input for both the Short Term  and  the Long
Term models is the specification of the anemometer height,
i.e., the height above ground at which the wind  speed  data  were
collected.  Since the models adjust the input wind speeds from
the anemometer height to the release height  (see Section 1.1.3
of Volume II), the accurate specification of anemometer height
is important to obtaining the correct model results.   The
syntax and type of the ANEMHGHT keyword are summarized below:
                              3-57

-------
      Syntax: ME ANEMHGHT zref
              Mandatory, Non-repeatable
where the parameter Zref is the height of the  anemometer
measurement above ground,  and the optional parameter Zrunit is
used to specify  the units of Zref.  Valid inputs for Zrunit are
the secondary  keywords METERS or FEET.  The  default units for
Zref are in meters if Zrunit is left blank.

3.5.3 Specifying Station Information

     Two keywords are used to specify information about the
meteorological stations, SURFDATA for the surface
meteorological station, and UAIRDATA for the upper air station
used in the determination of mixing heights.   The syntax and
type of these  keywords are summarized below:
      Syntax: ME SURFDATA Stanum Year (Name) (Xcoord) (Ycoord)
      Syntax: ME UAIRDATA Stanum Year (Name) (Xcoord) (Ycoord)
      Type:   Mandatory, Non-repeatable
where Stanum is the station number, e.g. the  5-digit WBAN
number for  NWS stations, Year is the year  of  data being
processed  (either 2 or 4 digits), Name  is  an  optional character
field  (up to 40 characters with no blanks)  specifying the name
of the station, and Xcoord and Ycoord are  optional parameters
for specifying the x and y coordinates  for the location of the
stations.   At the present time, the station locations are not
utilized in the models.  Therefore, no  units  are specified for
Xcoord and  Ycoord at this time, although meters are suggested
in order to be consistent with the source  and receptor
coordinates.
                               3-58

-------
3.5.4 Specifying the  Meteorological STAR Data  (Applies  Only to
     ISCLT2)

     The STARDATA keyword is used to define what STAR
meteorological data summaries are actually included  in  the data
file.  The syntax and type of this keyword is  summarized below:
      Syntax: ME STARDATA JANFEBMARAPRMAYJUNJULAUG SEP OCT. NOV DEC
                      WINTER SPRING SUMMER FALL
                      QUART1 QUART2 QUART3 QUART4
                      MONTH  SEASON QUARTR ANNUAL
                      PERIOD
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatable
     This keyword works is conjunction with the CO AVERTIME
keyword  (Section 3.2.3)  to determine which STAR summaries are
processed for a particular run.   If the STARDATA keyword is
omitted, then the model assumes  that the meteorological  data
file consists only  of  the STAR summaries identified on the CO
AVERTIME keyword.   While the STARDATA keyword is identified as
being optional, it  is  required in the case where the  CO
AVERTIME card specifies only the PERIOD average to be
calculated.  In this case, the model needs the STARDATA  input
in order to determine  what STAR  summaries are included in the
data file to properly  calculate  the PERIOD average.   A fatal
error message will  be  generated  (and processing aborted)  if the
STARDATA card is omitted for cases with only PERIOD averages
being calculated.

     The STARDATA keyword allows the user considerable
flexibility in controlling which averaging periods to calculate
from one run to another.  As an  example, suppose that the user
has a STAR data file consisting  of 12 monthly STAR summaries.
                               3-59

-------
This would be identified to the model  by including  the
following card on the ME pathway:
       ME STARDATA MONTH
The user  could then generate annual average results  by
specifying only PERIOD  on the CO AVERTIME card.  The emission
rate factor may be varied by month in  the process.   With the
same meteorological data file, the user could also calculate
results for the first quarter only by  changing the AVERTIME
card to read:
       CO AVERTIME JAN FEB MAR  PERIOD
This would result  in  results being produced for  each of the
first  three months of the year and for the combined period of
JAN-MAR.   Each quarter could be calculated in turn simply by
changing  the AVERTIME card as follows:
       CO AVERTIME APR MAY  JUN  PERIOD  (for Quarter 2)
       CO AVERTIME JUL AUG  SEP  PERIOD  (for Quarter 3)
       CO AVERTIME OCT NOV  DEC  PERIOD  (for Quarter 4)
      By specifying MONTH on the ME  STARDATA card,  the model
will  be able to retrieve the correct STAR summary  for each of
these cases.  The only requirement  is that STAR  summaries
always be included in the following order within the
meteorological data  file:
       JAN, FEB, MAR, ..., DEC, WINTER (or QUART1), SPRING (or QUARTZ),
       SUMMER (or QUART3), FALL (or QUARK), and ANNUAL
                                3-60

-------
Any number of STAR summaries may  be  included,  up to a maximum
of 17 (for 12 months, plus  4 seasons or quarters,  plus 1
annual.

3.5.5 Specifying a Data Period  to Process  (Applies Only to
     ISCST21

     There are two keywords that  allow the user to specify
particular days or ranges of days to process from the
sequential meteorological file  input for the ISCST2 model.  The
STARTEND keyword controls which period within the
meteorological data file is read  by  the model,  while the
DAYRANGE keyword controls which days or ranges of days (of
those that are read) for the model to process.   The default for
the model is to read the entire meteorological data file  (up to
a full year) and to process all days within that period.

     The syntax and type for the  STARTEND  keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: ME STARTEND Strtyr Strtmn Strtdy (Strthr) Endyr Endmn Enddy (Endhr)
              Optional, Non-repeatable
where the Strtyr Strtmn Strtdy parameters  specify the year,
month and day of the first record  to  be  read (e.g.,  87 01 31
for January 31, 1987), and the parameters  Endyr Endmn Enddy
specify the year, month and day  of the last record to be read.
The Strthr and Endhr are optional  parameters that may be used
to specify the start and end hours for the data period to be
read.  If either Strthr or Endhr is to be  specified, then both
must be specified.  Any records  in the data file that occur
before the start date are ignored,  as are  any records in the
data file that occur after the end date.   In fact, once the end
date has been reached, the model does not  read any more data
from the meteorological file.  If  Strthr and Endhr are not
specified, then processing begins  with hour l of the start
                              3-61

-------
date, and ends with hour  24  of the end date, unless specific
days are selected by the  DAYRANGE card described below.

     Any PERIOD averages  calculated by the model will apply
only to the period of  data actually processed.  Therefore, if
someone wanted to calculate  a six-month average, they could
select PERIOD averages on the CO AVERTIME card, and then
specify the period as  follows:
      ME STARTEND 87 01 01 87 06 30
for the period January 1,  1987 through June 30, 1987.

     The syntax  and  type for the DAYRANGE keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: ME DAYRANGE Range 1 RangeZ Range3 ... Rangen
      Type:   Optional, Repeatable
where the Range parameters specify particular days or ranges of
days to process.   The days may be specified as individual  days
(e.g. 12 3  4  5)  or as a range of days (e.g. 1-5).  The  user
also has the option of specifying Julian day numbers, from 1 to
365  (366 for leap years),  or specifying month and day  (e.g.,
1/31 for January  31).  Any combination of these may also be
used.  For example the following card will tell the model  to
process the  days  from January 1 (Julian day 1) through January
31  (1/31):
       ME DAYRANGE  1-1/31
The DAYRANGE  keyword is also repeatable, so that as many cards
as needed may be included in the ME pathway.
                               3-62

-------
     As with the STARTEND keyword,  any PERIOD averages
calculated by the model will apply  only  to  the period of data
actually processed.  If the STARTEND keyword is also used, then
only those days selected on the DAYRANGE cards that fall within
the period from the start date to the end date will be
processed.  Thus, if the ME pathway included the following two
cards:
      ME STARTEND 87 02 01 87 12 31
      ME DAYRANGE 1-31
then no data would be processed,  since the  days 1 through 31
fall outside the period 2/1 to  12/31.

3.5.6 Correcting Wind Direction Alignment Problems

     The WDROTATE keyword allows  the user to  correct the input
meteorological data for wind direction alignment problems.   All
input wind directions or flow vectors are rotated by a
user-specified amount.  Since the model  results at particular
receptor locations are often quite  sensitive  to the transport
wind direction, this optional keyword should  be used only with
extreme caution and with clear  justification.

     The syntax and type of this  keyword are  summarized below:
      Syntax: ME WDROTATE Rotang
              Optional, Non-repeat able
where the Rotang parameter specifies  the  angle in degrees to
rotate the input wind direction measurements.   The value of
Rotang is subtracted from the wind direction measurements.  It
may be used to correct for known  (and documented)  calibration
errors, or to adjust for the alignment of a valley if the
meteorological station is located in  a valley  with a different

                              3-63

-------
alignment than the source location.  Since the Short Term
models use the flow vector  (direction toward which the wind is
blowing) as the basic input, the WDROTATE keyword may also  be
used to convert input data as wind direction  (from which the
wind is blowing) to flow vector by setting the parameter Rotang
= 180.

3.5.7 Specifying Wind Speed Categories

     Some of the parameters that may be input to the models are
allowed to vary by wind speed category.  Examples of such
inputs are user-specified wind speed profile exponents,
vertical potential temperature gradients, and variable emission
rate factors.  The models use six wind speed categories,  and
these are defined by the upper bound wind speed for the  first
five categories  (the sixth category is assumed to have no upper
bound).  The default values for the wind speed categories are
as follows:  1.54, 3.09, 5.14, 8.23, and 10.8 m/s.  The  syntax
and type of the WINDCATS keyword, which may be used to specify
different category boundaries, are summarized below:
      Syntax: ME WINDCATS usi usz us3 ws4 us5
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the Wsl through Ws5 parameters  are  the  upper bound wind
speeds of the first through fifth categories  in  meters per
second.  The upper bound values  are inclusive,  i.e.,  a wind
speed equal to the value of Wsl  will  be placed  in the first
wind speed category.

3.5.8 Specifying Wind Profile  Exponents

     While the model uses default wind profile  exponents if the
regulatory default option is selected (see the  CO MODELOPT
description in Section  3.2.2), for non-regulatory default
applications the user can specify wind profile  exponents
                              3-64

-------
through use  of the WINDPROF keyword on  the ME pathway.  The
syntax and type of this keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: ME WINDPROF  Stab Prof! Prof2 Prof3 Prof4 ProfS Prof6
              Optional, Repeat able
where the  Stab parameter specifies the  stability category for
the following six values, and Profl through Prof6 are the wind
profile exponents for each of the six wind speed categories.
The Stab parameter may be input either  alphabetically (A
through F)  or numerically (1 for A through 6 for F).   The
WINDPROF cards do not need to be input  in  any particular order.

     The wind speed categories are either  the default
categories used by the model (with upper bound speeds of 1.54,
3.09, 5.14,  8.23, and 10.8 m/s for the  first five categories -
the sixth  category is assumed to have no upper bound), or the
categories specified by the user on the optional ME WINDCATS
keyword (Section 3.5.6).

     The following example will input the  default exponents for
the rural  mode,  and illustrates the use of a repeat value for
applying the exponents to all six wind  speed categories:
      ME UINOPROF A 6*0.07
      HE UINOPROF B 6*0.07
      HE WINDPROF C 6*0.10
      HE UINOPROF D 6*0.15
      ME UINOPROF E 6*0.35
      HE UINDPROF F 6*0.55
If the regulatory default option has been selected, then any
inputs on the  WINDPROF keyword are  ignored by the model, and a
non-fatal warning message is generated.
                               3-65

-------
3.5.9 Specifying Vertical Temperature Gradients

     While the model uses default vertical  potential
temperature gradients if the regulatory  default option is
selected (see the CO MODELOPT description in Section 3.2.2),
for non-regulatory default applications  the user can specify
vertical potential temperature gradients through use of the
DTHETADZ keyword on the ME pathway.  The syntax and type of
this keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: ME DTHETADZ stab  otdzi Dtdz2 otdz3 Dtdz4 otdzs Dtdz6
              Optional, Repeatable
where the Stab parameter specifies  the  stability category for
the following six values, and Dtdzl through Dtdz6 are the
vertical potential temperature gradients  for each of the six
wind speed categories.  The  Stab  parameter may be input either
alphabetically (A through F) or numerically (1 for A through 6
for F).  The DTHETADZ cards  do not  need to be input in any
particular order.

     The wind speed categories are  either the default
categories used by the model (with  upper  bound speeds of 1.54,
3.09, 5.14, 8.23, and 10.8 m/s for  the  first five categories -
the sixth category is assumed to  have no  upper bound), or the
categories specified by the  user  on the optional ME WINDCATS
keyword  (Section 3.5.6).
                              3-66

-------
     The following example will input the  default values of
DTDZ, and illustrates the use of a repeat  value for applying
the inputs to  all six wind speed categories:
      ME DTHETADZ A 6*0.00
      ME DTHETADZ B 6*0.00
      ME DTHETADZ C 6*0.00
      ME DTHETADZ D 6*0.00
      ME DTHETADZ E 6*0.020
      HE DTHETADZ F 6*0.035
If the regulatory default option has been  selected,  then any
inputs on the  DTHETADZ keyword are ignored by the model, and a
non-fatal warning message is generated.

3.5.10 Specifying Average Wind Speeds for  the Long Term Model

     The ISC2  Long Term model uses joint frequencies of wind
speed class by wind direction sector by stability category as
the basic meteorological input to the model.   These STAR
summaries  (for STability ARray) are described in more detail in
Section 3.5.1.2.   The optional AVESPEED keyword on the ME
pathway allows the user to specify the median wind speed for
each of the wind  speed categories in the STAR summary.  The
syntax and type of this keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: ME AVESPEED usi  ws2  us3  us4 us5 us6
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeat able
where the Wsl  through Ws6 parameters are  the median wind speeds
(m/s) for each of the six wind speed categories.   The default
values used  by the model in the absence of  the AVESPEED keyword
are as follows:   1.50, 2.50, 4.30, 6.80,  9.50,  and 12.50 m/s.
                               3-67

-------
3.5.11 Specifying Average Temperatures  for the Long Term Model

     Since  temperature data are not  included in the basic  STAR
meteorological data file used for  input to the ISC2 Long Term
model, the  user must specify average values of ambient
temperature for the model to use.  The  syntax and type of  the
AVETEMPS keyword are summarized below:
      Syntax: ME AVETEMPS Aveper  Ta1 Ta2 Ta3 TaA TaS Ta6
      Type:   Mandatory, Repeatable
where the Aveper parameter specifies  the averaging period (i.e.
season)  for  the following inputs,  and may be one of the
following secondary keywords:  WINTER,  SPRING.  SUMMER, or FALL.
The Tal  through Ta6 parameters are the average ambient
temperatures (K) for each of the  six  stability categories,  A
through  F.   The AVETEMPS keyword  may  be repeated for each of
the averaging periods being processed.   The following example
illustrates  the use of the AVETEMPS keyword for the four
seasons:
       ME AVETEMPS  WINTER  3*280.0 275.0  2*270.0
       ME AVETEMPS  SPRING  3*285.0 280.0  2*275.0
       ME AVETEMPS  SUMMER  6*293.0
       ME AVETEMPS  FALL  280. 280. 275. 270. 265. 265.
where  repeat values have been used for the unstable and  stable
classes  for winter and spring, and for all classes for summer.

3.5.12 Specifying Average Mixing  Heights for the Long Term
     Model

     Since mixing height data are not included in the basic
STAR meteorological data file used for input to the ISC2 Long
Term model, the user must specify average values of mixing
                               3-68

-------
height for  the model to use.  The syntax and type of  the
AVEMIXHT keyword are summarized  below:
      Syntax: ME AVEMIXHT  Aveper Stab Mixhtl MixhtZ Hixht3 Mixht4 HixhtS Mfxht6
      Type!   Mandatory, Repeat able
where the Aveper parameter specifies the averaging period (i.e.
season)  for  the following inputs,  and may be one of  the
following secondary keywords:  WINTER.  SPRING. SUMMER,  or FALL.
The Stab parameter specifies the  stability category  (A through
F or 1 through 6).  The Mixhtl through Mixhte parameters are
the average  mixing heights (m) for each of the six wind speed
categories.   The AVEMIXHT keyword may be repeated for  each
stability category and for each of the averaging periods being
processed.   The following example illustrates the use  of the
AVEMIXHT keyword for one season:
      ME AVEMIXNT  WINTER  A  6*2250.0
      ME AVEMIXNT  WINTER  8  6*2000.0
      ME AVEMIXHT  WINTER  C  6*1500.0
      ME AVEMIXHT  WINTER  D  6*1000.0
      ME AVEMIXHT  WINTER  E  6*500.0
      ME AVEMIXHT  WINTER  F  6*300.0
where repeat values have been used to apply the mixing heights
to each  of  the wind speed categories.

3.6 EVENT PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS (APPLIES ONLY TO  ISCEV2)

     The ISCEV2 (EVENT) model is  specifically designed to
facilitate  analysis of source contributions to specific events
for short term averages (less than or equal to 24 hours). These
events may  be design concentrations generated by the ISCST2
model, occurrences of violations  of an air quality standard,  or
user-specified events.  These events are input to  the ISCEV2
model through the EVent pathway.   Each event is defined by an
averaging period and specific data period, a source group, and

                               3-69

-------
a receptor location.   Since the locations are only  of interest
in combination with particular averaging and data periods,  the
REceptor pathway  is not used by the EVENT model.


     There are two  keywords that are used to define the events

on the EV pathway.  The EVENTPER keyword defines the averaging
period, data period and source group, while the EVENTLOC
keyword defines the receptor location for the event.  Each
event is also given an alphanumeric name that links the two
input cards for that  event.


     The syntax and type of the EVENTPER and EVENTLOC keywords
are summarized below:
      Syntax: EV EVENTPER Evname Aveper Grpid Date
      Syntax: EV EVENTLOC Evname  XR= Xr  YR= Yr (Zelev)  (Zflag)
                    or Evname RNGf Rng DIR= Dir (Zelev)  (Zflag)
      Type:   Mandatory, Repeatable
where the parameters are as follows:
     Evname  -  event name (an alphanumeric string  of up to 8
               characters),

     Aveper  -  averaging period for the event  (e.g.  1,  3_, I/ 24
               hr)

     Grpid   -  source group ID for the event  (must be defined on
               SO pathway),

     Date    -  date for the event, input as an eight digit
               integer for the ending hour of  the  data period
               (YYMMDDHH),  e.g. 84030324 defines a data period
               ending at hour 24 on March 3,  1984.   The length
               of the period corresponds to Aveper.

     XR=     -  X-coordinate (m) for the event  location,
               referenced to a Cartesian coordinate system

     YR=     -  Y-coordinate (m) for the event  location,
               referenced to a Cartesian coordinate system
                               3-70

-------
     RNG=   - distance range (m) for the event location,
              referenced to a polar coordinate system with an
              origin of (0., 0.)
     DIR=   - radial direction (deg.) for the event location,
              referenced to a polar coordinate system with an
              origin of (0., 0.)
     Zelev  - optional terrain elevation for the event location
              (m)
     Zflag  - optional receptor height above ground (flagpole
              receptor) for the event location (m)

Each event is defined by the two input cards EVENTPER and
EVENTLOC, and these inputs are linked by the event name, which
must be unique among the events being processed in a given run.
There is no particular requirement for the order of cards on
the EV pathway.  Note that the location for the event may be
specified by either Cartesian coordinates or by polar
coordinates, however, the polar coordinates must be relative to
an origin of (0,0).

3.6.1 Using Events Generated by the ISCST2 Model

     Since the ISCEV2  (EVENT) model was designed to work in
conjunction with the ISCST2 model, the ISCST2 model has an
option (CO EVENTFIL described in Section 3.2.9) to generate an
input file for the ISCEV2 model.  When this option is used, the
ISCST2 model copies relevant inputs from the ISCST2 runstream
input file to the ISCEV2 model input file, and generates the
inputs for the EVent pathway from the results of the modeling
run.  These events are the design concentrations identified by
the OU RECTABLE keyword (see Section 3.7.1.1), such as the
highest and high-second-high 24-hour averages, etc., and any
threshold violations identified by the OU MAXIFILE keyword (see
                                                     t
Section 3.7.1.2).  The inputs generated by the ISCST2 model
correspond to the syntax described above for the EVENTPER and
EVENTLOC keywords.  The locations for events generated by the
ISCST2 model are always provided as Cartesian coordinates.

                              3-71

-------
     To easily identify the events generated by the ISCST2
model, and to provide a mechanism for the ISCST2 model to
manage the events generated from the model run, a naming
convention is used for the EVNAME parameter.  The following
examples illustrate the event names used by the ISCST2 model:

     H1H01001 - High-first-high 1-hour average for source group
                number 1
     H2H24003 - High-second-high 24-hour average for source
                group number 3
     TH030010 - Threshold violation number 10 for 3-hour
                averages
     TH240019 - Threshold violation number 19 for 24-hour
                averages

The high value design concentrations are listed first in the
ISCEV2 model input file, followed by the threshold violations
(grouped by averaging period).  To make it easier for the user
to review the ISCEV2 model input file generated by the ISCST2
model, and determine which events are of most concern, the
actual concentration or deposition value associated with the
event is included as the last field on the EVENTPER card.  This
field is ignored by the ISCEV2 model, and is included only for
informational purposes.  The user should be aware that the same
event may appear in the ISCEV2 model input file as both a
design value and as a threshold violation, depending on the
options selected and the actual results.  Since the model
processes the events by date sequence and outputs the results
for each event as it is processed, the order of events in the
output file will generally not follow the order of events in
the input file, unless all of the events were generated by the
MAXIFILE option.
                              3-72

-------
3.6.2 Specifying Discrete Events

     The user can specify discrete events by entering the
EVENTPER and EVENTLOC cards as described above.  The averaging
period and source group selected for the event must be among
those specified on the CO AVERTIME and SO SRCGROUP cards.  If
the ISCEV2 model input file was generated by the ISCST2 model,
the user may include additional events for those averaging
periods and source groups used in the original ISCST2 model
run.  They may also add averaging periods or define new source
groups in the ISCEV2 model input file in order to define
additional events.

3.7 OUTPUT PATHWAY INPUTS AND OPTIONS

     The output pathway contains keywords that define the
output options for the model runs.  Since the output options
are somewhat different for each of the three models, the OU
pathway options for the models are discussed separately.

3.7.1 Short Term Model Options

     The ISCST2 model has three keywords that control different
types of tabular output for the main output file of the model,
and three keywords that control separate output file options
for specialized purposes.  The user may select any combination
of outputs for a particular application.

     3.7.1.1 Selecting Options for Tabular Printed Outputs.

     The three tabular printed output options are controlled by
the following keywords (the corresponding option switches from
the previous ISCST model are indicated in parentheses):

     RECTABLE - Controls output option for high value summary
                tables by receptor (ISW(17));

                              3-73

-------
     MAXTABLE - Controls output option for overall maximum
                value summary tables  (ISW(18)); and
     DAYTABLE - Controls output option for tables of  concurrent
                values summarized by receptor for each day
                processed (ISW(16)).

While these tabular output options for the ISCST2 model
correspond roughly to the indicated options from the  previous
version of the model, the ISCST2 model provides greater
flexibility for the user to specify different output  options by
averaging period.  The keywords are described in more detail in
the order listed above.

     The syntax and type for the RECTABLE keyword are
summarized below:
syntax
Type:
: OU RECTABLE Aveper FIRST SECOND
Optional, Repeatable
... SIXTH or

1ST 2ND

... 6TH

where the Aveper parameter is the short term averaging period
(e.g. 1, 3., 8. or 21 hr or MONTH) for which the receptor table
is selected, and the secondary keywords, FIRST.  SECOND,  etc.,
indicate which high values are to be summarized  by  receptor for
that averaging period.  The RECTABLE card may be repeated for
each averaging period.  For cases where the user wants the same
RECTABLE options for all short term averaging periods  being
modeled, the input may be simplified by entering the secondary
keyword ALLAVE for the Aveper parameter.  The following example
will select summaries of the highest, second highest and third
highest values by receptor for all averaging periods:
      OU RECTABLE ALLAVE FIRST SECOND THIRD
                              3-74

-------
The model will also recognize a range of high values on the
RECTABLE input card, and therefore the following card will have
the effect:
      QU RECTABLE ALLAVE FIRST-THIRD
     The output file will include tables for only the high
values selected.  Tables for all source groups for a particular
averaging period are grouped together, and the averaging
periods are output in the order that they appear the CO
AVERTIME card.  For each averaging period and source group
combination, the tables of high values for the receptor
networks (if any) are printed first, followed by any discrete
Cartesian receptors, any discrete polar receptors, and any
boundary receptors.

     The number of high values per receptor that the model can
store is controlled by the NVAL PARAMETER in the Fortran
computer code.  The value of NVAL is initially set at 3, which
corresponds to the option available in the previous version of
ISCST for the three highest values by receptor.  The NVAL
PARAMETER can be changed (up to 10), and the model recompiled
in order to meet other modeling needs, such as the highest of
the sixth highest values by receptor for PM-10 modeling,
assuming sufficient memory is available for the model's storage
requirements.  Changing the model storage limits is discussed
in more detail in Section 4.2.2.

     If the CO EVENTFIL keyword has been used to generate an
input file for the ISCEV2 (EVENT) model, then the design values
identified by the, RECTABLE options, e.g., the high-second-high
24-hour average, are included in the events that are defined in
the ISCEV2 model input file.
                              3-75

-------
     The syntax and type for the MAXTABLE keyword  are
summarized below:
      Syntax: °u MAXTABLE  Aveper  Maxnum
              Optional, Repeat able
where the Aveper parameter is the short term  averaging period
(e.g. 1, 3., 8. or 24. hr or MONTH) for which the  receptor table
is selected, and the Maxnum parameter specifies the number of
overall maximum values to be summarized for each  averaging
period.  The MAXTABLE card may be repeated for  each averaging
period.  As with the RECTABLE keyword, for cases  where the user
wants the same MAXTABLE options for all short term averaging
periods being modeled, the input may be simplified by entering
the secondary keyword ALLAVE for the Aveper parameter.  The
following example will select the maximum 50  table for all
averaging periods:
      OU MAXTABLE ALLAVE 50
     A separate maximum overall value table  is  produced for
each source group.  The maximum value tables follow the
RECTABLE outputs  in the main print  file.   All source group
tables for a particular averaging period  are grouped together,
and the averaging periods are output in the  order that they
appear on the CO  AVERTIME card.

     The number of overall maximum  values that  the model can
store for each averaging period and source group is controlled
by the NMAX PARAMETER in the Fortran computer code.  The value
of NMAX is initially set at 50, which corresponds to the option
available in the  previous version of ISCST for  the maximum 50
table.  The NMAX  PARAMETER can be changed (up or down), and the
model recompiled  in order to meet other modeling needs,
assuming sufficient memory is available for  the model's storage
                              3-76

-------
requirements.  Changing the model  storage  limits is discussed
in more detail in Section 4.2.2.

     The syntax and type for the DAYTABLE  keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: ou DAYTABLE Avperi  AvperZ  Avper3
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the Avpern- parameters are  the  short  term averaging
periods (e.g. \, 3_, 8 or 24. hr or MONTH) for which the daily
tables are selected.  The DAYTABLE card  is non-repeatable, but
as with the RECTABLE and MAXTABLE keywords,  for cases where the
user wants daily tables for all  short  term averaging periods
being modeled, the input may be  simplified by entering the
secondary keyword ALLAVE for the first parameter.   The
following example will select the daily  tables for all
averaging periods:
      OU DAYTABLE ALLAVE
     For each averaging period  for which the DAYTABLE option is
selected, the model will print  the concurrent averages for all
receptors for each day of data  processed.   The receptor
networks (if any) are printed first,  followed by any discrete
Cartesian receptors, discrete polar  receptors, and boundary
receptors. Results for each  source group are output.  For
example, if 1, 3, and 24-hour averages  are calculated, and the
OU DAYTABLE ALLAVE option is used, then for the first day of
data processed, there will be 24  sets of tables of hourly
averages (one for each hour  in  the day),  eight sets of 3-hour
averages (one for each 3-hour period in the day),  and one set
of 24-hour averages.  The averages are  printed as they are
calculated by the model, but for  hours  where more than one
averaging period is calculated  (e.g., hour 24 is the end of an
                              3-77

-------
hourly average, a 3-hour average, and a  24-hour  average),  the
order in which the averages are output will  follow the order
used on the CO AVERTIME card.  Note;  This option can produce
very large output files, especially when used with a full  year
of data and very short period averages,  such 1-hour and 3-hour.
It should therefore be used with CAUTION.

     3.7.1.2 Selecting Options for Special Purpose Output
     Files.

     The ISCST2 model provides options for three types of
output files for specialized purposes.   One  option produces
files of all occurrences of violations of user-specified
threshold values (MAXIFILE keyword), another option produces
files of concurrent  (raw) results at each receptor suitable for
post-processing  (POSTFILE keyword), and  a third  option produces
files of design values that can be imported  into graphics
packages in order to produce contour plots  (PLOTFILE keyword).
Each of these options is described in detail below.  The
MAXIFILE and PLOTFILE options are new features of the ISCST2
model.  The POSTFILE option is similar to the output
concentration file option in the previous version of ISCST
(ISW(5)), but has been extended to provide the user with more
flexibility in selecting only the desired outputs, and also
allows for output of unformatted or formatted files of
concurrent results.

     The syntax and type for the MAXIFILE keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: OU MAXIFILE Aveper Grpid Thresh Filnam (Funit)
              Optional, Repeatable
where the Aveper parameter  is  the  short term averaging period
(e.g. 3_, 8.,  24  for  3,  8  and 24-hour averages,  or MONTH for
monthly averages) and  Grpid is the source group ID for which
                              3-78

-------
the MAXIFILE option is selected.  The Thresh parameter is the
user-specified threshold value, and Filnam is the name of the
file where the MAXIFILE results are to be written.  The
optional Funit parameter allows the user the option of
specifying the Fortran logical file unit for the output file.
The user-specified file unit must be in the range of 20-100,
inclusive.  By specifying the same filename and unit for more
than one MAXIFILE card, results for different source groups
and/or averaging periods may be combined into a single file. If
the Funit parameter is omitted, then the model will dynamically
allocate a unique file unit for this file (see Section 3.8.2).

     The MAXIFILE card may be repeated for each combination of
averaging period and source group, and a different filename
should be used for each file.  The resulting maximum value file
will include several header records identifying the averaging
period, source group and the threshold value for that file, and
a listing of every occurrence where the result for that
averaging period/source group equals or exceeds the threshold
value.  Each of these records includes the averaging period,
source group ID, date for the threshold violation (ending hour
of the averaging period), the x, y, z and flagpole receptor
height for the receptor location where the violation occurred,
and the concentration or deposition value.

     Each of the threshold violations, except for monthly
averages, identify events that may be modeled for source
contribution information with the ISCEV2 (EVENT) model by
selecting the CO EVENTFIL option (see Sections 3.2.9 and 3.6).
Each of the threshold violations is included as an event on the
EV pathway, and is given a name of the form THxxyyyy, where xx
is the averaging period, and yyyy is the violation number for
that averaging period.  For example, an event name of TH240019
identifies the 19th threshold violation for 24-hour averages.
Monthly average threshold violations are included in the file
specified on the MAXIFILE card, but are not included in the
                              3-79

-------
ISCEV2 model  input file since the  ISCEV2 model currently
handles only  averaging periods of  up to 24 hours.

     The  following examples illustrate the use of the  MAXIFILE
option:
      OU MAXIFILE  24 ALL  364.0 MAX24ALL.OUT
      OU MAXIFILE  24 PSD   91.0 MAXPSO.OUT   50
      OU NAXIFILE  3 PSD  365.0 MAXPSD.OUT   50
      OU MAXIFILE  3 PLANT  25.0 C:\OUTPUT\MAXI3HR.FIL
      OU MAXIFILE MONTH ALL  10.0 MAXMONTH.OUT
where the  3-hour example illustrates the use of a DOS  pathname
for the PC,  and the last example  illustrates the use of monthly
averages.   The FILNAM parameter may be up to 40 characters in
length.  It should also be noted  that only one MAXIFILE card
may be used for each averaging period/source group  combination.
Note;  The MAXIFILE option may produce very large files for
runs involving a large number of  receptors if a significant
percentage of the results exceed  the threshold value.

     The syntax and type for the  POSTFILE keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax:  OU POSTFILE  Aveper  Grpid Format Filnam (Funit)
      Type:    Optional, Repeatable
where  the Aveper parameter  is  the averaging period  (e.g.  3_, 8.,
24 for 3,  8 and 24-hour averages,  MONTH for monthly averages,
or PERIOD for period averages)  and Grpid is the source group ID
for which the POSTFILE option  is selected.  The Format
parameter specifies the format of the POSTFILE output,  and may
either be the secondary keyword UNFORM for unformatted
concentration files (similar to those created by  the original
ISCST  model), or the secondary keyword PLOT to obtain formatted
files  of receptor locations (x- and y-coordinates)  and
concentrations suitable for plotting contours of  concurrent
                               3-80

-------
values.  The  Filnam parameter is the name of the file where the
POSTFILE results  are to be written.  The optional Funit
parameter allows  the user the option of specifying the Fortran
logical file  unit for the output file.  The user-specified file
unit must be  in the range of 20-100, inclusive.   By specifying
the same filename and unit for more than one POSTFILE card,
results for different source groups and/or averaging periods
may be combined into a single file.  If the Funit parameter is
omitted, then the model will dynamically allocate a unique file
unit for this file (see Section 3.8.2).

     The POSTFILE card may be repeated for each  combination of
averaging period  and source group, and a different filename
should be used for each file.  If UNFORM is specified for the
Format parameter,  then the resulting unformatted file includes
a constant-length record for each of the selected averaging
periods calculated during the model run.  The  first variable of
each record is an integer variable (4 bytes) containing the
ending date  (YYMMDDHH)  for the averages on that  record.  The
second variable for each record is an integer  variable (4
bytes) for the number of hours in the averaging  period.  The
third variable for each record is a character  variable of
length eight  containing the source group ID.   The remaining
variables of  each record contain the calculated  average
concentration or  total deposition values for all receptors, in
the order in  which they were defined in the input runstream.

     The following examples illustrate the use of the POSTFILE
option:
      OU POSTFILE 24 ALL  UNFORM
      OU POSTFILE 24 PSD  UNFORM
      OU POSTFILE  3 PLANT UNFORM
      OU POSTFILE MONTH ALL  PLOT
      OU POSTFILE PERIOD ALL  PLOT
PST24ALL.BIN
PST24PSD.BIN
C:\BINOUT\PST3HR.FIL
PSTMONTH.PLT
PSTANN.PLT
                               3-81

-------
 where the 3-hour example  illustrates the use of a DOS pathname
for the PC, and the  last example illustrates the use of monthly
averages.  The Filnam parameter may be up to 40 characters in
length.  The use of  separate  files for each averaging
period/source group  combination allows the user flexibility to
select only those results  that are needed for post-processing
for a particular run, and  also makes the resulting unformatted
files manageable.  Note;   The POSTFILE option can produce very
large files, and should be used with some caution.  For a file
of hourly values for a  full year (8760 records) and 400
receptors, the resulting file will use about 14 megabytes of
disk space.  To estimate the  size of the file  (in bytes), use
the following equation:

                            (# of Hrs/Yr)
     File Size  (bytes)  =   	* (# of Rec + 4) * 4
                            (# of Hrs/Ave)

Divide the result by 1000  to  estimate the number of kilobytes
(KB) and divide by 1.0E6 to estimate the number of megabytes
(MB) .

     The syntax and  type for  the PLOTFILE keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: OU PLOTFILE Aveper Grpid  Hivalu Filnam (Funit), or
              OU PLOTFILE PERIOD Grpid  Filnam (Funit)
      Type:   Optional, Repeat able
where the Aveper parameter is the averaging period  (e.g.  3.,  8.,
24 for  3, 8  and 24-hour averages, MONTH for monthly averages,
or PERIOD for period averages),  Grpid is the source group ID
for which the PLOTFILE option is selected, and Hivalu  specifies
which short  term high values are to be output (FIRST for  the
first highest- at each receptor,  SECOND for the second  highest
at each receptor, etc.)  Note that the Hivalu parameter is not
specified for PERIOD averages,  since there is only one period
                               3-82

-------
average for each receptor.  The Filnam parameter is the name of
the file where the PLOTFILE results are to be written.  The
optional Funit parameter allows the user the option of
specifying the Fortran logical file unit for the output file.
The user-specified file unit must be in the range of 20-100,
inclusive.  By specifying the same filename and unit for more
than one PLOTFILE card, results for different source groups
and/or averaging periods may be combined into a single file. If
the Funit parameter is omitted, then the model will dynamically
allocate a unique file unit for this file (see Section 3.8.2).

     The PLOTFILE card may be repeated for each combination of
averaging period, source group, and high value, and a different
filename should be used for each file.  The resulting formatted
file includes several records with header information
identifying the averaging period, source group and high value
number of the results, and then a record for each receptor
which contains the x and y coordinates for the receptor
location, the appropriate high value at that location, and the
averaging period, source group and high value number.  The data
are written to the file in the order of x-coord, y-coord,
concentration (or deposition) so that the file can easily be
imported into a graphics package designed to generate contour
plots.  Many such programs will read the PLOTFILEs directly
without any modification, ignoring the header records, and
produce the desired plots.
                              3-83

-------
     The  following examples  illustrate the use of the PLOTFILE
option:
      OU PLOTFILE  24 ALL
      OU PLOTFILE  24 ALL
      OU PLOTFILE  24 PSD
      OU PLOTFILE  3 PSD
      OU PLOTFILE  3 PLANT
      OU PLOTFILE MONTH ALL
      OU PLOTFILE PERIOD ALL
FIRST PLT24ALL.FST
SECOND PLT24ALL.SEC
 2ND PLTPSD.OUT    75
 2ND PLTPSD.OUT    75
 1ST C:\PLOTS\PLT3HR.FIL
THIRD PLTMONTH.OUT
    PSTANN.PLT
where the 3-hour example  illustrates the use  of a DOS pathname
for the  PC,  and the last  example illustrates  the use of monthly
averages.   As illustrated by the second and third examples,  the
high value parameter may  also be input as  secondary keywords
using the standard abbreviations of 1ST. 2ND,  3RD. . .  .   10TH.
The Filnam parameter may  be  up to 40 characters in length.   The
use of separate files for each averaging period, source group,
high value combination allows the user flexibility to select
only those results that are  needed for plotting from a
particular run.


3.7.2 Short Term EVENT Model (ISCEV2) Options


     The ISC2 Short Term  EVENT model  (ISCEV2)  is designed
specifically to perform source contribution analyses for  short
term average (less than or equal to 24-hour)  events.  The
events may either be generated by the ISCST2  model, or they may
be user-specified events,  or both.  Because of this rather
narrow focus of applications for the ISCEV2 model, the output
options  are limited to a  single keyword.   The EVENTOUT keyword
controls the level of detail in the source contribution output
from the EVENT model.  The syntax and type of the EVENTOUT
keyword  are summarized below:
       Syntax: <*J EVEMTOUT SOCOHT DETAIL
       Type:    Mandatory, Non-repeatable
                                3-84

-------
where the SOCQNT secondary keyword specifies the option to
produce only the source contribution information in the output
file, and the DETAIL secondary keyword specifies the option to
produce more detailed summaries in the output file.  The SOCONT
option provides the average concentration (or total deposition)
value (i.e., the contribution) from each source for the period
corresponding to the event for the source group.  The basic
source contribution information is also provided with the
DETAIL option.  In addition, the DETAIL option provides the
hourly average concentration  (or total deposition) values for
each source for every hour in the averaging period, and a
summary of the hourly meteorological data for the event period.
In general, the DETAIL option produces a larger output file
than the SOCONT file, especially if there are a large number of
sources.  There is no default setting for the EVENTOUT options.

3.7.3 Long Term Model Options

     The ISCLT2 model has three keywords available on the OU
pathway to specify the output options.  The RECTABLE and
MAXTABLE keywords are similar to the corresponding keywords for
the ISCST2 model in that RECTABLE specifies the options for
tabular summaries of results by receptor, and MAXTABLE
specifies options for tabular summaries of overall maximum
results.  These tabular output options are similar to the
options available with the previous version of ISCLT through
the option switches ISW(8), ISW(IO), and ISC(ll).  The third
keyword, PLOTFILE, is also similar to the corresponding keyword
for ISCST2, and allows the user to generate separate output
files suitable for importing into graphics packages to generate
contour plots.  However, the parameters on these keywords
differ between the two models because of the different data
structures of the models.

     For the Short Term model there are several short term
averages during the data period, from which the model sorts and
                              3-85

-------
stores the highest, second highest and third highest  values at
each location, whereas for the Long Term model,  there is only
one long term average result at each location.   Because of
these differences in the data structure, the Long  Term model is
able to store the results for all sources at each  receptor
location, in addition to the combined source group values.
Therefore, the output keywords for Long Term include  options to
summarize results for each source or for the source groups, and
also to provide source contribution information  for the maximum
source group values (thereby eliminating the need  for a Long
Term EVENT model).

     The syntax and type for the Long Term RECTABLE keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: °u RECTABLE INDSRC  and/or  SRCGRP
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the INDSRC secondary keyword specifies  that  summaries of
individual sources for each receptor are  to be  output,  and the
secondary keyword SRCGRP specifies that summaries  of source
group values for each receptor are to be  provided.   The user
may select either option or both options  in a given run.   The
individual source values are presented first  in the output
file, with the results by receptor network followed by any
discrete Cartesian receptors, discrete polar  receptors and
boundary receptors.  The source group results follow the same
pattern as the individual source tables.   A complete set of
summary tables is output for each STAR summary  processed,  and
for the PERIOD averages, if calculated.
                              3-86

-------
     The syntax and type for the Long Term MAXTABLE keyword are
summarized below:
      Syntax: °u MAXTABLE Maxnum INDSRC  and/or SRCGRP and/or  SOCONT
      Type:   Optional, Non-repeatable
where the Maxnum parameter specifies the number of maximum
values to summarize, and where the INDSRC  and  SRCGRP secondary
keywords specify that summaries of maximum values  for
individual sources and for source groups,  respectively,  are to
be provided.  The individual source maximum values are treated
independently of the source group maxima with  the  INDSRC
option.  To obtain the contribution from each  source to the
maximum source group values (similar to the information
obtained from ISCEV2), the user may select the SOCONT option.
The user may select any combination of these options in a given
run.  If the SOCONT option is selected, and the SRCGRP option
has not been selected, the model will automatically determine
the maximum source group values so that the source contribution
analysis can be performed, but the maximum source  group values
will not be included in the output file.   The  individual source
values are presented first in the output file,  followed by the
maximum source group values, and the source contribution
results, according to the options selected.  A complete set of
maximum value summary tables is output for each STAR summary
processed, and for the PERIOD averages, if calculated.

     The number of overall maximum values  that the model can
store for each source and source group is  controlled by the
NMAX PARAMETER in the Fortran computer code.   The  value of NMAX
is initially set at 10 for the Long Term model,  which
corresponds to the option available in the previous version of
ISCLT for the maximum 10 tables.  The NMAX PARAMETER can be
changed (up or down), and the model recompiled in  order to meet
other modeling needs, assuming sufficient  memory is available
                              3-87

-------
for the model's  storage requirements.   Changing the model
storage limits is discussed in more detail in Section 4.2.2.

     The syntax  and type for the Long Term PLOTFILE keyword  are
summarized below:
      Syntax: ou PLOTFILE Avepcr crpia
              Optional, Repeatable
where the Aveper parameter is the long  term averaging period
(e.g. WINTER.  SPRING.  etc.) and Grpid is  the source group  ID
for which the  PLOTFILE option is selected.   The PLOTFILE card
may be repeated for each combination of averaging period and
source group,  and a different filename  should be used for  each
file.  The  resulting formatted file includes several records
with header information identifying the averaging period and
source group of the results, and then a record for each
receptor which contains the x and y coordinates for the
receptor location, the long term average  value at that
location, the  averaging period and the  source group ID.  The
data are written to the file in the order of x-coord, y-coord,
concentration  (or deposition) so that the file can easily  be
imported into  a graphics package designed to generate contour
plots.  Many such programs will read the  PLOTFILEs directly
without any modification, ignoring the  header records, and
produce the desired plots.

     The example below illustrates the  use of various Long Term
model output options:
       OU RECTABLE  INOSRC  SRCGRP
       OU MAXTABLE  10 INDSRC SRCGRP SOCONT
       OU PLOTFILE  WINTER  ALL  PLTUINT.OUT
       OU PLOTFILE  SPRING  PSD  PSDSPRG.PLT
       OU PLOTFILE  ANNUAL  PLANT C:\PLOTS\PLANT.ALL
                               3-88

-------
where all of the tabular printed output options have been
selected, and several plotfiles have also been selected.

3.8 CONTROLLING INPUT AND OUTPUT FILES

     This section describes the various input and output files
used by the ISC2 models, and discusses control of input and
output (I/O) on the IBM-compatible PC environment.  Much of
this discussion also applies to operating the models in other
environments.

3.8.1 Description of ISC2 Input Files

     The two basic types of input files needed to run all of
the ISC2 models are the input runstream file containing the
modeling options, source data and receptor data, and the input
meteorological data file.  Each of these is discussed below, as
well as a special file that may be used to initialize the
ISCST2 model with intermediate results from a previous run.

     3.8.1.1 Input Runstream File.

     The input runstream file contains the user-specified
options for running the various ISC2 models, includes the
source parameter data and source group information, defines the
receptor locations, specifies the location and parameters
regarding the meteorological data, and specifies the output
options.  The basic structure of the input runstream file is
the same for all three models, although the list of available
keywords for defining options, and the exact syntax for certain
keywords are slightly different between the Short Term and Long
Term models.  Details regarding the keywords and parameters
used in the input runstream file are provided in Section 3, and
Appendix B.
                              3-89

-------
     For the PC-executable versions of the models available on
the SCRAM BBS, the runstream file is explicitly opened by the
models using a Fortran OPEN statement, and the integer
variable, INUNIT, specifies the unit number for the file.  The
variable INUNIT is initialized to a value of 5 in a BLOCK DATA
subprogram of the model, which corresponds to the default input
unit for Fortran.  The INUNIT variable is included in a named
COMMON block  (FUNITS) in the MAIN1.INC include file, and is
therefore available to all of the necessary subroutines.

     Since the input runstream file is opened explicitly by the
PC-executable versions of the models, the model will take the
first parameter on the command line when running the model as
the input filename.  No DOS redirection symbol should be used
preceding the runstream filename.

     3.8.1.2 Meteorological Data File.

     The input meteorological data is read into the models from
a separate data file for all three models.  The meteorological
filename and  format are specified within the input runstream
file using the ME INPUTFIL keyword.  The Short Term models
accept meteorological data from unformatted sequential files
generated by  the RAMMET and MPRM preprocessors, and also accept
a wide range  of formatted ASCII files of hourly sequential
records.  The Long Term model accepts STability ARray  (STAR)
meteorological data from sequential ASCII files using either a
default READ  format, a user-specified READ format or
free-formatted READs.

     The meteorological data file is explicitly opened by the
models using  a Fortran OPEN statement, and the integer
variable, MFUNIT, specifies the unit number for the file.  The
variable MFUNIT is initialized to a value of 19 in a BLOCK DATA
subprogram of the model.  The MFUNIT variable is included in a
                              3-90

-------
named COMMON block (FUNITS) in the MAIN1.INC include file, and
is therefore available to all of the necessary subroutines.

     3.8.1.3 Initialization File for Model Re-start.

     The ISCST2 model has an optional capability to store
intermediate results to an unformatted (sometimes called
binary) file for later re-starting of the model in the event of
a power failure or user interrupt.  This unformatted file may
therefore be used as an input file to initialize the model.
This option is controlled by the SAVEFILE (saves intermediate
results to a file)  and the INITFILE (initialize result arrays
from a previously saved file) keywords on the CO pathway.
     When initializing the model for the re-start option, the
user specifies the name of the unformatted results file on the
INITFILE keyword.  The default filename used if no parameter is
provided is TMP.FIL.  The initialization file is explicitly
opened by the ISCST2 model, and the integer variable, IRSUNT,
specifies the unit number for the file.  The variable IRSUNT is
initialized to a value of 15 in a BLOCK DATA subprogram of the
model.  The IRSUNT variable is included in a named COMMON block
(FUNITS) in the MAIN1.INC include file, and is therefore
available to all of the necessary subroutines.

3.8.2 Description of ISC2 Output Files

     The ISC2 models produce a variety of output files,
including the main print file of model results, an unformatted
file of intermediate results for later re-start of the model
(ISCST2 only), and several output data files for specialized
purposes.  These files are described in detail below.
                              3-91

-------
     3.8.2.1 Output Print File.

     Each of the ISC2 models produces a main output print file
of model results.  The contents and organization of this file
for the ISCST2 model were shown in Figure 2-5.  This file
includes an echo of the input runstream images at the beginning
of the file (up until a NO ECHO input is encountered).   A
summary of runstream setup messages and a summary of the inputs
follow the echo of inputs.  The input summary includes a
summary of modeling options, source data, receptor data, and
meteorological data, following the same order as the pathways
in the runstream file.  If model calculations are performed,
then the model results are summarized next.  The content and
order of the model result summaries depend on the output
options selected and on the particular model being run.
Following the detailed model results are summary tables of the
high values for each averaging period and source group  (ISCST2
only).  The final portion of the main output print file is the
summary of messages for the complete model run.

     For the PC-executable versions of the models available on
the SCRAM BBS, the main print output file is explicitly opened
by the models using a Fortran OPEN statement, and the integer
variable, IOUNIT, specifies the unit number for the file.  The
variable IOUNIT is initialized to a value of 6 in a BLOCK DATA
subprogram of the model, which corresponds to the default
output unit for Fortran.  The IOUNIT variable is included in a
named COMMON block  (FUNITS) in the MAIN1.INC include file, and
is therefore available to all of the necessary subroutines.

     Since the main print output file is opened explicitly, the
model will take the second parameter on the command line when
running the model as the output filename.  No DOS redirection
symbol should be used preceding the output filename.  If an
output file is not given on the command line, then the model
will return an error message and abort execution.
                              3-92

-------
     By opening the printed output file explicitly, the outputs
are not automatically formatted for the printer.  This
formatting is accomplished using the CARRIAGE CONTROL specifier
in the OPEN statement for the Lahey extended memory version of
the models, and by explicitly writing the ASCII form feed
character to the file for the Microsoft DOS version.

     3.8.2.2 Detailed Error Message File.

     The user may select an option for the model to save a
separate file of detailed error and other messages, through use
of the CO ERRORFIL keyword.  The format and syntax of these
messages is described in Appendix E.  The order of messages
within the file is the order in which they were generated by
the model.  The file includes all types of messages that were
generated.

     The error message file is explicitly opened by the model
using a Fortran OPEN statement, and the integer variable,
IERUNT, specifies the unit number for the file.  The variable
IERUNT is initialized to a value of 10 in a BLOCK DATA
subprogram of the model.  The IERUNT variable is included in a
named COMMON block (FUNITS) in the MAIN1.INC include file, and
is therefore available to all of the necessary subroutines.

     3.8.2.3 Intermediate Results File for Model Re-start.

     The ISCST2 model has an optional capability to store
intermediate results to an unformatted (sometimes called
binary) file for later re-starting of the model in the event of
a power failure or user interrupt.  This unformatted file may
therefore be used as an input file to initialize the model.
This option is controlled by the SAVEFILE (saves intermediate
results to a file) and the INITFILE (initialize result arrays
from a previously saved file) keywords on the CO pathway.
                              3-93

-------
     When saving the intermediate results for the re-start
option, the user specifies the name of the unformatted results
file on the SAVEFILE keyword.  The user has the option of
specifying a single filename, two filenames (for alternate
saves), or specifying no filename.  The default filename used
if no parameter is provided is TMP.FIL.  If a single file is
used, then the intermediate results file is overwritten on each
successive dump, with the chance that the file will be lost if
the interrupt occurs during the time that the file is opened.
If two filenames are provided, then the model also saves to the
second file on alternate dumps, so that the next most recent
dump will always be available.  The main save file is
explicitly opened by the ISCST2 model, and the integer
variable, IDPUNT, specifies the unit number for the file.  The
variable IDPUNT is initialized to a value of 12 in a BLOCK DATA
subprogram of the model.  If a second save file is used, then
it is also opened explicitly, and the integer variable IDPUN2,
initialized to a value of 14, specifies the unit number.

     3.8.2.4 Maximum Value/Threshold File.

     The user may select an option for the ISCST2 model to
generate a file or files of concentration (or deposition)
values exceeding a user-specified threshold.  The OU MAXIFILE
keyword controls this option.  The user may select separate
files for each averaging period and source group combination
for which a list of threshold violations may be needed.  Each
file includes several records with header information
identifying the averaging period, source group and threshold
value, and then a record for every occurrence where the result
for that averaging period/source group equals or exceeds the
threshold value.  Each of these records includes the averaging
period, source group ID, date for the threshold violation
(ending hour of the averaging period), the x, y, z and flagpole
receptor height for the receptor location where the violation
occurred, and the concentration or deposition value.
                              3-94

-------
     The structure of the threshold violation file is described
in more detail in Appendix F.  Each of the files selected by
the user is opened explicitly by the model as an formatted
file.  The filenames are provided on the input runstream image.
The user may specify the file unit on the MAXIFILE card through
the optional FUNIT parameter.  User-specified units must be
greater than or equal to 20, and are recommended to be less
than or equal to 100.  If no file unit is specified, then the
file unit is determined internally according to the following
formula:

          IMXUNT = 100 + IGRP*10 + IAVE

where IMXUNT is the Fortran unit number, IGRP is the source
group number (the order in which the group is defined in the
runstream file), and IAVE is the averaging period number (the
order of the averaging period as specified on the CO AVERTIME
card).  This formula will not cause any conflict with other
file units used by the model for up to 9 source groups and up
to 9 short term averaging periods.

     3.8.2.5 Sequential Results File for Postprocessing.

     The user may select an option for the ISCST2 model to
generate a file or files of concentration (or deposition)
values suitable for postprocessing.  The OU POSTFILE keyword
controls this option.  The user may select separate files for
each averaging period and source group combination for which
postprocessing may be needed.  For each file requested, the
user has the option of specifying whether to use unformatted
files suitable for postprocessing or to use a plot format which
could allow for inporting the x,y,conc files into a graphics
package for plotting.  For the unformatted file option, each
file consists of sequential unformatted records of values at
each receptor location for every averaging period calculated.
For the plot file format option, each file consists of
                              3-95

-------
formatted records listing the x-coordinate, y-coordinate and
concurrent concentration (or deposition)  values for each
receptor and for all averaging periods calculated.  For certain
applications, these files may become quite large, and should
only be used when needed, especially when using the plot
format.

     The structure of both types of postprocessing file is
described in more detail in Appendix F.  Each of the
postprocessing files selected by the user is opened explicitly
by the model as either an unformatted or a formatted file,
depending on the option selected.  The filenames are provided
on the input runstream image.  The user may specify the file
unit on the POSTFILE card through the optional FUNIT parameter.
User-specified units must be greater than or equal to 20, and
are recommended to be less than or equal to 100.  If no file
unit is specified, then the file unit is determined internally
according to the following formulas:

     IPSUNT = 200 + IGRP*10 + IAVE     for short term averages
     IAPUNT = 300 + IGRP*10 - 5        for PERIOD averages

where IPSUNT and IAPUNT are the Fortran unit numbers, IGRP is
the source group number  (the order in which the group is
defined in the runstream file), and IAVE is the averaging
period number (the order of the averaging period as specified
on the CO AVERTIME card).  This formula will not cause any
conflict with other file units used by the model for up to 9
source groups and up to 9 short term averaging periods.

     3.8.2.6 High Value Summary File for Plotting.

     The user may select an option for the ISCST2 model to
generate a file or files of the highest concentration (or
deposition) values at each receptor suitable for importing into
a graphics package in order to generate contour plots.  The OU
                              3-96

-------
PLOTFILE keyword controls this option.  The user may select
separate files for each averaging period, source group and high
value combination for which a plot file may be needed.  Each
file includes several records with header information
identifying the averaging period, source group and high value
number of the results, and then a record for each receptor
which contains the x and y coordinates for the receptor
location, the appropriate high value at that location, and the
averaging period, source group and high value number.

     The structure of the plot file is described in more detail
in Appendix F.  Each of the plot files selected by the user is
opened explicitly by the model as an formatted file.  The
filenames are provided on the input runstream image.  The user
may specify the file unit on the MAXIFILE card through the
optional FUNIT parameter.  User-specified units must be greater
than or equal to 20, and are recommended to be less than or
equal to 100.  If no file unit is specified, then the file unit
is determined internally according to the following formulas:

   IPLUNT =  (IVAL+3)*100 + IGRP*10 -I- IAVE  for short term aver.
   IPPUNT = 300 + IGRP*10                  for PERIOD averages

where IPLUNT and IPPUNT are the Fortran unit numbers, IVAL is
the high value number (1 for FIRST highest, 2 for SECOND
highest, etc.), IGRP is the source group number (the order in
which the group is defined in the runstream file),  and IAVE is
the averaging period number (the order of the averaging period
as specified on the CO AVERTIME card).  This formula will not
cause any conflict with other file units used by the model for
up to 9 source groups and up to 9 short term averaging periods.
                              3-97

-------
3.8.3 Control of File Inputs and Outputs (I/O)

     3.8.3.1 Control of I/O on DOS PCs,

     The main input runstream file and the main output print
file are both specified on the command line when running the
models on a PC.  Since the PC-executable file provided
explicitly opens these two files, there is no need to use DOS
redirection of input and output.  Therefore, a standard command
line to execute the ISCST2 model might look something like
this:

          C:\>ISCST2 TEST-ST.INP TEST-ST.OUT

where the "DOS prompt" has been given as "C:\>", but may look
different on different systems, or may include a subdirectory
specification.  Since DOS redirection is not used for the
output file, an output filename must be specified or the model
will not execute properly.  This is done to allow for the model
to write an update to the PC terminal on the status of
processing.  The output file generated by the DOS version
includes page feeds that are written directly to the file as
part of the header for each page, rather than using the Fortran
carriage control of '1'.

     3.8.3.2 Controlling I/O on Other Computer Systems.

     The PC-executable versions of the models that are
available on the SCRAM BBS includes certain features that are
specific to operating the models in a PC environment.  These
include specifying the input and output file names on the
command line and writing an update on the status of the
processing to the computer screen.  In order to accomplish the
latter, the output file is opened explicitly.  The PC versions
also include writing a date and time for the run on each page
of the printed output file.  The Fortran computer code that is
                              3-98

-------
used to implement these PC-specific features has been commented
out in the source code files available on SCRAM.  This is done
in order to make the most use of the features available for the
PC while at the same time making the Fortran source code as
"portable" to other computer systems as reasonably possible.
This section briefly addresses the control of model input and
output for non-PC computer systems.

     With the PC-specific code commented out in the ISC2 source
code, the models will use the default input unit (Fortran unit
5) for reading the input runstream file, and the default output
unit (Fortran unit 6) for writing the printed output file.
These files are not opened explicitly by the models with the PC
code commented out.  These files have to be defined, using the
$DEFINE command in VAX/VMS and using the DD statement in the
JCL for the IBM/MVS.  Refer to Section 4.3 for additional
information about running the models in other environments.
                              3-99

-------
                       4.0  COMPUTER MOTES

     This section provides information regarding the computer
aspects of the ISC2 models, including the minimum hardware
requirements for executing the models on a PC, instructions
regarding compiling and running the models on a PC, and
information regarding porting the models to other computer
systems.  A more detailed Programmer's Guide is provided in
Volume III of the ISC2 Model User's Guide, including details
regarding the design of the computer code.

4.1 MINIMUM HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

4.1.1 Requirements for Execution on a PC

     The ISC2 models were developed on an IBM-compatible PC,
and were designed to run of PCs with certain minimum hardware
requirements.  The basic requirements are as follows:

        80x86 processor (e.g., 8086,  80286, 80386, 80486)
     •  640 K of RAM
        Hard Disk with sufficient storage space to handle the
        executable file, input data files, and output files
        (file sizes will vary, generally about 2 MB will be
        sufficient for routine applications)
     While a math coprocessor (80x87 chip) is optional for
execution of the DOS versions of the ISC2 models on a PC, it is
highly recommended, especially for the ISCST2 model, due to the
large increase in execution speed that will be experienced. The
model may be expected to run about five to ten times faster
with a math coprocessor than without one.  The DOS models are
compiled using an emulator library,  meaning that a math
coprocessor will be used if one is present, but the models will
also run without one.
                              4-1

-------
     While the model was designed assuming a PC with a minimum
of 640 K of RAM, the minimum amount of available RAM for
loading the various models (as provided on the SCRAM BBS) are
approximately as follows:

          ISCST2.EXE  - 476K
          ISCLT2.EXE  - 473K
          ISCEV2.EXE  - 4UK

Because additional memory is needed (for buffers) when the
models open files (such as the input runstream file, the
printed output file, the error message file, etc.)/ the amount
of memory needed to actually run the models will be somewhat
larger than the figures given above.  Depending on the number
of externally files being used for a particular application, an
additional 10K of memory should be sufficient.

     The amount of available memory on a particular machine
will depend on the machine configuration including the amount
of memory used by the operating system, memory used by any
special device drivers, and any memory-resident utility
programs.  Generally, a 640K PC with minimal memory overhead
will have about 550 to 580K of RAM available for applications,
such as the ISC2 models.  The amount of available RAM can be
determined by executing the DOS CHKDSK command.  This is done
by entering the command  'CHKDSK C:' to check the C: drive.
Refer to the DOS manual for more information about CHKDSK.

     For particularly large applications, involving a large
number of sources, source groups, receptors and averaging
periods, the user may find that the 640K RAM limit available
with DOS is not enough.  Volume III of the ISC2 User's Guide
contains information on increasing the capacity of the model
and setting it up to run on systems (with 80386 processors and
higher) that make use of extended memory beyond the 64OK limit
of DOS.  There are special requirements for the operating
                              4-2

-------
system and Fortran language compiler needed to utilize the
extended memory on these machines.

4.1.2 Requirements for Execution on a DEC VAX Minicomputer

     ISCST2 will run on any DEC VAX minicomputer or workstation
which has enough main memory to do the real application run.
More than 5 MBytes user disk space is recommended.

4.1.3 Requirements for Execution on an IBM Mainframe

     ISCST2 will run on any IBM 3090 or above mainframe as long
as the machine supports enough memory.  The size of the desired
memory depends on the size of the application case run.  At
least 5 MBytes user disk space is recommended.

4.2 COMPILING AND RUNNING THE MODELS ON A PC

     As mentioned earlier, the ISC2 models were developed on an
IBM-compatible PC, using the Microsoft Optimizing FORTRAN
Compiler (Version 5.1).  This section provides details
regarding compiling and running the models on a PC.

4.2.1 Microsoft Compiler Options

     The DOS versions of the executable files (.EXE) of the
models provided on the SCRAM BBS were compiled with the
Microsoft Optimizing FORTRAN Compiler (Version 5.1) using the
following command line:

          FL /C /FPi /AH /DMICRO *.FOR

where /c- instructs the compiler to compile without linking; the
/FPi option instructs the compiler to use in-line instructions
for floating point operations and link with an emulator library
(uses 80x87 coprocessor if present); the /AH option that the
                              4-3

-------
huge memory model be used, allowing arrays or common blocks to

exceed 64K; and the /DMICRO option instructs the compiler to

use the conditional compilation blocks defined for the

Microsoft compiler.  These conditional blocks of code implement

the PC-specific features of the model including writing the

date and time fields on each page of the printed output file

and writing an update to the screen on the status of

processing.  The *.FOR parameter tells the compiler to compile

all files in the default directory ending with an extension of

*.FOR.  This assumes that all of the source code modules and

the include files are in a. single directory, or that the

compiler has been setup to search for the include files in the

appropriate directory.  This command line for the compiler

makes full use of the compiler's optimization routines to speed

up the code.  To disable optimization, the /Od option would be

added.


     The source modules for the ISCST2 model are as follows:
     ISCST2.FOR - Main program, error handling and other
                  utilities
     SETUP.FOR  - Main SETUP subroutines and initialization
                  module
     INPSUM.FOR - Subroutines to summarize the input data
     COSET.FOR  - Subroutines to process CO pathway inputs
     SOSET.FOR  - Subroutines to process SO pathway inputs
     RESET.FOR  - Subroutines to process RE pathway inputs
     MESET.FOR  - Subroutines to process ME pathway inputs
     OUSET.FOR  - Subroutines to process OU pathway inputs
     METEXT.FOR - Extracts and checks the meteorological data
     CALC1.FOR  - Main calculation subroutines, including
                  source-type specific
     CALC2.FOR  - Secondary group of calculation subroutines
                  for hourly values
     CALC3.FOR  - Group of subroutines to process and sort
                  averages
     CALC4.FOR  - Group of subroutines to output results as
                  calculated (e.g. DAYTABLE and POSTFILE
                  results)
     PRISE.FOR  - Plume rise subroutines
     SIGMAS.FOR - Dispersion parameter subroutines
     OUTPUT.FOR - Model output subroutines
     MAIN1.INC  - First INCLUDE file, used throughout model
                              4-4

-------
     MAIN2.INC  - Second  INCLUDE file,  used for MODNAM variable
                  only
     MAIN3.INC  - Third INCLUDE file,  contains only results
                  arrays

     Once the source  files  have been compiled successfully, and
object  (.OBJ) files have  been generated for each source file,
the model is ready to be  linked and an executable file created.
The executable file on the  SCRAM BBS was linked using a memory
overlay manager so that only certain portions of the code are
resident in memory at any given time.   This allows for a more
efficient use of available  memory by the model, and therefore
allows for larger runs to be performed than would be possible
without using overlays.   This is accomplished with the
following command line for  the linker provided with the
Microsoft compiler:

     LINK /E ISCST2+SETUP+
-------
runstream files  (e.g.  with a large number of sources or with
many discrete receptors).   If the application does not make use
of the SAVEFILE,  DAYTABLE,  MAXIFILE and/or POSTFILE keyword
options  (where results are output as their are calculated),
then moving the  CALC4  module to a separate overlay will not
effect performance at  all,  since it is only called if one of
those options is used.  An example of the LINK command to
minimize the load size of  the model is as follows:

     LINK /E ISCST2+(SETUP)+(INPSUM)+(COSET)+(SOSET)+(RESET)+(MESET)+(OU SET)+(CALCHCALC2+CALC3+
          PRISE+SIGHAS)+(CALC4)+(OUTPUT)
This overlay structure will reduce the load size by about 24K
for the ISCST2 model.

4.2.2 Modifying  PARAMETER  Statements for Unusual Modeling Needs

     As discussed in Section 2.3, the ISC2 models make use of a
static storage allocation  design, where the model results are
stored in explicitly dimensioned data arrays, and the array
limits are controlled by PARAMETER statements in the Fortran
computer code.   These array limits also correspond to the
limits on the number of sources, receptors, source groups and
averaging periods that the model can accept for a given run.
Depending on the amount of memory available on the particular
computer system  being used, and the needs for a particular
modeling application,  the  storage limits can easily be changed
by modifying the PARAMETER statements and recompiling the
model.

     The limits  on the number of receptors, sources, source
groups,  averaging periods, and events (for ISCEV2 model)  are
initially set as follows for the three models for the DOS and
extended memory  (EM) versions on the PC:
                               4-6

-------
PARAMETER
Name
NREC
NSRC
NGRP
NAVE
NEVE
Limit
Controlled
Number of
Receptors
Number of
Sources
Number of
Source
Groups
Number of
Short Term
Averages
Number of
Events
ISCST2
600 (DOS)
1200 (EM)
100 (DOS)
300 (EM)
2 (DOS)
5 (EM)
2 (DOS)
4 (EM)
-
ISCEV2
-
100 (DOS)
500 (EM)
25 (DOS)
50 (EM)
4 (DOS)
4 (EM)
2500 (DOS)
5000 (EM)
ISCLT2
500 (DOS)
1200 (EM)
100 (DOS)
300 (EM)
3 (DOS)
5 (EM)
-
-
     Fortran PARAMETER statements are also used to specify the
array limits for the number of high short term values by
receptor to store for the ISCST2 model (NVAL, initially set to
6),  and the number of overall maximum values to store (NMAX,
initially set to 50 for ISCST2 and to 10 for Long Term).  The
NMAX limits correspond to the limits available in the previous
versions of the model, but can also be modified by the user and
the model recompiled in order to meet particular needs.

     In addition to the parameters mentioned above, parameters
are used to specify the number of receptor networks in a
particular run (NNET), and the number of x-coordinate (or
distance) and y-coordinate (or direction) values (IXM and IYM)
for each receptor network.  Initially, the models allow up to 5
receptor networks (of either type) and up to 50 x-coordinates
(or distances) and up to 50 y-coordinates (or directions).  The
source arrays also include limits on the number of variable
emission rate factors per source  (NQF, initially set to 96 for
Short Term, 36 for the DOS Long Term,, and 144 for the EM Long
Term), the number of sectors for direction-specific building
dimensions (NSEC, initially set to 36 for Short Term and 16 for
Long Term), and the number of settling and removal categories
(NVSMAX, initially set to 20).
                              4-7

-------
     To modify the array limits for the model, the user must
first edit the appropriate PARAMETER values in the MAIN1.INC
file for that model.  Once the array limits have been
customized to a particular application's needs, then the entire
model must be recompiled and linked (see Section 4.2.1 above).
Because the high value arrays in the ISCST2 model are
4-dimensional arrays, (NREC,NVAL,NGRP,NAVE) and there are three
arrays with these dimensions (the sorted high values, the data
period for each value, and the calm and missing value flag for
each value), the model's storage requirements are particularly
sensitive to increasing the number of source groups or the
number of high values to store at each receptor location.  For
example, the amount of storage space required to store these
three arrays with the initial PARAMETER values for the DOS
version is about 13OK.  To increase the number of source groups
from 2 to 4 would double the storage requirement, adding at
least another 13OK to the load size of the model.

     The user should first determine the types of applications
for which they most typically use the models, and then modify
the appropriate PARAMETER values accordingly.  If someone never
(or very rarely) uses variable emission rate factors, then
modifying the NQF parameter could free up some memory.  Setting
NQF to 24 (which would still handle HROFDY factors), will free
up about 29K for a model using 100 sources.  The user may also
wish to reduce the NVSMAX parameter if settling and removal
categories are rarely used.

     Often, when a larger number of source groups has been used
with the previous version of the ISCST model, it has been for
the purpose of performing source contribution  (or source
culpability) analyses.  Since the ISCEV2  (EVENT) model provides
this type of information without having to specify a separate
source group for each source, the need for large numbers of
source groups in the new models should be lessened.  If the
storage limits available on the 640K PC environment are too
                              4-8

-------
restrictive for particular applications, then the user should
examine the possibility of using a different hardware
environment or a different operating system where the 64OK
barrier will not be limiting.  Such systems are available for
PCs with 80386 and 80486 processors.  The extended memory (EM)
versions of the models provided on the SCRAM BBS require an
80386 or 80486 processor with at least 4 MB of RAM (3 MB of
available extended memory).   The setup and application of the
models on the DEC VAX minicomputer and the IBM 3090 mainframe
computer are also described in the next section of this User's
Guide, and in more detail in Volume III of the ISC2 User's
Guide.

4.3 PORTING THE MODELS TO OTHER HARDWARE ENVIRONMENTS

     The ISC2 models are designed and coded to allow them to
run on most operating environments, including DOS, UNICOS,
UNIX, SunOS, VAX/VMS, and TSO/MVS.  The ISC2 models use ANSI
Standard FORTRAN 77 with the exception of two widely supported
language extensions, namely the INCLUDE statement and the DO
WHILE ... END DO loop construct.  Although the users do not
need to make major changes,  they may experience some minor
differences from machine to machine on the exact syntax of the
INCLUDE statement.  These common language extensions may not be
supported on older versions of some compilers as well.  The
following sections address portability of the models to various
systems in more detail.

4.3.1 Non-DOS PCs

     The only requirement for porting the models to non-DOS PC
environments is the availability of a Fortran compiler capable
of operating in and compiling for the non-DOS operating system.
The extended memory (EM) versions of the models available on
the SCRAM BBS were compiled using the Lahey F77L-EM/32 Fortran
Compiler, which uses the Ergo Computing OS/386 operating system
                              4-9

-------
to access extended memory in 32-bit protected mode.  The EM
executable files are bound with the Ergo OS/386 operating
system and a load module to allow the models to be run on DOS
machines.

     One significant advantage to installing and running the
models in 32-bit protected mode on PCs is the ability to
address a much larger memory storage area.  This allows for the
data storage limits controlled by the Fortran PARAMETER
statements to be set much higher than is possible for the DOS
versions.  By using the 32-bit instruction set, the protected
mode versions also tend to run about 20 to 30 percent faster
than the DOS versions.  More information about compiling the
models with the Lahey F77L-EM/32 compiler is provided in
Appendix D.

4.3.2 DEC VAX

     4.3.2.1 Compiler/System Dependent Preprocessing.

     The ISC2 codes as provided on the SCRAM BBS are compatible
with VAX-11 FORTRAN Version 2 and above, except that the
PC-specific features have been commented out.  These features
include writing the date and time on each page of the printed
output file and writing an update to the screen on the status
of processing.

     4.3.2.2 Creating An Executable ISCST2.

     Although the users can specify any way they want to group
and store the code and data files, the easiest way is to copy
all the source codes modules, INCLUDE files and meteorology
data into a subdirectory.  The user can then write a .COM file
to compile, link and create an executable.
                              4-10

-------
     The files needed to make the ISCST2 executable are the

following:



     MAIN1.INC, MAIN2.INC,  MAIN3.INC,  ISCST2.FOR,  SETUP.FOR,

COSET.FOR, SOSET.FOR, RESET.FOR, MESET.FOR, OUSET.FOR,

INPSUM.FOR, METEXT.FOR, CALC1.FOR, CALC2.FOR, PRISE.FOR,

SIGMAS.FOR, CALC3.FOR, CALC4.FOR, OUTPUT.FOR



     The following is a sample command file named  MAKEISC.COM:



     $SET DEF [USERNAME.ISCST]
     $ FOR ISCST2.FOR
     $ FOR SETUP.FOR
     $ FOR COSET.FOR
     $ FOR SOSET.FOR
     $ FOR RESET.FOR
     $ FOR MESET.FOR
     $ FOR OUSET.FOR
     $ FOR INPSUM.FOR
     $ FOR METEXT.FOR
     $ FOR CALC1.FOR
     $ FOR CALC2.FOR
     $ FOR PRISE.FOR
     $ FOR SIGMAS.FOR
     $ FOR CALC3.FOR
     $ FOR CALC4.FOR
     $ FOR OUTPUT.FOR
     SLINK ISCST2.SETUP,COSET.SOSET,RESET,MESET,OUTSET,-
     INPSUM,METEXT,CALC1,CALC2,PRISE,SIGMAS,CALC3,CALC4,OUTPUT
     $ EXIT


     To make the  executable file, the  users should run the

MAKEISC.COM file  by typing  @makeisc  after the command line

prompt  and pressing ENTER.



     4.3.2.3 Running ISCST2.



     The VAX/VMS  operating  system is somewhat different from

the DOS and UNIX  operating  environments.  The users are not

able to direct system I/O on the command line prompt.  Instead,

the users need to generate  a .COM file first, and  then run the

.COM file online  or submit  the .COM  file to a system batch

queue.



     Here is an example of  the .COM  runfile named  RUNISC.COM:
                                 4-11

-------
     $SET DBF [USERNAME.ISCST]
     $DEFINE/USER_MODE SYS$INPUT TEST-ST.INP
     $DEFINE/USER_MODE SYS$OUTPUT TEST-ST.OUT
     $RUN ISCST2
     $EXIT

The users can either type in ©runisc ENTER to run the model
online or SUBMIT runisc on the command line prompt to submit a
batch job.

4.3.3 IBM 3090

     4.3.3.1 Compiler/System Dependent Preprocessing.

     The ISC2 codes as provided on the SCRAM BBS are compatible
with the IBM VS FORTRAN (Version 2), except that the
PC-specific features have been commented out.  These features
include writing the date and time on each page of the printed
output file and writing an update to the screen on the status
of processing.  The syntax for the INCLUDE statement is
different on the IBM VS FORTRAN, and the user will have to
replace the statements such as:

     INCLUDE  'MAIN1.INC1

with a corresponding statement such as:

     INCLUDE  (MAIN1)

throughout the ISC2 source code.  This can easily be
accomplished with the editor, and there are three INCLUDE files
used in each of the models.  For the ISCST2 model, the INCLUDE
file names are MAIN1.INC, MAIN2.INC, and MAIN3.INC.
                              4-12

-------
     4.3.3.2 Creating An Executable ISCST2.

     The ISCST2 model can be compiled and linked in one step
under VS FORTRAN by executing the appropriate procedure (e.g.,
VSF2CG to compile and load) in the JCL for the compile job.  It
is easiest to concatenate all of the source (*.FOR) files into
a single partitioned data set member, and identify that file
name with a DD statement in the JCL.  Special procedures may be
needed to access the INCLUDE files, where each INCLUDE file
should be a member in a partitioned data set.

     4.3.3.3 Running ISCST2.

     When running the ISCST2 model under IBM/MVS, special
attention is needed to defining and controlling the file I/O.
The input runstream file is read from the default input unit,
Fortran unit number 5, and the output print file is written to
the default output unit, Fortran unit number 6.  The input
meteorological data file is read from Fortran unit 19.  Other
system files include the temporary error/message file (unit 10)
and the temporary event file for ISCST2 (unit 18).  These
files, as well as any user-specified optional output files,
must be defined with DD statements in the JCL.

4.3.4 Various UNIX machines (CRAY. SUN. DEC VAX. AT&T)

     4.3.4.1 Compiler/System Dependent Preprocessing.

     The ISC2 codes as provided on the SCRAM BBS are compatible
with any ANSI Standard FORTRAN 77 Compiler operating under
UNICOS, UNIX, and SUN OS, except that the PC-specific features
have been commented out.  These features include writing the
date and time on each page of the printed output file and
writing an update to the screen on the status of processing.
                              4-13

-------
     4.3.4.2 Creating An Executable ISCST2.

     Although the users can specify any way they want to group
and store the code and data files, the easiest way is to copy
all the source codes modules, INCLUDE files and meteorology
data into a subdirectory.  The users should make sure that
every source file has suffix . f and the file name should be a
lower case ASCII character string, because the UNICOS, UNIX,
and SUN OS is case-sensitive. Also, for the same reason, all of
the .INC file should be in UPPER CASE.  The user can then write
a make file to compile, link and create an executable.

     The files needed to make the ISCST2 executable are the
following:

     MAIN1.INC, MAIN2.INC, MAIN3.INC, ISCST2.F, SETUP.F,
COSET.F, SOSET.F, RESET.F, MESET.F, OUSET.F, INPSUM.F,
METEXT.F, CALC1.F, CALC2.F, PRISE.FOR, SIGMAS.F, CALC3.F,
CALC4.F, OUTPUT.F

     Compiling ISCST2 is relatively easy under UNIX operating
environment due to the similarity between DOS and UNIX.  For a
DEC VAX workstation running Utrix 4.3, the command:

     f77 -o iscst2 *.f

will generate an ISCST2 executable.  For a CRAY running UNICOS
5.1, the following commands will generate an ISCST2 executable
under UNICOS:
                              4-14

-------
     cft77 iscst2.f
     cft77 setup.f
     cft77 coset.f
     cft77 soset.f
     cft77 reset.f
     cft77 meset.f
     cft77 ouset.f
     cft77 inpsum.f
     cft77 metext.f
     cft77 cald.f
     cft77 calc2.f
     cft77 prise.f
     cft77 sigmas.f
     cft77 calc3.f
     cft77 calcA.f
     cft77 output.f
     segldr -o iscst2 *.o


     The  command for compiling ISCST2 under  the SUN OS

environment is similar to the one for VAX Utrix 4.3.
     4.3.4.3  Running ISCST2.


     Before running ISCST2, the users need to  check the

meteorology data file and make sure the file name matches the

one in the  input file.  File  names in UNIX are case sensitive,

so the characters in the file name need to match the ones in

the input file.   Then the user can type:


     iscst2 outputfile


to run the  executable.


4.3.5 Advanced Topics.


     For more detailed information about porting and installing

the ISC2 models to other computer environments,  refer to Volume

III of the  ISC2 User's Guide.   Volume III provides a more

detailed description of the design and structure of the

computer code, including module calling trees,  data dictionary,

and a description of the model loop structures.   Volume III

also includes instructions for compiling the ISC2 models with

compilers that do not support the INCLUDE and  DO WHILE ... END

DO Fortran  language extensions.


                               4-15

-------
                         5.0 REFERENCES
Bowers, J.F., J.R. Bjorklund and C.S. Cheney, 1979:  Industrial
     Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model User's Guide. Volume
     I, EPA-450/4-79-030, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
     Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.

Bowers, J.R., J.R. Bjorklund and C.S. Cheney, 1979:  Industrial
     Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model User's Guide. Volume
     II, EPA-450/4-79-031, U.S. Environmental Protection
     Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina  27711.

Baumann, E.R. and R.K. Dehart, 1988:  Evaluation and Assessment
     of UNAMAP.  EPA/600/3-88/009, U.S. Environmental
     Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina
     27711.

Environmental Protection Agency, 1986:  Guideline for
     Determination of Good Engineering Practice Stack Height
     (Technical Support Document for the Stack Height
     Regulations) - Revised EPA-450/4-80-023R, U.S.
     Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
     North Carolina  27711.

Environmental Protection Agency, I987a:  Industrial Source
     Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model User's Guide - Second
     Edition (Revised) Volume I. EPA-450/4-88-002a, U.S.
     Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
     North Carolina  27711.

Environmental Protection Agency, 1987b:  Guideline on Air
     Quality Models (Revised) and Supplement A.
     EPA-450/2-78-027R, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
     Research Triangle Park, North Carolina  27711.

Rorex,  H.W., 1990:  Operational Review of the Support Center
     for Regulatory Air Models Bulletin Board Service.  U.S.
     Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
     North Carolina  27711.
                              5-1

-------

-------
          APPENDIX A. ALPHABETICAL  KEYWORD  REFERENCE

     This appendix provides an alphabetical listing of all of
the keywords used by the ISC2 models.  Each keyword is
identified as to the pathway for which it applies, the keyword
type (either mandatory or optional,  and either repeatable or
non-repeatable),  and with a brief description of the function
of the keyword.  For a more complete description of the
keywords, including a list of associated parameters, refer to
the Detailed Keyword Reference in Section 3 or the Functional
Keyword/Parameter Reference in Appendix B.
                              A-l

-------

-------
Keyword
ANEMHGHT
AVERTIME
AVEMIXHT
AVESPEED
AVETEMPS
BOUNDARY
BOUNDELV
BUILDHGT
BUILDWID
DAYRANGE
DAYTABLE
DCAYCOEF
Path
ME
CO
ME
ME
ME
RE
RE
SO
SO
ME
OU
CO
Type
M - N
M - N
M - R
0 - N
M - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - N
0 - N
Keyword Description
Input height of anemometer above stack
base
Averaging time(s) to process (up to four
short term plus period averages)
Average mixing height for each wind
speed, stability category and season
(Applies Only to Long Term)
Average (median) wind speed for each
speed category in the STAR summary
(Applies Only to Long Term)
Average ambient temperature for each
stability category and season (Applies
Only to Long Term)
Defines discrete polar receptor
locations corresponding to minimum plant
boundary distances for each 10 degree
sector
Defines terrain elevations for discrete
receptors specified with BOUNDARY
keyword
Building height values for each wind
sector
Building width values for each wind
sector
Specifies days or ranges of days to
process (default is to process all data
read in) , applies only to ISCST2
processing

Option to summaries for each averaging
period for each day processed. (Applies
to ISCST2 Only)

Optional decay coefficient for
exponential decay
Type:  M - Mandatory
       0 - Optional
N - Non-repeatable
R - Repeatable
                              A-2

-------
Keyword
DISCCART
DISCPOLR
DTHETADZ
ELEVUNIT
EMI S FACT
EMISUNIT
ERRORFIL
EVENTFIL
EVENTOUT
EVENTPER
EVENTLOC
FINISHED
FLAGPOLE
GRIDCART
GRIDPOLR
HALFLIFE
Path
RE
RE
ME
CO
SO
so
CO
CO
ou
EV
EV
ALL
CO
RE
RE
CO
Type
O - R
0 - R
O - R
O - N
O - R
0 - N
0 - N
O - N
M - N
M - R
M - R
M - N
0 - N
0 - R
0 - R
0 - N
Keyword Description
Defines the discretely placed
receptor locations referenced to a
Cartesian system
Defines the discretely placed
receptor locations referenced to a
polar system
Input optional vertical potential
temperature gradients
Defines input units for receptor
elevations (defaults to meters)
Optional input for variable emission
rate factors
Optional conversion factors for
emissions, concentrations, and
depositions
Option to generate detailed error
listing file (error file is mandatory
for CO RUNORNOT NOT case)
Specifies whether to generate an
input file for EVENT model (Applies
only to ISCST2)
Specifies the level of output
information provided by the EVENT
model
Describes data and averaging period
for an event
Describes receptor location for an
event
Identifies the end of inputs for a
particular pathway
Specifies whether to accept receptor
heights above local terrain (m) for
use with flagpole receptors , and
allows for a default flagpole height
to be specified
Defines a Cartesian grid receptor
network
Defines a polar receptor network
Optional half life used for
exponential decay
A-3

-------
Keyword
INITFILE
INPUTFIL
LOCATION
LOWBOUND
MASSFRAX
MAXIFILE
MAXTABLE
MODELOPT
MULTYEAR
PLOTFILE
POLLUTID
POSTFILE
RECTABLE
REFLCOEF
RUNORNOT
Path
CO
ME
SO
SO
SO
OU
ou
CO
CO
ou
CO
ou
RE
SO
CO
Type
O - N
M - N
M - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
M - N
O - N
0 - R
M - N
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
M - N
Keyword Description
Option to initialize model from file
of intermediate results generated by
SAVEFILE option
Describes input meteorological data
.file
Identifies coordinates for particular
source
Switch to use non-DFAULT option for
"lower bound" wake calculations,
controlled by sector
Optional input of mass fraction for
each settling velocity category
Option to list events exceeding a
threshold value to file (if CO
EVENTFIL option is used, these events
are included in the input file
generated for the EVENT model)
Option to summarize the overall
maximum values
Job control and dispersion options
Specifies that run is part of a
multi-year run, e.g., for PM-10 H6H in
five years
Option to write certain results to a
storage file suitable for input to
plotting routines
Identifies type of pollutant being
modeled
Option to write results to a mass
storage file for postprocessing
Option to output value (s) by receptor
Optional input of surface reflection
coefficients for each settling
velocity category
Identifies whether to run model or
process setup information only
A-4

-------
Keyword
SAVEFILE
SETVELOC
SRCGROUP
SRCPARAM
STARDATA
STARTEND
STARTING
SURFDATA
TERRHGTS
TITLEONE
TITLETWO
UAIRDATA
WDROTATE
WINDCATS
WINDPROF
Path
CO
SO
SO
SO
ME
ME
ALL
ME
CO
CO
CO
ME
ME
ME
ME
Type
0 - N
0 - R
M - R
M - R
0 - N
0 - N
M - N
M - N
O - N
M - N
0 - N
M - N
O - N
0 - N
O - R
Keyword Description
Option to store intermediate results
for later restart of the model after
user or system interrupt (Applies to
ISCST2 Only)

Input variables for optional settling
velocities
Identification of source groups
Identifies source parameters for a
particular source
Identifies which STAR summaries are
included in the meteorological data
file
Specifies start and end dates to be
read from input meteorological data
file (default is to read entire file) ,
applies only to ISCST2 processing

Identifies the start of inputs for a
particular pathway
Describes surface meteorological
station
Specifies whether to assume flat
terrain (default) or to allow use of
receptors on elevated terrain
First line of title for output
Optional second line of title for
output
Describes upper air meteorological
station
Wind direction rotation adjustment
Upper bound of wind speed categories
Input optional wind profile exponents
A-5

-------
       APPENDIX B.  FUNCTIONAL KEYWORD/PARAMETER REFERENCE

     This appendix provides a functional reference for the
keywords and parameters used by the input runstream files for
the ISC2 models.  The keywords are organized by functional
pathway, and within each pathway the order of the keywords is
based on the function of the keyword within the models.  The
pathways used by the models are as follows, in the order in
which they appear in the runstream file and in the tables that
follow:

     CO - for specifying overall job control options;
     SO - for specifying source information;
     RE - for specifying REceptor information  (ISCST2 and
          ISCLT2 models only);
     ME - for specifying MEteorology information and options;
     EV - for specifying EVent information (ISCEV2 model only);
          and
     OU - for specifying output options.

The pathways and keywords are presented in the same order as in
the Detailed Keyword Reference in Section 3, and in the Quick
Reference Card pull-out at the end of the manual.

     Two types of tables are provided for each pathway.  The
first table lists all of the keywords for that pathway,
identifies each keyword as to its type  (either mandatory or
optional and either repeatable or non-repeatable), and provides
a brief description of the function of the keyword.  The second
type of table, which takes up more than one page for most
pathways, presents the parameters for each keyword, in the
order in which they should appear in the runstream file where
order is important, and describes each parameter in detail.
Also indicated for certain keywords or parameter descriptions
are cases where the inputs apply on to a certain model, either
ISCST2, ISCEV2, or ISCLT2.

     The following convention is used for identifying the
different types of input parameters.  Parameters corresponding
                              B-l

-------
to secondary keywords which should be input "as is" are listed
on the tables with all capital letters and are underlined.
Other parameter names are given with an initial capital letter
and are not input "as is."  In all cases,  the parameter names
are intended to be descriptive of the input variable being
represented, and they often correspond to the Fortran variable
names used in the model code.  Parentheses around a parameter
indicate that the parameter is optional for that keyword.  The
default that is taken when an optional parameter is left blank
is explained in the discussion for that parameter.
                              B-2

-------
                                            TABLE  B-l

                    DESCRIPTION  OF  CONTROL PATHWAY  KEYWORDS
CO Keywords
STARTING
TITLEONE
TITLETWO
MODELOPT
AVERT I ME
POLLUTID
HALFLIFE
DCAYCOEF
TERRHGTS
ELEVUNIT
FLAGPOLE
RUNORNOT
EVENTFIL''
SAVEFILE^
INITFILE-5
MULTYEARJ
ERRORFIL
FINISHED
Type
M -
M -
0 -
M -
M -
M -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
M -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
M -
N
N
N
N
N
N
N1
N1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Keyword Description
Identifies the start of CONTROL pathway inputs
First line of title for output
Optional second line of title for output
Job control and dispersion options
Averaging time(s) to process
Identifies type of pollutant being modeled
Optional half life used for exponential decay
Optional decay coefficient
Specifies whether to assume flat terrain (default) or to allow use of receptors
on elevated terrain
Defines input units for receptor elevations (defaults to meters)
Specifies whether to accept receptor heights above local terrain (m) for use
with flagpole receptors, and allows for a default flagpole height to be
specified
Identifies whether to run model or process setup information only
Specifies whether to generate an input file for EVENT model (Applies to ISCST2
Only)
Option to store intermediate results for later restart of the model after user
or system interrupt (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Option to initialize model from file of intermediate results generated by
SAVEFILE option (Applies to 1SCST2 Only)
Option to process multiple years of meteorological data (one year per run) and
accumulate high short term values across years (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Option to generate detailed error listing file (error file is mandatory for CO
RUNORNOT NOT case)
Identifies the end of CONTROL pathway inputs
Type:
M - Mandatory
0 - Optional
N - Non-Repeatable
R - Repeatable
1)   Either HALFLIFE or DCAYCOEF may be specified.  If both cards  appear a warning message will  be  issued
     and the first value entered will be used  in calculations.   Default assumes a half life of 4 hours
     for SOp modeled in urban mode.

2)   The EVENTFIL keyword controls whether  or  not to generate an input file for the ISCEV2 (EVENT)  model.
     The primary difference between ISCST2  and ISCEV2 processing is  in the treatment of source group
     contributions.  The ISCST2 model treats the source groups independently, whereas the ISCEV2 model
     determines individual source contributions to particular events, such as the design concentrations
     determined from ISCST2, or user-specified events.  By specifying the EVENTFIL keyword,  an input
     runstream file will be generated that  can be used directly with the ISCEV2 model. The events
     included in the generated ISCEV2 model input file are defined by the RECTABLE and MAXIFILE  keywords
     on the OU pathway, and are placed in the  EVent pathway.

3)   The SAVEFILE and INITFILE keywords work together to implement the model's re-start capabilities.
     Since the MULTYEAR option utilizes the re-start features in a special way to accumulate high short
     term values from year to year,  it.cannot  be used together with  the SAVEFILE or INITFILE keyword in
     the same model run.
                                                B-3

-------
                       TABLE B-2
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
Keyword
TITLEONE
where:
TITLETWO
where:
MOOELOPT
where:
AVERT I ME
where:
AVERT 1 ME
where:
Parameters
Titlel
Titlel
First line of title for output, character string of up to 68
characters
Title2
TitleZ
Optional second line of title for output, character string of up
to 68 characters
D FAULT CONC RURAL GRDRIS NOSTD NOB ID NOCALH MSGPRO
or or
DEPPS URBAN
DFAULT
CONC
DEPOS
RURAL
URBAN
GRDRIS
NOSTD
NOB ID
NOCALM
MSGPRO
Specifies use of regulatory default options (final
rise, stack tip downwash, BID, calms processing,
"upper bound" wake calcs, default exponents and
DTDZ), overrides presence of GRDRIS. NOSTD. NOB1D.
NOCALM. and MSGPRO keywords
Specifies calculation of concentration values
Specifies calculation of deposition values
Specifies use of rural dispersion
Specifies use of urban dispersion
Option to use gradual plume rise
Option to use no stack- tip downwash
Option to use no buoyancy- induced dispersion
Option to bypass calms processing routine (ST only)
Option to use missing data processing routines
(ST only)
Timel Time2 Time3 Time4 MONTH PERjOO (ISCST2 and ISCEV2 only)
TimeN
MONTH
PERIOD
Nth optional averaging time (I, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12,
24-hr; number of periods limited by NAVE parameter)
Option to calculate MONTHly averages (counts toward
NAVE limit)
Option to calculate averages for the entire data
PERIOD
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC (ISCLT2 model)
WINTER SPRING SUMMER FALL or QUART 1 QUART2 OUART3 QUART4
MONTH SEASON OUARTR ANNUAL PERIOD
JAN
£11
5I£
WINTER
SPRING
SUMMER
FALL
QUART 1
QUART2
QUARTS
QUART4
MONTH
SEASON
QUARTR
ANNUAL
PERIOD
Option to calculate JANuary averages from STAR data
Option to calculate FEBruary averages from STAR data
Option to calculate DECember averages from STAR data
Option to calculate WINTER averages from STAR data
Option to calculate SPRING averages from STAR data
Option to calculate SUMMER averages from STAR data
Option to calculate FALL averages from STAR data
Option to calculate QUART1 averages from STAR data
Option to calculate OUART2 averages from STAR data
Option to calculate QUARTS averages from STAR data
Option to calculate QUART4 averages from STAR data
Option to calculate averages for all twelve MONTHS
Option to calculate averages for all four SEASONS
Option to calculate averages for all four QUARTeRs
Option to calculate annual values from an ANNUAL STAR
summary
Option to calculate averages for the entire data
PER 100
                          B-4

-------
                   TABLE B-2 (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND  PARAMETERS
POLLUTID
where:
HALFLIFE
where:
DCAYCOEF
where:
TERRHGTS
where:
ELEVUNIT
where:
FLAGPOLE
where:
Pollut
Pol tut
Identifies type of pollutant being modeled. Any name
of up to eight characters may be used, e.g., S02.
NOX. CO, PM10. TSP or OTHER. Selection of
S02 with the URBAN 0 FAULT options forces use of
a half life of 4 hours for exponential decay. Use
of PM10. PM-10 or OTHER allows for the use of the
MULTYEAR option.
Haflif
Haflif
Half life used for exponential decay (s)
Decay
Decay
Decay coefficient for exponential decay (s"1) = 0.693/HAFLIF
FLAT or ELEV
FLA!
ELEV

Specifies that flat terrain will be assumed for all
calculations (default)
Specifies that receptors may be located on elevated
terrain (chopped off at release height)
Note that if ELEVated receptors are allowed,
then receptor heights must be input on the RE
pathway, or they will be assumed to be 0.0.
METERS or FEET
METERS
FEE!
Specifies input units for terrain elevations of
meters
Specifies input units for terrain elevations of feet
Note: This keyword applies to receptor elevations
only.
(Flagdf)
Flagdf
Default value for height of (flagpole) receptors
above local ground level, a default value of 0.0 m
is used if this optional parameter is omitted
                          B-5

-------
                  TABLE  B-2  (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
RUNORNOT
where:
EVENT F1L
where:
SAVE FILE
where:
1NITFILE
where:
MULTYEAR
where:
ERRORFIL
where:
RUN or NOT
RUN
NOT
Indicates to run full model calculations
Indicates to process setup data and report errors,
but to not run full model calculations
(Evfile) (Evopt)
Evf i le
Evopt
Identifies the filename to be used to generate a file
for input to EVENT model (Default=EVENTFIL.INP)
Optional parameter to specify the level of output
detail selected for the EVENT model: either
SOCOHT or DETAIL (default is DETAIL if this para-
meter is omitted)
(Savfil) (Dayinc) (SavflZ)
Savfit
Dayinc
Savfl2
(Inifil)
InifH
Specifies name of disk file to be used for storing
intermediate results (default = TMP.FIL) file is
overwritten after each dump)
Number of days between dumps (optional: default is 1)
Optional second disk filename to be used on alternate
dumps - eliminates risk of system crash during the
dump. If blank, file is overwritten each time.

Specifies name of disk file of intermediate results
to be used for initializing run (default = TMP.FIL)
Savfil (Inifil)
Savfil
Inifil
Specifies name of disk file to be used for storing
results at end of the year
Optional name of disk file used for initializing the
results arrays from previous year(s). The Inifil
parameter is not used for the first year in the
multi-year run.
(Errfil) (DEBUG)
Errfil
DEBUG
Specifies name of detailed error listing file
(default = ERRORS. LST)
Option to provide detailed output for debugging
purposes, e.g., plume heights, sigmas, etc.
Generates Very Large Files -- Use with CAUTION!!!
                          B-6

-------
                                     TABLE B-3

                 DESCRIPTION  OF  SOURCE PATHWAY KEYWORDS
SO Keywords
STARTING
LOCATION
SRCPARAM
BUILDHGT
BUILDWID
LOUBOUND
EMISFACT
EMISUNIT
SETVELOC
MASSFRAX
REFLCOEF
SRCGROUP1
FINISHED
Type
M - N
M - R
M - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
0 - N
0 - R
0 - R
0 - R
M - R
M - N
Keyword Description
Identifies the start of SOURCE pathway inputs
Identifies coordinates for particular source
Identifies source parameters for a particular source
Building height values for each wind sector
Building width values for each wind sector
Switch to use non-DFAULT option for "lower bound" wake calculations, controlled
by sector
Optional input for variable emission rate factors
Optional conversion factors for emissions, concentrations.
and depositions
Input variables for optional settling velocities
Optional input of mass fraction for each settling velocity
Optional input of surface reflection coefficients for each
category
category
settling velocity
Identification of source groups
Identifies the end of SOURCE pathway inputs
1)   Source groups are treated independently for ISCST2. The ISCEV2 (EVENT) model provides the
    contribution from each source to the group total for each specified event.
                                         B-7

-------
                      TABLE B-4
DESCRIPTION OF SOURCE PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
Keyword
LOCATION
where:
SRCPARAM
where:
BUILDHGT
where:
BUILDUID
where:
Parameters
Srcid Srctyp Xs Ys (Zs)
Srcid
Srctyp
Xs
Ys
Zs
Srcid Ptemis
Vlemis
Aremis
Srcid
	 Em is
	 Hgt
Stktmp
Stkvel
Stkdia
Syinit
Szinit
Xinit
Source identification code (alphanumeric string
of up to eight characters)
Source type: POINT. VOLUME. AREA
x-coord of source location, SU corner for AREA (in m)
y-coord of source location, SU corner for AREA (in m)
Optional z- coord of source location (elevation above
mean sea level, defaults to 0.0 if omitted)
Stkhgt Stktmp Stkvel Stkdia
Relhgt Syinit Szinit
Relhgt Xinit
Source identification code
Source emission rate: in g/s for Ptemis or Vlemis,
g/s/m for Aremis for concentration or deposition
Source physical release height above ground (center
of height for VOLUME)
Stack gas exit temperature (K)
Stack gas exit velocity (m/s)
Stack inside diameter (m)
Initial lateral dimension of VOLUME source (m)
Initial vertical dimension of VOLUME source (m)
Length of side of square AREA source (m)
Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsbh(i), i=1,36 (16 for LT)
Srcid
Srcrng
Dsbh
Source identification code
Range of sources (inclusive) for which building
dimensions apply, entered as two alphanumeric
strings separated by a '-'
Array of direction-specific building heights (m)
beginning with 10 degree flow vector and increment-
ing by 10 degrees clockwise
Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsbw(i). i=1,36 (16 for LT)
Srcid
Srcrng
Dsbw
Source identification code
Range of sources (inclusive) for which building
dimensions apply
Array of direction-specific building widths (m)
beginning with 10 degree flow vector and increment-
ing by 10 degrees clockwise
                         B-8

-------
                  TABLE B-4  (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF SOURCE PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND  PARAMETERS
LOWBOUND
where:
EMISFACT
where:
EMI SUN IT
where:
Srcid (or Srcrng) Idswak(i), i=1,36 (16 for LT)
Srcid
Srcrng
Idswak
Source identification code
Range of sources (inclusive) for which LOWBOUND
option applies
Array of direction-specific wake option switches
beginning with 10 degree flow vector and increment-
ing by 10 degrees clockwise
(0=upper bound, 1-lower bound)
Srcid (or Srcrng) Qflag Qfact(i), i=1,n
Srcid
Srcrng
Qflag
Qfact
Emifac Emilbl
Emi f ac
Emilbl
Conlbl
Oebtbl
Source identification code
Range of sources (inclusive) for which emission rate
factors apply
Variable emission rate flag:
Short Term Model :
SEASON for seasonal; MONTH for monthly;
HROFDY for hour-of-day; STAR for speed-by-
stability; SEASHR for season-by-hour
Long Term Model:
SEASON for seasonal; MONTH for monthly;
SSTAB for season- by- stability; SSPEED for
season- by- speed; STAR for speed-by-stability;
SSTAR for season-by-speed-and-stability
Array of scalar emission rate factors, for:
SEASON, n=4; MONTH, n=12; HROFDY, n=24;
STAR. n=36; SSTAB, n=24; SSPEED, n=24;
SEASHR, n=96; SSTAR, n=144
Conlbl
or
Deplbl
Emission rate factor used to adjust units of output
(default value is 1.0 £06 for CONC for grains to
micrograms; and 3600. for DEPOS for grams/sec to
grams/hour;
Note that ISCLT2 emission rates are automatically
adjusted for the number of hours in the STAR period
for DEPOSition calculations)
Label to use for emission units (default is grams/sec) ,
Label to use for concentrations (default is miccograms/m )
Label to use for deposition (default is grams/m )
                         B-9

-------
                  TABLE B-4  (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF SOURCE PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND  PARAMETERS
SETVELOC
where:
MASSFRAX
where:
REFLCOEF
where:
SRCGROUP
where:
Srcid (or Srcrng) Vsn(i), 1=1, Mvs
Srcid
Srcrng
Vsn
Source identification code
Range of sources (inclusive) for which settling
velocities apply
Array of gravitational settling velocities (m/s)
Sreid (or Srcrng) Phi(i), i=1,Nvs
Srcid
Srcrng
Phi
Source identification code
Range of sources (inclusive) for which mass fractions
apply
Array of mass fractions for each settling velocity
category
Srcid (or Srcrng) Gamna(i), i=1,Nvs
Srcid
Srcrng
Gamma
Source identification code
Range of sources (inclusive) for which reflection
coefficients apply
Array of surface reflection coefficients for each
gravitational settling velocity category
Grpid Srcid's Srcrng 's
Grpid
Srcid's
Srcrng 's
Group ID (Grpid - ALL specifies group including all
sources), number of source groups limited by NGRP
parameter in the computer code
Discrete source IDs to be included in group
Source ID ranges to be included in group
Note: Card may be repeated with same Grpid if
more space is needed to specify sources
                         B-10

-------
                                     TABLE B-5

                DESCRIPTION OF RECEPTOR  PATHWAY  KEYWORDS

                       (APPLIES  TO ISCST2  AND ISCLT2)
RE Keywords
STARTING
GRIDCART
GRIDPOLR
DISCCART
DISCPOLR
BOUNDARY
BOUNDELV
FINISHED
Type
M
0
0
0
0
0
0
M
- N
- R1
- R1
- R1
- R1
- R1
- R
- N
Keyword Description
Identifies the start of RECEPTOR pathway inputs
Defines a Cartesian grid receptor network
Defines a polar receptor network
Defines the discretely placed receptor locations referenced
system
Defines the discretely placed receptor locations referenced
to a Cartesian
to a polar system
Defines discrete polar receptor locations corresponding to minimum plant
boundary distances for each 10 degree sector
Defines terrain elevations for discrete receptors specified
keyword
with BOUNDARY
Identifies the end of RECEPTOR pathway inputs
1)   At  least one of the following must be present:  GRIDCART,  GRIDPOLR, DISCCART, DISCPOLR, or
    BOUNDARY.  Multiple receptor networks can be specified in a single run, including both Cartesian
    and polar, up to an overall maximum controlled  by the NREC parameter.
                                        B-ll

-------
                       TABLE B-6
DESCRIPTION OF RECEPTOR PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
             (APPLIES  TO  ISCST2  AND ISCLT2)
Keyword
GRIDCART






where:
































Parameters
Net id STA
XYINC Xinit Xnum Xdelta Yinit Ynun Ydelta
or XPNTS Gridx! Gridx2 Gridx3 	 GridxN, and
YPNTS Gridy! Gridy2 Gridy3 	 GridyM
ELEV Row Zelevl ZelevZ Zelev3 ... ZelevN
FLAG Row Zflag! ZflagZ Zflag3 ... ZflagN
END
Net id

SIA

XYINC

Xinit
Xnun
Xdelta
Yinit
Ynun
Ydelta
XPNTS

Gridx!
GridxN
YPNTS

Gridyl
GridyN
ELEV
Row

Zelev

FLAG

Row

Zflag

END

Receptor network identification code (up to eight
alphanumeric characters)
Indicates STArt of GRIDCART subpathway, repeat for
each new Net id
Keyword identifying grid network generated from
x and y increments
Starting x-axis grid location in meters
Number of x-axis receptors
Spacing in meters between x-axis receptors
Starting y-axis grid location in meters
Number of y-axis receptors
Spacing in meters between y-axis receptors
Keyword identifying grid network defined by a series
of x and y coordinates
Value of first x-coordinate for Cartesian grid
Value of 'nth1 x-coordinate for Cartesian grid
Keyword identifying grid network defined by a series
of x and y coordinates
Value of first y-coordinate for Cartesian grid
Value of 'nth' y-coordinate for Cartesian grid
Keyword to specify that receptor elevations follow
Indicates which row (y-coordinate fixed) is being
input
An array of receptor terrain elevations for
a particular Row
Keyword to specify that flagpole receptor heights
follow
Indicates which row (y-coordinate fixed) is being
input
An array of receptor heights above local terrain
elevation for a particular Row (flagpole receptors)
Indicates END of GRIDCART subpathway, repeat for each
new Net id
                          B-12

-------
                                   TABLE B-6  (CONT.)

     DESCRIPTION  OF  RECEPTOR  PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND  PARAMETERS

                         (APPLIES  TO  ISCST2 AND  ISCLT2)
GRIDPOLR
Net id
              or
       STA
       PRIG
       DIST
       DDIR
       GD1R
       ELEV
       FLAG
       END
Xinit   Yinit
Ringl   Ring2   Ring3   ...  RingN
Dir1    Oir2    Dir3    ...  OirN,
Dirnum  Dirini  Dirinc
Dir  Zelevl  ZelevZ  Zelev3  ...  ZelevN
Oir  Zflagl  Zflag2  Zflag3  ...  ZflagN
  where:
Net id
            STA
           PRIG
           Xinit
           Yinit
           DIST
           Ringl
           RingN

           ODIR

           DiM
           DirN

           GDIR
           D i rnum
           Dirini
           Dirinc

           ELEV
           Dir
           Zelev
           Dir
           Zflag


           END
 Receptor network  identification code (up to eight
   alphanumeric characters)
 Indicates STArt of GRIDPPLR subpathway, repeat for
   each new Netid
 Pptional keyword  to specify the origin of the polar
   network (assumed to be at x=0, y=0 if omitted)
 x-coordinate for  origin of polar network
 y-coordinate for  origin of polar network
 Keyword to specify distances for the polar network
 Distance to the first ring of polar coordinates
 Distance to the 'nth1 ring of polar coordinates

 Keyword to specify discrete direction radials for the
   polar network
 First direction radial in degrees (1 to 360)
 The 'nth' direction radial in degrees (1 to 360)

 Keyword to specify generated direction radials for
   the polar network
 Number of directions used to define the polar system
 Starting direction of the polar system
 Increment (in degrees) for defining directions

 Keyword to specify that receptor elevations follow
 Indicates which direction is being input
 An array of receptor terrain elevations for a
   particular direction radial
 Keyword to specify that flagpole receptor heights
   follow
 Indicates which direction is being input
 An array of receptor heights above local terrain
   elevation for a particular direction (flagpole
   receptors)
 Indicates END of  GRIDPOLR subpathway, repeat for each
   new Netid
                                             B-13

-------
                   TABLE B-6  (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF RECEPTOR PATHWAY KEYWORDS  AND PARAMETERS
             (APPLIES TO ISCST2 AND ISCLT2)
D1SCCART
where:
DISCPOLR
where:
BOUNDARY
where:
BOUNDELV
where:
Xcoord Ycoord 
-------
                 TABLE B-7
DESCRIPTION OF METEOROLOGY PATHWAY KEYWORDS
ME Keywords
STARTING
INPUTFIL
ANEMHGHT
SURFDATA
UAIRDATA
STARTEND
DAYRANGE
WDROTATE
UINOPROF
DTHETADZ
WINDCATS
AVESPEED
AVETEMPS
AVEMIXHT
FINISHED
Type
M -
M -
M -
M -
M -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
M -
M -
M -
N
N
N
N
N
N
R
N
R
R
N
N
R
R
N
Keyword Description
Identifies the start of METEOROLOGY pathway inputs
Describes input meteorological data file
Input height of anemometer above stack base
Describes surface meteorological station
Describes upper air meteorological station
Specifies start and end dates to be read from input meteorological data file
(default is to read entire file). (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Specifies days or ranges of days to process (default is to process all data
read in). (Applies to 1SCST2 Only)
May be used to correct for alignment problems of wind direction measurements,
or to convert wind direction from to flow vector
Input optional wind profile exponents
Input optional vertical potential temperature gradients
Input upper bounds of wind speed categories, five values input - sixth category
is assumed to have no upper bound. (Applies tp. Short Term Only)
Average (median) wind speed for each speed category in the STAR summary.
(Applies to ISCLT2 Only)
Average ambient temperatures for each stability category and season. (Applies
to ISCLT2 Only)
Average mixing heights for each wind speed, stability category and season.
(Applies to 1SCLT2 Only)
Identifies the end of METEOROLOGY pathway inputs
                    B-15

-------
                        TABLE B-8
DESCRIPTION OF METEOROLOGY PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
Keyword
INPUTFIL
where:
ANEMHGHT
where:
SURFDATA
where:
UAIRDATA
where:
STARTEND
where:
Parameters
Metfil (Format)
Metfil
Format
Specify filename for meteorological input file
Specify format for input file: options are to provide
FORTRAN read format for ASCI! file,
(YR.MN.DY.HR.AFV (or UD).WS,TA,KST,ZIRUR,ZIURB);
use default ASCII format (4I2,2F9.4,F6.1,I2,2F7.1)
if blank;
use free format if FREE;
use default ASCII format with hourly UINOPROF and
DTHETADZ if CARD ; or
use unformatted RAMMET file if UNFORM
Zref (Zrunit)
Zref
Zrunit
Stanum Year
Stanum
Year
Name
Xcoord
Ycoord
Reference (anemometer) height above ground for
wind speed measurement; also assumed to be height
above stack base
Units of Zref: METERS or FEET (default is METERS)
(Name) (Xcoord Ycoord)
Station number, e.g. 5-digit UBAN number for NUS
surface station
Year of data being processed (four digits)
Station name (optional)
x-coordinate of station location (m) (optional)
y-coordinate of station location (m) (optional)
Stanum Year (Name) (Xcoord Ycoord)
Stanum
Year
Name
Xcoord
Ycoord
Strtyr Strtmn
Strtyr
Strtmn
Strtdy
Strthr
Endyr
Endmn
Enddy
Endhr
Station number, e.g. 5-digit UBAN number for NUS
upper air station
Year of data being processed (four digits)
Station name (optional)
x-coordinate of station location (m) (optional)
y-coordinate of station location (m) (optional)
Strtdy (Strthr) Endyr Endmn Enddy (Endhr) (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Year of first record to be read
Month of first record to be read
Day of first record to be read
Hour of first record to be read (optional)
Year of last record to be read
Month of last record to be read
Day of last record to be read
Hour of last record to be read (optional)
Note: File read begins with hour 1 of the start
date and ends with hour 24 of the end date
if Stahr and Endhr are omitted.
                           B-16

-------
                     TABLE  B-8  (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF METEOROLOGY PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
DAYRANGE
where:
STARDATA
where:
WDROTATE
where:
UINDPROF
where:
OTHETADZ
where:
Rangel Range2 Range3 ... RangeN (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Rangel
RangeN
First range of days to process, either as individual
day (XXX) or as range (XXX-YYY); days may be input
as Julian dates (XXX) or as month and day (XX/YY)
The 'nth1 range of days to process
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC (ISCLT2 Model)
WINTER SPRING SUMMER FALL or QUART 1 QUART2 QUARTS QUART4
MONTH SEASON QUARTR ANNUAL
JAN
FEB
DEC
WINTER
SPRING
SUMMER
FALL
QUART 1
QUART2
QUARTS
QUART4
MONTH
SEASON
QUARTR
ANNUAL
PERIOD
Option to calculate JANuary averages from STAR data
Option to calculate FEBruary averages from STAR data
Option to calculate DECember averages from STAR data
Option to calculate WINTER averages from STAR data
Option to calculate SPRING averages from STAR data
Option to calculate SUMMER averages from STAR data
Option to calculate FALL averages from STAR data
Option to calculate QUART 1 averages from STAR data
Option to calculate QUART2 averages from STAR data
Option to calculate QUARTS averages from STAR data
Option to calculate QUART4 averages from STAR data
Option to calculate averages for all twelve MONTHS
Option to calculate averages for all four SEASONS
Option to calculate averages for all four QUARTeRs
Option to calculate annual values from an ANNUAL STAR
summary
Option to calculate averages for the entire data
PERIOD
Rotang
Rotang
Specifies angle (in degrees) to rotate wind direction
measurements to correct for alignment problems;
value of Rotang is subtracted from WD measurements,
i.e., rotation is counterclockwise; may also be
used to adjust input of wind direction from values
to flow vector values by setting Rotang = 180
Stab Profl Prof2 Prof3 Prof4 ProfS Prof6
Stab
Prof!
Prof2
Prof3
Prof4
ProfS
Prof6
Specifies stability category (A through F) for the
following six values by wind speed class
Wind speed profile exponent for first speed class
Wind speed profile exponent for second speed class
Wind speed profile exponent for third speed class
Wind speed profile exponent for fourth speed class
Wind speed profile exponent for fifth speed class
Wind speed profile exponent for sixth speed class
Note: Card is repeated for each stability class
Stab Dtdzl Dtdz2 Dtdz3 Dtdz4 DtdzS Dtdz6
Stab
Dtdzl
Dtdz2
Dtdz3
Dtdz4
DtdzS
Otdz6
Specifies stability category (A through F) for the
following six values by wind speed class
Vertical temperature gradient for first speed class
Vertical temperature gradient for second speed class
Vertical temperature gradient for third speed class
Vertical temperature gradient for fourth speed class
Vertical temperature gradient for fifth speed class
Vertical temperature gradient for sixth speed class
Note: Card is repeated for each stability class
                           B-17

-------
                     TABLE B-8 (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF METEOROLOGY PATHWAY KEYWORDS  AND PARAMETERS
WINDCATS
where:
AVESPEED
where:
AVETEMPS
where:
AVEMIXHT
where:
Usl Us2 Ws3 Us4 UsS (Applies to Short Term Only)
rw"si
Ws2
Ws3
Us4
UsS
Upper bound of first wind speed category (m/s)
Upper bound of second wind speed category (m/s)
Upper bound of third wind speed category (m/s)
Upper bound of fourth wind speed category (m/s)
Upper bound of fifth wind speed category (m/s)
(sixth category is assumed to have no upper bound)
Ws1 Us2 Us3 Us4 UsS Us6 (Applies to ISCLT2 Only)
Us1
Us2
Us3
US4
UsS
Ws6
Median speed of first wind speed category (m/s)
Median speed of second wind speed category (m/s)
Median speed of third wind speed category (m/s)
Median speed of fourth wind speed category (m/s)
Median speed of fifth wind speed category (m/s)
Median speed of sixth wind speed category (m/s)
Aveper Ta1 Ta2 Ta3 Ta4 TaS Tao (Applies to ISCLT2 Only)
Aveper
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
TaS
Ta6
Specifies averaging period (see AVERTIME keyword)
for the following temperatures (K)
Average temperature of stability category A
Average temperature of stability category B
Average temperature of stability category C
Average temperature of stability category 0
Average temperature of stability category E
Average temperature of stability category f
Note: Card is repeated for each averaging period
Aveper Stab Mixhtl MixhtZ Mixht3 Mixht4 MixhtS Mixht6
(Applies to ISCLT2 Only)
Aveper
Stab
Mixht!
MixhtZ
Mixht3
Mixht4
MixhtS
Mixht6
Specifies averaging period (see AVERTIME keyword)
for the following mixing heights (m)
Specifies stability category (A through F) for the
following six values by wind speed class
Average mixing height for first speed class
Average mixing height for second speed class
Average mixing height for third speed class
Average mixing height for fourth speed class
Average mixing height for fifth speed class
Average mixing height for sixth speed class
Note: Card is repeated for each stability class
and for each averaging period
                            B-18

-------
              TABLE B-9
DESCRIPTION OF EVENT PATHWAY KEYWORDS
    (APPLIES  TO  ISCEV2  MODEL ONLY)
EV Keywords
STARTING
EVENTPER
EVEMTLOC
FINISHED
Type
M - N
M - R
M - R
M - N
Keyword Description
Identifies the start of EVENT pathway inputs
Describes data and averaging period for an event
Describes receptor location for an event
Identifies the end of EVENT pathway inputs
                 B-19

-------
                                         TABLE  B-10

        DESCRIPTION  OF EVENT  PATHWAY  KEYWORDS  AND  PARAMETERS

                          (APPLIES  TO  ISCEV2 MODEL  ONLY)
 Keyword
Parameters
 EVENTPER
Evname  Aveper  Grpid  Date
   where:
            Name

            Grpid
            Aveper
            Date
             Specify name of event to be processed (e.g. H2H24ALL),
               (up to eight alphanumeric characters)
             Specify source group ID for event
             Specify averaging period for event
             Specify data period for event (ending YYMMDDHH for
               averaging period)
 EVENTLOC
Evname   XR= Xr    YR= Yr   (Zelev)  (Zflag)
               or
       RNG= Rng  DIR= Dir  (Zelev)  (Zflag)
   where:
            Evname
            15=
            RNG=
            DIR=
            Zelev
            Zflag
             Specify name of event to be processed  (e.g. H2H24ALL),
               (up to eight alphanumeric characters)
             X-coordinate for event (discrete Cartesian receptor)
             Y-coordinate for event (discrete Cartesian receptor)
             Distance range for event (discrete polar receptor)
             Radial direction for event (discrete polar receptor)
             Terrain elevation for event (optional)
             Receptor height above ground for event (optional)
Note:     EVENT locations can be  input as either discrete Cartesian receptors (XR=.  YR=) or as discrete
         polar receptors (RNG=.  DIR=).  Events that are specified in the file generated by the ISCST2
         model (CO  EVENTFIL card) are always given as discrete Cartesian coordinates.  Discrete polar
         receptors  are assumed to be relative to an origin of (0,0).
                                              B-20

-------
                                        TABLE  B-ll

                   DESCRIPTION  OF  OUTPUT PATHWAY KEYWORDS
OU Keywords
STARTING
RECTABLE
MAXTABLE
DAYTABLE
MAXIFILE
POSTFJLE1
PLOT FILE1
EVENTOUT^
FINISHED
Type
H -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
0 -
M -
H -
N
R
R
N
R
R
R
N
N
Keyword Description
Identifies the start of OUTPUT pathway inputs
Option to specify value(s) by receptor for output
Option to summarize the overall maximum values
Option to print summaries for each averaging period for each day processed.
(Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Option to list events exceeding a threshold value to file (if CO EVENTFIL
option is used, these events are included in the input file generated for the
EVENT model). (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Option to write results to a mass storage file for postprocessing. (Applies to
ISCST2 Only)
Option to write certain results to a storage file suitable for input to
plotting routines
Specifies the level of output information provided by the EVENT model.
(Applies to 1SCEV2 Only)
Identifies the end of OUTPUT pathway inputs
1)  POSTFILE is used to output concurrent concentration values for particular source groups and
    averaging times across the receptor network, suitable  for postprocessing, such as might be done
    for implementing the intermediate terrain policy. PLOTFILE is used to output specific design
    values, such as second high concentrations, across the receptor network, suitable for plotting
    concentration contours.

2)  EVENTOUT is the only keyword on the OU pathway for the Short Term EVENT model.
                                             B-21

-------
                     TABLE B-12
DESCRIPTION OF OUTPUT PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
Keyword
RECTABLE
where:
MAXTABLE
where:
Parameters
Aveper FIRST SECOND . „ . SIXTH (Short Term Model) or
Aveper 1ST 2ND . . . 6TH (Short Term Model)
INDSRC and/or SRCGRf (Long Term Model)
Aveper
FIRST
SECOND
SIXTH
181
2ND
6TH
INDSRC
SRCGRP
Averaging period to summarize with high values
(keyword ALLAVE specifies all averaging periods)
Select summaries of FIRST highest values by receptor
Select summaries of SECOND highest values by receptor
Select summaries of SIXTH highest values by receptor
Select summaries of 1ST highest values by receptor
Select summaries of 2ND highest values by receptor
Select summaries of 6TH highest values by receptor
Mote: If two keywords are input separated by a
dash (e.g. FIRST-THIRD), then summaries of
all high values in that range are provided.
The number of high values allowed is con-
trolled by the NVAL parameter in the computer
code (initially set at 3). Also, if the
CO EVENTFIL keyword is exercised, then the
events generated by the RECTABLE keyword are
included in the input file for EVENT model.
Specifies that summaries of individual source values
for each receptor point will be provided
Specifies that summaries of source group values for
each receptor point will be provided
Note: Either INDSRC or SRCGRP or both may be
specified
Aveper Maxnum (Short Term Model)
Maxnum INDSRC and/or SRCGRP and/or SOCONT (Long Term Model)
Aveper
Maxnum
INDSRC
SRCGRP
SOCOMT
Averaging period to summarize with maximum values
(keyword ALLAVE specifies all averaging periods)
Specifies number of overall maximum values to
summarize (number of maximum values permitted is
limited by the NMAX parameter in the computer code,
initially set at 50 for Short Term and 10 for Long
Term)
Specifies that summaries of maximum values for
individual sources will be provided (independent of
source group maxima)
Specifies that summaries of maximum values by source
group will be provided
Specifies that summaries of individual source contri-
butions for locations of maximum source group
values will be provided
Note: Any combination of Long Term parameters
is acceptable
                         B-22

-------
                  TABLE B-12 (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION OF OUTPUT PATHWAY KEYWORDS AND PARAMETERS
DAYTABLE
where:
MAX] FILE
where:
POST FILE
where:
PLOT FILE
where:
EVENTOUT
where:
Avperl Avper2 Avper3 . . . (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Avper!
Averaging period to summarize with values by receptor
for each day of data processed (keyword ALLAVE for
first parameter specifies all averaging periods)
Aveper Grpid Thresh Filnam (Funit) (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Aveper
Grpid
Thresh
Filnam
Funit
Specifies averaging period for list of values equal to
or exceeding a threshold value
Specifies source group to be output to file
Threshold value (e.g. NAAQS) for list of exceedances
Name of disk file to store maximum values
Optional parameter to specify the file unit
Note: If the CO EVENTFIL keyword is exercised,
then the events generated by the MAXIFILE
keyword are included in the input file for
the EVENT model.
Aveper Grpid Format Filnam (Funit) (Applies to ISCST2 Only)
Aveper
Grpid
Format
Filnam
Funit
Aveper Grpid
Aveper Grpid
Aveper
Grpid
Hivalu
Filnam
Funit
Specifies averaging period to be output to file,
e.g., 24 for 24-hr averages, PERIOD for period
averages
Specifies source group to be output to file
Specifies format of file, either UNFORH for
unformatted files or PLOT for formatted files for
plotting
Specifies filename for output file
Optional parameter to specify the file unit
Hivalu Filnam (Funit) (ISCST2 short term values)
Filnam (Funit) (ISCLT2 model and ISCST2
PERIOD averages)
Specifies averaging period to be output to file,
e.g., 2£ for 24-hr averages, PERIOD for period
averages, WINTER for winter averages, etc.
Specifies source group to be output to file
Specifies high value summary (e.g. FIRST. SECOND .
1ST. 2ND, etc.) to be output to file
Specifies filename for output file
Optional parameter to specify the file unit
SOCONT or DETAIL (Applies to ISCEV2 Onlv)
SOCONT
DETAIL

Specifies the option to provide source contribution
information only in the event output
Specifies the option to include hourly concentrations
for each source and hourly meteorological data in
the event output
                         B-23

-------
                 APPENDIX  C.  UTILITY  PROGRAMS

C.I CONVERTING INPUT RUNSTREAM FILES - STOLDNEW

     The ISCST2C.ZIP file contains a PC-executable file,
STOLDNEW.EXE, which is a file conversion utility program that
may be used to convert old ISCST model input files to the
proper format for the ISCST2 model.  To run the file conversion
utility, type STOLDNEW at the DOS prompt.  The program will
prompt the user for the name of the old ISCST input file being
converted and for the name of the new file to be generated in
the ISCST2 format.   The program will also generate a file
called SUMMARY.OLD that contains a summary of model inputs in
the same format as would appear at the beginning of an old
ISCST model run.

     Even though the STOLDNEW utility should convert most ISCST
input files without any difficulty, users are strongly
encouraged to check the results of STOLDNEW carefully before
using the input file with the ISCST2 model.  The purpose of
this is primarily to check for rounding of the inputs in the
conversion process.  Some inputs that may vary over a
considerable range, such as the emission rate,  are converted
using an Fortran G format with a full seven significant digits.
However, most inputs are converted using a Fortran F format
specifier that uses a fixed number of decimal places.  Some
rounding is possible on some of these fixed format inputs,
depending on how many decimal places were used for inputting
the data in the old format.

     The STOLDNEW utility program will prompt the user to input
additional filenames where appropriate.  Specifically, the
program prompts for the name of the meteorological data file
(including a DOS path if desired), which is inserted into the
appropriate field on the ME INPUTFIL keyword.  If the option
for using unformatted preprocessed data was specified for the
                              C-l

-------
old ISCST input, then the meteorology data filename should be
the name of the file containing the preprocessed data.  If the
"card image" meteorological data option was specified for the
old ISCST model input, then the hourly "card image"
meteorological data are included as part of the old runstream
option file.  In this case, the STOLDNEW program prompts for
the name of the file that it uses for writing out the card
image data in the ASCII format used by the ISCST2 model.  The
format field on the ME INPUTFIL card will include the default
ASCII format used by the ISCST2 model (which would have the
same effect as leaving the field blank), unless the card image
data includes hourly wind profile exponents or hourly vertical
potential temperature gradients.  In the latter case, STOLDNEW
will insert the CARD keyword for the meteorological data format
on the ME INPUTFIL card.

     Another case where the STOLDNEW program will prompt for a
filename is when the option for generating a separate file of
concurrent concentration values is selected in the old
runstream file  (ISW(5)=1).  In this case, the program will
request the name to use for the concentration file, and will
insert that name in the appropriate field for the OU POSTFILE
keyword inputs.  A separate POSTFILE card will be generated for
each combination of averaging period and source group, with all
of the concentration results being written to a single file on
file unit 20.  This will result in a concentration file that is
nearly identical to the file generated by the original ISCST
model.

     It should be noted that the ISCST2 model does not support
the use of hourly decay coefficients, which were allowed for
the original ISCST model when "card image" meteorological data
were used.  If hourly decay coefficients are detected in the
original ISCST runstream file, then STOLDNEW will write a
warning message to the screen and within the new runstream file
indicating that the hourly values of decay coefficients will be
                              C-2

-------
ignored.  The only other option available in the original ISCST
model that is not available with ISCST2 is the option to list
the meteorological data for each day processed as part of the
main printed output file.  In lieu of this option, a separate
utility program, called METLIST, is available with the ISC2
package that produces a listing of meteorological data for the
period of interest.  The METLIST program is described in more
detail in Section C.3.

C.2 CONVERTING UNFORMATTED RAMMET FILES TO ASCII FORMATTED
     FILES - BINTOASC

     The ISCST2D.ZIP file contains the BINTOASC utility
program.  This is a PC-executable program that converts
unformatted (binary) meteorological data files generated by the
RAMMET or MPRM preprocessor programs to the default ASCII
format used by the ISCST2 Model.  The ASCII data file consists
of sequential hourly records.

     To run this program, type BINTOASC at the DOS prompt.  The
program will prompt for the name of the unformatted data input
file and the name of the ASCII formatted output file.  The
BINTOASC program will convert unformatted data files generated
by the Microsoft version of PCRAMMET available on the SCRAM
BBS, as well as files generated by versions of RAMMET, PCRAMMET
or MPRM compiled with either the Lahey or the Ryan-McFarland
FORTRAN compilers.  The program will write a message to the
screen indicating which of the three types of files has been
identified.  If the program encounters an error reading the
data file, then a message will be written to the screen
indicating which compilers are supported.  The program may also
have encountered a read error due to the use of "short
integers" (INTEGER*2) in the storing of some of the data in the
unformatted file.  The program assumes that all integer
variables occupy four bytes of storage.
                              C-3

-------
     Once the type of unformatted file has been determined the
program will prompt the user as follows:

     Do You Want to Convert the Entire Data File? (Y or N)

If the user responds with either a '₯' or a 'y', then the
program will convert the entire data file (up to 366 days for a
leap year).  If the user responds with either an 'N1 or an 'n1,
then the program will prompt the user as follows:

     Enter the Start Date and End Date (e.g. 1,365);

The user can select a single day or a range of  (Julian) days
within the year to convert to the ASCII file.

     If the BINTOASC program encounters a calm hour in the
unformatted data file, which is identified by a wind speed of
1.0 m/s and a flow vector equal to the flow vector for the
previous hour, then it writes out a wind speed of 0.0 for that
hour, which is interpreted by the ISC2 Short Term models as a
calm hour.  The flow vector variable written to the ASCII file
corresponds to the randomized flow vector in the unformatted
data file.  The structure of the RAMMET-generated unformatted
data file and the default ASCII file are described in detail in
Appendix F.

C.3 LISTING HOURLY METEOROLOGICAL DATA - METLIST

     The ISCST2D.ZIP file contains the METLIST utility program.
This is a PC-executable program that creates a listing file of
meteorological data for a specified day or range of days, which
can be sent to a printer.  The program lists one day of data
per page, with appropriate column headers for the
meteorological variables.  The previous version of the ISCST
model included an option to print the hourly meteorological
data within the main output file.  This option has not been
                              C-4

-------
included in the ISCST2 model.  The user can use the METLIST
program instead to create a listing for the data period of
interest, and refer to that listing as needed to examine the
meteorological data.  Since the ISCST2 model also uses ASCII
sequential hourly files (see Sections 3.5.1 and C.I), the
meteorological data file can be examined directly through an
editor or listing program, or the ASCII file itself can be
printed.  Therefore, the need for an option to list
meteorological data within the program has been reduced.  Also,
the ISCEV2 model contains the option to list the hourly
meteorological data for specific events that are of interest to
the user.

     To use this program, type METLIST from the command line
prompt.  The program will prompt the user for the following
information:

     Enter Meteorology File Name; (Enter the name of the file
     containing the meteorological data)
     Options for File Formats are;
     ASCII
     UNFORM
     FREE
     CARD
     Fortran format specifier
     Enter File Format; (Select the format of the
     meteorological file by entering one of the four keywords
     above or by entering a Fortran format specifier, e.g.
     (4I2,2F9.4,F6.1,I2,2F7.1) )
     Enter Output File Name;  (Enter the name of the file to
     which the meteorological data listing will be stored)
     Enter Day Range;  (Enter the Julian start day and Julian
     end day, e.g. 1,10)

     The ASCII data format option for the METLIST program
corresponds with the default ASCII format used by the ISCST2
and ISCEV2 models.  The Fortran specifier for this format is
' (4I2,.2F9.4,F6.1,I2,2F7.1) '.  The other format options are
                              C-5

-------
described in Section 3.5.1.1.  The METLIST program was compiled
using the Microsoft FORTRAN Compiler, and therefore only
supports unformatted data files generated by Microsoft versions
of PCRAMMET, RAMMET or MPRM.  To use unformatted data files
generated by either the Lahey or the Ryan-McFarland compiler,
the user should first convert the unformatted data file to the
default ASCII format using the BINTOASC utility program
(described in Section C.2), and then use the METLIST program
and select the ASCII format option.
                              C-6

-------
             APPENDIX D. BATCH FILE DESCRIPTIONS FOR
                   COMPILING THE MODELS ON A PC

D.I MICROSOFT/DOS VERSIONS

     The  ISC2 models were developed on an  IBM-compatible  PC
using the Microsoft Optimizing FORTRAN Compiler (Version  5.1).
The models are provided on  the Support Center for Regulatory
Air Models (SCRAM) Bulletin Board System  (BBS)  as executable
files designed to run on DOS PCs.  These DOS  versions were
compiled  with the Microsoft emulator  library  option that  allows
the models to utilize a math coprocessor if available, but also
run in the absence of one.   The batch file provided for
compiling the ISCST2 model  with the Microsoft compiler
(FLISCST2.BAT)  includes the following commands:

        FL /c /FPi /AH /DMICRO ISCST2.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH SETUP.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH COSET.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH SOSET.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH RESET.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH MESET.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH OUSET.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH INPSUM.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH METEXT.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH CALC1.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH CALC2.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH PRISE.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH SIGMAS.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH CALC3.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH CALC4.FOR
        FL /c /FPi /AH OUTPUT.FOR
        LINK 3ISCST2.LRF
where /c  instructs the compiler to compile without linking; the
/FPi option instructs the compiler to use  in-line instructions
for floating point operations and link with an emulator library
(uses 80x87 coprocessor if  present);  and the  /AH option that
the huge  memory model be used, allowing arrays or common  blocks
to exceed 64K.   The /DMICRO option for the ISCST2.FOR source
file instructs the compiler to use the conditional compilation
blocks defined for the Microsoft compiler.  These enable  the
PC-specific features, such  as writing the  date and time on each
page of the output file and writing an update to the screen on
the status of processing.   To implement the PC-specific code,
                                D-l

-------
the user should delete the  field 'CPC'  used to comment out
certain lines in the ISCST2.FOR file.   Each of the source files
(*.FOR) for the ISCST2 model  are listed separately in this
batch file, which assumes that all of  the source code modules
and the include files are in  a single  directory, or that the
compiler has been setup to  search for  the include files in the
appropriate directory.  The command line options for the
compiler make full use of the compiler's optimization routines
to speed up the code.  To disable optimization, the /Od option
would be added.  Disabling  optimization will increase the
model's execution time by about 10 percent, and will also
increase the size of the code.

     Once the source files  have been compiled successfully, and
object (.OBJ) files have been generated for each source file,
the model is ready to be linked and an executable file created.
The executable file on the  SCRAM BBS was linked using a memory
overlay manager so that only  certain portions of the code are
resident in memory at any given time.   This allows for a more
efficient use of available  memory by the model, and therefore
allows for larger runs to be  performed than would be possible
without using overlays.  This is accomplished with the
following command line for  the linker provided with the
Microsoft compiler, which is  included in the link response
file, ISCST2.LRF:

     /E ISCST2+SETUP+(INPSUM)+(COSET)+(SOSET)+(RESET)+(MESET)+(OUSE T)+(METEXT+CALC1+CALC2+CALC3+
       PRISE+SIGMAS+CALC4)+(OUTPUT)

The /E option instructs the linker to produce a packed
executable file that occupies less disk space.  The linker will
prompt for the name of the  executable file  (which will default
to ISCST2.EXE), and the names of any special library modules to
link  (none are needed).  With this memory overlay structure,
the ISCST2 and SETUP modules  are always memory resident, and
any module or group of modules within parentheses are overlayed
into the same area of memory  only when needed.  Linking without
                               D-2

-------
the overlay manager will increase the minimum load size  for  the

executable  file by  about 160K for the ISCST2  model.



      Similar batch  files are available  for  compiling and

linking the ISCLT2  and  ISCEV2 models.   The  batch file for the

ISCLT2  model, FLISCLT2.BAT,  includes the following commands:



          FL /c /FPi /AH /DMICRO ISCLT2.FOR
          FL /C /FPi /AH SETUPLT.FOR
          Ft /c /FPi /AH COSETLT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH SOSETLT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH RESETLT.FOR
          FL /C /FPi /AH MESETLT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH OUSETLT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH INPSUMLT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH METEXTLT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH CALC1LT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH CALC2LT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH CALC3LT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH PRISELT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH SIGMASLT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH OUTPUTLT.FOR
          LINK 3ISCLT2.LRF

The only difference between  this and the file for the ISCST2

model is the source file names.   This file  invokes the

following command line  from  the  ISCLT2.LRF  link  response file:
      /E ISCLT2+SETUPLT+(COSETLT)+(SOSETLT)+(RESETLT)+(MESETLT)+(OUS ETLT)+(INPSUMLT)+(METEXTLT+
         CALC1LT+CALC2LT+CALC3LT+PRISELT+SIGMASLT+CALC4LT>+(OUTPUTLT )


The batch  file  for  the  ISCEV2 model,  FLISCEV2.BAT,  includes  the

following  commands:



          FL /c /FPi /AH /DMICRO EVISCST2.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVSETUP.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVCOSET.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVSOSET.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVMESET.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVEVSET.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVOUSET.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVINPSUM.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVMETEXT.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVCALC1.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVCALC2.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVPRISE.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVSIGMAS.FOR
          FL /c /FPi /AH EVOUTPUT.FOR
          LINK 3ISCEV2.LRF

 which invokes  the  following command from the ISCEV2.LRF link

response file:
                                     D-3

-------
     /E EVISCST2-i-EVSETUP+(EVCOSET)+(EVSOSET)+(EVMESET>+(EVEVSET)+
-------
which assumes  that all of the source  code modules and the
include files  are in a single directory,  or that the compiler
has been  setup to search for the  include  files in the
appropriate  directory.  The 'UP L32 @ISCST2EM.LRF' links the
model using  the ISCST2EM.LRF link response file, which  includes
the following  command:

        ISCST2+SETUP+COSET+SOSET+RESET+MESET+OUSET+INPSUM+METEX T+CALCHCALC2+
        CALC3+CALC4+PRISE+SIGMAS+OUTPUT
There are no memory overlays used for the Lahey versions,  since
they make use  of extended memory.

     Similar batch files are available for the ISCLT2
(F77LISCL.BAT)  and the ISCEV2 (F77LISCE.BAT)  models, except  for
the specification of the appropriate  source file names  provided
in the previous section.  The executable  filenames for  these
models are ISCLT2EM.EXE and ISCEV2EM.EXE.
                               D-5

-------

-------
        APPENDIX  E.  EXPLANATION OF  ERROR MESSAGE  CODES

E.I INTRODUCTION

     One of the significant operational improvements of the
ISC2 models is an improved error handling procedure.  The input
runstream is checked to identify parameters that are missing or
potentially in error, and the input source and meteorological
data are checked and flagged for possible erroneous values.

     The ISC2 models use a "defensive programming" approach to
eliminate as much as possible of the user's work in debugging
the input runstream file.  Also,  a great deal of effort has
been made to eliminate the possibility of run time errors, such
as "divide by zero," and to point out questionable input data.
Error messages are reported to the user in two ways.  A summary
of messages is provided in the main output result file,  and the
user can also request a detailed message listing file.

     Message Summary;  Whether the user selects a detailed
error listing file or not, the ISC2 models output a summary of
messages within the output result file.  This message table
gives the number of messages of each type,  together with a
detailed list of all the fatal errors and warning messages.
During setup processing, if no errors or warnings are
generated, then the model simply reports to the user that
"SETUP Finishes Successfully."

     Detailed Message Listing File;   The ISC2 models provide
the option of saving a detailed list of all messages generated
by the model in a separate output file.  The user can select
this option by specifying the keyword "ERRORFIL" followed by a
filename inside the control pathway. For example,  the following
statements will save all the error messages to an ASCII text
file named "errormsg.out":
                              E-l

-------
        CO STARTING
           ERRORFIL  errormsg.out
        CO FINISHED

E.2 THE OUTPUT MESSAGE SUMMARY

     There are two message summaries provided in the standard
output file of the ISC2 models.  The first one is located after
the echo of input runstream file images and before the input
data summary.  This summary will take one of two forms,
depending on whether any fatal error or non-fatal warning
messages were generated, and also depending on whether the
option to RUN or NOT to run was selected on the CO RUNORNOT
card.  If there are no errors or warnings generated during the
setup processing, and the RUN option was selected, then the
model simply reports that "SETUP Finishes Successfully."  If
any fatal errors or warning messages were generated during the
setup processing, or if the option NOT to run was selected,
then a more detailed summary is provided.  This summary
provides a message count for each type of message, and a
detailed listing of each fatal error and warning message
generated.  The second message summary table is located at the
very end of the standard output result file, and it sums up the
messages generated by the complete model run - both setup
processing and run-time processing.
                              E-2

-------
     An example  of a setup processing message summary is shown
in Figure E-l.
       *** Message Summary For The ISC2 Model Setup ***

        	 Summary of Total Messages 	
       A Total of
       A Total of
       A Total of
0 Fatal Error Message(s)
0 Warning Message(s)
0 Information Message(s)
         ******** FATAL ERROR MESSAGES ********
                  *** NONE ***

         ********  WARNING MESSAGES  ********
                  *** NONE ***

         ***********************************
         *** SETUP Finishes Successfully ***
         ***********************************
         FIGURE E-l.   EXAMPLE  OF AN ISC2  MESSAGE SUMMARY


E.3 DESCRIPTION  OF THE DETAILED MESSAGE  LAYOUT


     Three types of messages  can be produced by the models
during  the processing of input runstream images and during
model calculations.   These are described briefly below:


         Errors that will halt any further processing,  except  to
         identify additional error conditions (type  E);

         Warnings that do not  halt processing but indicate
         possible errors or suspect conditions (type W); and

         Informational messages that may  be of interest to the
         user but have no direct bearing  on the validity of the
         results  (type I).

     The messages have a consistent structure which contains
the pathway ID,  indicating which pathway the messages are
generated from;  the message type followed by a three-digit

message number;  the line number of the input runstream image

file for setup messages (or the meteorology hour number for
                                 E-3

-------
runtime messages);  the name of the module  (e.g.  the subroutine
name) from which  the message is generated; a detailed message
corresponding to  the message code; and an  8-character simple
hint to help the  user spot the possible source  of the problem.

     The following  is an example of a detailed  message
generated from  the  CO pathway:
       CO E100   8 EXPATH: Invalid Pathway Specified. The Troubled Pathway is FF
The message  syntax is explained in more detail  below (values in
parentheses  give the column numbers within  the  message line for
each element):
                               E-4

-------
      PW Txxx LLLL nrnnimn: MESSAGE Hints
                            L
Hints to help you determine the nature
of errors (keyword, pathway where the
error occurs,...etc.) (73:80)
                           Detailed message for this code (22:71)
                           Name of the code module from which the
                           message is generated (14:19)
                           The line number of the input runstrearn image
                           file where the message occurs; If message
                           occurs in runtime operation, the hour number
                           of the meteorology file is given (9:12)
                         •> Numeric message code (a 3-digit number)(5:7)
                         •> Message type (E, U, I) (4:4)
                           Pathway ID (CO, SO, RE, ME, EV, or OU) (1:2)
                           or MX for met data extraction,
                           or CN for calculation messages
      The  three  message types are  identified  with the letters  E
(for errors), W (for  warnings), and I  (for informational
messages).   The 3-digit message codes  are grouped  into  general
categories  corresponding to the different stages of the
processing.  Theses categories are:

     100 - 199   Input  Runstreain Image Structure Processing
     200 - 299   Parameter Setup Processing
     300 - 399   Data and Quality Assurance Processing
     400 - 499   Run Time Message Processing
     500 - 599   Input/Output Message Processing

A detailed  description of  each of the  message codes currently
used in the models is provided in the  next section.
                                   E-5

-------
E.4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE ERROR/MESSAGE CODES


     INPUT RUNSTREAM IMAGE STRUCTURE PROCESSING, 100-199


     This type of message indicates problems with the basic

syntax and/or structure of the input runstream image.  Typical

messages include errors like "Missing mandatory keyword",

"Illegal Keyword", ..., etc.  If a fatal error of this kind is

detected in a runstream image, a fatal error message is written

to the message file and any attempt to process data is

prohibited, although the remainder of the runstream file is

examined for other possible errors.  If a warning occurs, data

may still be processed, although the inputs should be checked

carefully to be sure that the condition causing the warning

does not indicate an error.
100  Invalid Pathway Specified.  The pathway ID should be a 2
     character string.  It should be one of the following: CO
     for control pathway, SO for source pathway, RE for
     receptor pathway (or EV for event pathway for ISCEV2
     model), ME for meteorology data setting pathway, and OU
     for output format pathway.  Its position is normally
     confined to columns 1 and 2 (1:2) of the input runstream
     file.  However, the model does allow for a shift of the
     entire input runstream file of up to 3 columns.  If the
     inputs are shifted, then all input records must be shifted
     by the same amount.  The invalid pathway is repeated at
     the end of the message.

105  Invalid Keyword Specified.  The keyword ID should be an
     8-character string.  Its position is normally confined to
     columns 4 to 11  (4:11) of the input runstream file.
     However, the model does allow for a shift of the entire
     input runstream file of up to 3 columns.  If the inputs
     are shifted, then all input records must be shifted by the
     same amount.  There should be a space between keyword ID
     and any other data fields.  For a list of valid keywords,
     refer to Appendix A or Appendix B.  The invalid keyword is
     repeated at the end of the message.

110  Keyword is Not Valid for This Pathway.  The input keyword
     is a valid 8-character string, but it is not valid for the
     particular pathway.  Refer to Appendix A, Appendix B or
     Section 3 for the correct usage of the keyword.  The
     invalid keyword is repeated at the end of the message.


                              E-6

-------
115  Starting and Finishing Statements do not match. Only One
     STARTING and one FINISHED statement,respectively, is
     allowed at the very beginning and the very end of each
     pathway block.  Check the position and frequency to make
     sure the input runstream file meets the format
     requirement.  The pathway during which the error occurs is
     included at the end of the message.

120  Pathway is Out of Sequence.  The pathways are not input in
     the correct order.  The correct order is CO,  SO, RE, ME,
     and OU for the ISCST2 and ISCLT2 models, and CO, SO, ME,
     EV, and OU for the ISCEV2 model.  The offending pathway is
     given as a hint.

125  Missing FINISHED Statement - Runstream file is incomplete.
     One or more FINISHED statements are missing.   A 5-digit
     status variable is given as a hint.  Each digit
     corresponds to a pathway in the appropriate order, and is
     a 'I1 if the pathway is complete and a '0' if the FINISHED
     is missing.  For example, a status of '10111' indicates
     that the SO pathway was missing a FINISHED statement.
     Normally such an error will generate additional messages
     as well.

130  Missing Mandatory Keyword.  To run the model, certain
     mandatory keywords must present in the input runstream
     file.  For a list of mandatory keywords, see Appendix A or
     Appendix B.  For more detailed information on keyword
     setup, see the description of message code 105.  The
     missing keyword is included with the message.

135  Duplicate Non-repeatable Keyword Encountered.  More than
     one instance of a non-repeatable keyword is encountered.
     For a list of non-repeatable keywords, see Appendix A or
     Appendix B.  The repeated keyword is included with the
     message.

140  Invalid Order of Keyword.  A keyword has been placed out
     of the acceptable order.  The order for most keywords is
     not critical, but the relative order of a few keywords is
     important for the proper interpretation of the input data.
     The keyword reference in Section 3 identifies any
     requirements for the order of keywords.   The keyword that
     was out of order is included with the message.

145  Conflicting Options: MULTYEAR and Re-Start Option.  The
     multiple year option for processing PM-10 values makes use
     of the re-start routines in the model with some slight
     changes to handle the period averages from year to year.
     As a result, the MULTYEAR keyword cannot be specified with
     either the SAVEFILE or INITFILE keywords.
                              E-7

-------
150  Conflicting Options:  MULTYEAR for Wrong Pollutant.  The
     multiple year option is provided specifically for the
     processing of PM-10 values to obtain the "high-sixth-high
     in five years" design value.   Its treatment of the high
     short term values for multiple year periods is not
     consistent with existing air quality standards for other
     pollutants.  To use the MULTYEAR option, the user must
     specify a pollutant type (on the CO POLLUTID card) of
     PM-10, PM10, or OTHER.

155  Conflicting Decay Keyword.  The ISC2 models allow for the
     user to specify the rate of exponential decay either in
     terms of the half-life (HALFLIFE keyword) or the decay
     coefficient (DCAYCOEF keyword).  If both keywords are
     specified, then only the first one will be used, and
     inputs for the second one will be ignored.

160  Duplicate ORIG Secondary Keyword for GRIDPOLR.  Only one
     origin card may be specified for each grid of polar
     receptors.  The network ID for the effected grid is
     included with the message.

170  Invalid Secondary Key for Receptor GRID.  The network ID
     for the effected grid is included with this message. Refer
     to Appendix B for the correct syntax of secondary
     keywords.

175  Missing Secondary Keyword END for Receptor Grid.  The END
     secondary keyword is required for each grid of receptors
     input by the user (keywords GRIDCART and GRIDPOLR).  It
     signals the end of inputs and triggers the processing of
     data for that particular network.

180  Conflicting Secondary Keyword for Receptor Grid.  Two
     incompatible secondary keywords have been input for the
     same grid of receptors, e.g. GDIR and DDIR for the keyword
     GRIDPOLR, where GDIR specifies to generate directions with
     uniform spacing, and DDIR specifies that discrete,
     non-uniform directions are being specified.

185  Missing Receptor Keywords.  No Receptors Specified.  Since
     none of the RE pathway keywords are mandatory, a separate
     error check is made to determine if any of the RE keywords
     are specified.  At least one of the following keywords
     must be present: GRIDCART, GRIDPOLR, DISCCART, DISCPOLR,
     or BOUNDARY.

190  No Keywords for OU Pathway and No PERIOD Averages. ' All of
     the OU pathway keywords are optional, and in fact the
     model will run if no keywords are specified on the OU
     pathway as long as PERIOD averages are being calculated.
     However, if there are no OU keywords and no PERIOD
                              E-8

-------
     averages, then there will be no output generated by the
     model, and this fatal error message will be generated.

195  DAYTABLE Option Used With SAVEFILE or INITFILE.  This is a
     non-fatal warning message that is generated to warn the
     user that the DAYTABLE results, which outputs concurrent
     short term results as they are calculated, will be
     overwritten if the model run is re-started.
     PARAMETER SETUP PROCESSING, 200-299

     This type of message indicates problems with processing of

the parameter fields for the runstream images.  Some messages

are specific to certain keywords, while others indicate general

problems, such as an invalid numeric data field.  If a fatal

error of this kind is detected in a runstream image, a fatal
error message is written to the message file and any attempt to

process data is prohibited, although the remainder of the

runstream file is examined for other possible errors.  If a

warning occurs, data may still be processed, although the

inputs should be checked carefully to be sure that the

condition causing the warning does not indicate an error.


200  Missing Parameter(s).  No options were selected for the
     indicated keyword.   Check Appendix B for the list of
     parameters for the keyword in question.

201  Not Enough Parameters Specified For The Keyword.  Check if
     there are any missing parameters following the indicated
     keyword.  See Appendix B for the required keyword
     parameters.

202  Too Many Parameters Specified For The Keyword.  Refer to
     Appendix B or Section 3 for the list of acceptable
     parameters.

203  Invalid Parameter Specified.  The inputs for a particular
     parameter are not valid for some reason.  Refer to
     Appendix B or Section 3.  The invalid parameter is
     included with the message.

204  Option Parameters Conflict.  Forced by Default to:  Some
     parameters under the indicated keyword conflict with the
     other model parameters setting.  Refer to Appendix B or
     Section 3 for the correct parameter usage.  The default
     setting is specified with the message.
                              E-9

-------
205  No Option Parameter Setting.   Forced by Default to:  No
     setting was specified for a particular parameter.   Refer
     to Appendix B or Section 3 for the correct parameter
     usage.  The default setting is specified with the message.

206  Regulatory DFAULT Specified With Non-default Option.  The
     DFAULT option on the CO MODELOPT card always overrides the
     specified non-default option,  and a warning message is
     generated,

207  No Parameters Specified.  Default Values Used For.  The
     keyword for which no parameters are specified is included
     with the message.  Refer to Appendix B or Section 3 for a
     discussion of the default condition.

208  Illegal Numerical Field Encountered.  The model may have
     encountered a non-numerical character for a numerical
     input, or the numerical value may exceed the limit on the
     size of the exponent, which could potentially cause an
     underflow or an overflow error.

209  Negative Value Appears For A Non-negative Variable.  The
     effected variable name is provided with the message.

210  Number of Short Term Averages Exceeds Maximum.  The user
     has specified more short term averages on the CO AVERTIME
     card than the model array limits allow.  This array limit
     is controlled by the NAVE PARAMETER specified in the
     MAIN1.INC file.  The value of NAVE is provided with the
     message.

211  Duplicate Parameter(s) Specified for Keyword.  A duplicate
     parameter or set of parameters has been specified for the
     indicated keyword.  For example, if more than one POSTFILE
     keyword is included for the same averaging period and
     source group, then this error message will be generated.

212  END Encountered Without (X,Y)  Points Properly Set.  This
     error occurs during setting up the grid of receptors for a
     Cartesian Network.  This message may occur for example if
     X-coordinate points have been specified without any
     Y-coordinate points for a particular network ID.

213  ELEV Inputs Inconsistent With Option: Input Ignored.  This
     happens when the user inputs elevated terrain heights for
     receptors when the TERRHGTS option is FLAT.  The input
     terrain heights are ignored and the model proceeds with
     FLAT terrain modeling.

214  ELEV Inputs Inconsistent With Option: Defaults Used.  This
     happens when the user does not input elevated terrain
     heights for receptors when the TERRHGTS option is ELEV.
     The model assumes that the missing terrain heights are at


                              E-10

-------
     0.0 meters for those receptors and proceeds with ELEV
     terrain modeling.

215  FLAG Inputs Inconsistent With Option:  Input Ignored.  This
     happens when the user inputs receptor  heights above ground
     for flagpole receptors when the FLAGPOLE keyword option
     has not been specified.  The input flagpole heights are
     ignored in the model calculations.

216  FLAG Inputs Inconsistent With Option:  Defaults Used.  This
     happens when the user does not input receptor heights
     above ground for flagpole receptors when the FLAGPOLE
     keyword option has been specified.  The model assumes that
     the missing flagpole heights are equal to the default
     value specified on the CO FLAGPOLE card.  If no default
     height is specified on the FLAGPOLE card, then a default
     of 0.0 meters is assumed.

217  More Than One Delimiter In A Field.  For example, 12//34
     is an illegal input data item for the  DAYRANGE card, and
     STACK1—STACK-20 is an illegal specification for a range
     of sources.

218  Number of (X,Y)  Points Not Match With  Number Of ELEV Or
     FLAG. Check the number of elevated terrain heights or
     flagpole receptor heights for the gridded network
     associated with the indicated line number in the runstream
     file.

219  Number Of Receptors Specified Exceeds  Maximum.  The user
     has specified more receptors on the RE pathway than the
     model array limits allow.  This array  limit is controlled
     by the NREC PARAMETER specified in the MAIN1.INC file. The
     value of NREC is provided with the message.

220  Missing Origin (Use Default = 0,0) In  GRIDPOLR.  This is a
     non-fatal warning message to indicate  that the ORIG
     secondary keyword has not been specified for a particular
     grid of polar receptors.  The model will assume a default
     origin of (X=0,  Y=0).

221  Missing Distance Setting In Polar Network.  No distances
     have been provided (secondary keyword  DIST) for the
     specified grid of polar receptors.

222  Missing Degree Or Distance Setting In  Polar Network.
     Missing a secondary keyword for the specified grid of
     polar receptors.

223  Missing Distance or Degree Field.  No  data fields have
     been specified for the indicated secondary keyword.
                             E-ll

-------
224  Number of Receptor Networks Exceeds Maximum.   The user has
     specified more receptor networks of gridded receptors on
     the RE pathway than the model array limits allow.  This
     array limit is controlled by the NNET PARAMETER specified
     in the MAIN1.INC file.   The value of NNET is provided with
     the message.

225  Number of X-Coords Specified Exceeds Maximum.  The user
     has specified more X-coordinate values for a particular
     grid of receptors than the model array limits allow.  This
     array limit is controlled by the IXM PARAMETER specified
     in the MAIN1.INC file.   The value of IXM is provided with
     the message.

226  Number of Y-Coords Specified Exceeds Maximum.  The user
     has specified more Y-coordinate values for a particular
     grid of receptors than the model array limits allow.  This
     array limit is controlled by the IYM PARAMETER specified
     in the MAIN1.INC file.   The value of IYM is provided with
     the message.

227  No Receptors Were Defined on the RE Pathway.   Either
     through lack of inputs or through errors on the inputs, no
     receptors have been defined.

228  Default(s) Used for Missing Parameters on Keyword.  Either
     an elevated terrain height or a flagpole receptor height
     or both are missing for a discrete receptor location.
     Default value(s) will be used for the missing
     parameter(s).

229  Too Many Parameters - Inputs Ignored on Keyword.  Either
     an elevated terrain height or a flagpole receptor height
     or both are provided when the corresponding option has not
     been specified.  The unneeded inputs are ignored.

230  Not Enough Numerical Values Specified.  For example, less
     than 36 distance fields may have been specified for a
     particular group of BOUNDARY receptors.

231  Too Many Numerical Values Specified.  For example, more
     than 36 distance fields may have been specified for a
     particular group of BOUNDARY receptors.

232  Number Of Specified Sources Exceeds Maximum.   The user has
     specified more sources than the model array limits allow.
     This array limit is controlled by the NSRC PARAMETER
     specified in the MAIN1.INC file.  The value of NSRC is
     provided with the message.

233  Building Dimensions Specified for a Non-POINT Source.
     Building dimensions can only be specified for a POINT
                              E-12

-------
     source, since the VOLUME and AREA source algorithms do not
     include building downwash.

234  Too Many Sectors Input.   For example,  the user may have
     input too many building heights or widths for a particular
     source.

235  Number of Source Groups Specified Exceeds Maximum.  The
     user has specified more source groups  than the model array
     limits allow.  This array limit is controlled by the NGRP
     PARAMETER specified in the MAIN1.INC file.  The value of
     NGRP is provided with the message.

236  Not Enough BUILDHGTs Specified for a Source ID.  There
     should be 36 building heights for Short Term and 16 for
     Long Term.

237  Not Enough BUILDWIDs Specified for a Source ID.  There
     should be 36 building widths for Short Term and 16 for
     Long Term.

238  Not Enough LOWBOUNDs Specified for a Source ID.  There
     should be 36 lower bound flags specified for Short Term
     and 16 for Long Term.

239  Not Enough QFACTs Specified for a Source ID.  The number
     of variable emission rate factors specified for a
     particular source is less than the model expects based on
     the variable emission rate flag.  Check the EMISFACT
     keyword on the SO pathway in Appendix  B of Section 3 for
     the appropriate number.

240  Inconsistent Number of Settling Velocity Categories for a
     particular source.  The number of parameters must be the
     same for the SETVELOC, MASSFRAX and REFLCOEF keywords for
     a particular source.

242  No Settling/Removal Categories Specified for Source ID.
     There were no settling/removal categories specified for
     the indicated source.  When modeling for total deposition,
     the user must include the SETVELOC, MASSFRAX and REFLCOEF
     keywords for each source.

244  Too Many Settling and Removal Parameters specified for a
     particular source.  The limit is controlled by the NVSMAX
     PARAMETER in the computer code, set initially to 20.

245  Number of Settling/Removal Categories  Exceeds Maximum. The
     user has specified more settling/removal categories than
     the model array limits allow.  This array limit is
     controlled by the NVSMAX PARAMETER specified in the
     MAIN1.INC file.  The value of NVSMAX is provided with the
     message.


                              E-13

-------
248  No Sources Were Defined on the SO Pathway.   There must be
     at least one LOCATION card and one SRCPARAM card to define
     at least one source on the SO pathway.   Either no cards
     were input or there were errors on the inputs.

250  Duplicate XPNT/DIST or YPNT/DIR Specified for GRID.  One
     of the grid inputs, either an X-coordinate, Y-coordinate,
     polar distance range or polar direction, has been
     specified more than once for the same grid of receptors.
     This generates a non-fatal warning message.

252  Duplicate Receptor Network ID Specified.  A network ID for
     a grid of receptors (GRIDCART or GRIDPOLR keyword) has
     been used for more that one network.

255  Boundary Receptor Distances Not Defined Yet.  The user has
     input the BOUNDELV keyword for a particular source before
     any BOUNDARY keyword has been specified for that source.

260  Number of Emission Factors Exceeds Maximum.  The user has
     selected an option for variable emission rate factors that
     exceeds the array storage limit for emission rate factors.
     The array limit is controlled by the NQF PARAMETER
     specified in the MAIN1.INC file.  The value of NQF is
     provided with the message.

270  Number of High Values Specified Exceeds Maximum.  The user
     has selected a high short term value on the OU RECTABLE
     card that exceeds the array storage limit for high values
     by receptor.  The array limit is controlled by the NVAL
     PARAMETER specified in the MAIN1.INC file.   The value of
     NVAL is provided with the message.

280  Number of Maximum Values Specified Exceeds Maximum.  The
     user has selected a value for the number of overall
     maximum values on the OU MAXTABLE card that exceeds the
     array storage limit for overall maximum values.  The array
     limit is controlled by the NMAX PARAMETER specified in the
     MAIN1.INC file.  The value of NMAX is provided with the
     message.

290  Number of Events Specified Exceeds Maximum.  The user has
     specified more events than the ISCEV2 model array limits
     allow.  The array limit is controlled by the NEVE
     PARAMETER specified in the EVMAINl.INC file.  The value of
     NEVE is provided with the message.


     SETUP DATA AND QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCESSING, 300-399
     This type of message indicates problems with the actual

values of the parameter data on the input runstream image.  The
basic structure and syntax of the input card is correct, but

                              E-14

-------
one or more of the inputs is invalid or suspicious.  These

messages include quality assurance checks on various model

inputs.  Typical messages will tell the consistency of

parameters and data for the setup and run of the model.  If a

fatal error of this kind is detected in a runstream image, a

fatal error message is written to the message file and any

attempt to process data is prohibited. If a warning occurs,

data may or may not be processed, depending on the processing

requirements specified within the run stream input data.


300  Specified Source ID Has Not Been Defined Yet.  The message
     indicates that the user attempts to use a source ID on a
     keyword before defining this source ID on a SO LOCATION
     card.  It could indicate an error in specifying the source
     ID, an omission of a LOCATION card, or an error in the
     order of inputs.

310  Attempt to Define Duplicate LOCATION Card for Source.
     There can be only one LOCATION card for each source ID
     specified.  The source ID is included with the message.

315  Attempt to Define Duplicate SRCPARAM Card for Source.
     There can be only one SRCPARAM card for each source ID
     specified.  The source ID is included with the message.

320  Source Parameter May Be Out-of-Range for Parameter.  The
     value of one of the source parameters, may be either too
     large or too small.  The name of the parameter is provided
     with the message.  Use the line number provided to locate
     the card in question.

325  Negative Exit Velocity (Set=1.0E-5) for Source ID.  The
     exit velocity for the specified source ID was input as a
     negative value.  Since the model currently cannot handle
     sources with downward momentum, the exit velocity is set
     to a very small value (l.OE-5 m/s) and modeling proceeds.
     This non-fatal message is generated to warn the user that
     the input may be in error.

330  Mass Fraction Parameters Do Not Sum to 1. (within +/- 2
     percent) for a particular source.

332  Mass Fraction Parameter Out-of-Range for a particular
     source.  Must be between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive.

334  Reflection Coefficient Out-of-Range for a particular
     source.  Must be between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive.
                              E-15

-------
340  Possible Error in the Anemometer Height.   The value of the
     anemometer height may be either too large or too small

350  Julian Day Out Of Range.  This error occurs if the Julian
     Day selected is less than zero or greater than 366.  Check
     ME setup to ensure the Julian Day selection.

355  Specified Averaging Period Not Being Calculated.  This is
     a non-fatal warning message for the ISCLT2 model generated
     when average temperatures or mixing heights are specified
     for a STAR averaging period that was not specified on the
     CO AVERTIME card.  The inputs will be ignored, and
     processing will continue.

360  2-digit Year Specified.  Valid for the range 1901-2099.
     Four-digit years are valid for the entire range of
     Gregorian dates, but two digit years are accepted.

362  Averaging Time Conflict:  PERIOD with ANNUAL Data.  The
     PERIOD average is not compatible with the specification of
     an ANNUAL STAR summary on the CO AVERTIME card or the ME
     STARDATA card.

364  Averaging Time Conflict:  PERIOD with MONTH and SEASON or
     QUARTR.  The PERIOD average is not compatible with the
     presence of monthly STAR summaries and seasonal or
     quarterly summaries in the same data file.

366  Possible Averaging Time Conflict:  PERIOD Average Only.
     The CO AVERTIME card has specified the PERIOD average
     only.  There could be a conflict unless the ME STARDATA
     card is used to specify the STAR summaries in the data
     file.

368  Averaging Time Conflict:  PERIOD Average with No STARDATA.
     The ISCLT2 model cannot process the PERIOD average unless
     the STAR summaries in the data file are identified, either
     through the CO AVERTIME card or the ME STARDATA card.

369  Averaging Time Conflict:  Both SEASON and QUARTR.  The
     ISCLT2 model cannot process both seasonal and quarterly
     STAR summaries in the same model run, since they occupy
     the same areas in the data storage.

370  Invalid Date: 2/29 In a Non-leap Year.  The year has been
     identified as a leap year, and a date of 2/29 (February
     29) has been specified on the DAYRANGE card.  Check the
     year and/or the date specification.

380  This Input Variable is Out-of-Range.  The indicated value
     may be too large or too small.  Use the line number to
     locate the card in question, and check the variable for a
     possible error.


                              E-16

-------
390  Invalid Averaging Period Specified for the Event.  An
     invalid averaging period has been specified for the event
     name indicated for the ISCEV2 model.  This may be an
     averaging period that was not selected on the CO AVERTIME
     card, or it may be an averaging period of greater than 24
     hours, which cannot be handled by ISCEV2.

395  Monthly QFACT Specified With No Monthly Averages.  The
     monthly variable emission rate option for the ISCLT2 model
     can only be used with monthly STAR summaries.

398  STAR Data Not Available for the Specified Average.  The
     STAR summaries identified on the ME STARDATA card do not
     include one of the averaging periods selected on the CO
     AVERTIME card for the ISCLT2 model.
     RUNTIME MESSAGE PROCESSING, 400-499

     This type of message is generated during the model run.

Setup processing has been completed successfully, and the

message is generated during the performance of model

calculations.  Typical messages will tell the information and

error during the model run.  If a fatal error of this kind is

detected during model execution, a fatal error message is

written to the message file and any further processing of the

data is prohibited.  The rest of the meteorological data file

will be read and quality assurance checked to identify

additional errors.  If a warning occurs, data may or may not be

processed, depending on the processing requirements specified

within the run stream input data.


400  No Convergence Reached in SUB. CUBIC.  The CUBIC module is
     used to solve a cubic equation for the Schulman-Scire BLP
     plume rise and for the vertical virtual distance for URBAN
     mode.  The routine uses Newton's method, which is an
     iterative approach to determining the solution to the
     cubic equation.  This message is generated if the routine
     does not converge within 24 iterations.  The message is
     provided for informational purposes and processing will
     continue.  The date of occurrence is provided with the
     message.

410  Flow Vector Out-of-Range.  The flow vector must be between
     0 and 360 degrees, inclusive.  The date of occurrence is
     provided with the message  (in the form of year, month,
     day, hour as YYMMDDHH)


                              E-17

-------
420  Wind Speed Out-of-Range.   The wind speed value may be
     either too large or too small.  An error is generated if
     the speed is less than 0.0,  and a warning is generated if
     the speed is greater than 30.0 m/s.  The date of
     occurrence is provided with the message (in the form of
     year, month, day, hour as YYMMDDHH).

430  Ambient Temperature Data Out-of-Range.  The ambient
     temperature value may be either too large or too small. An
     warning is generated if the temperature is less than 250.0
     K or greater than 320 K.   The date of occurrence is
     provided with the message (in the form of year, month,
     day, hour as YYMMDDHH).

440  Calm Hour Identified in Meteorology Data File.  This
     message is generated if a calm hour is identified, and
     provides the date of occurrence (in the form of year,
     month, day, hour as YYMMDDHH).  The message will be
     generated whether or not the calms processing option is
     used.

450  Error in Meteorology File - Record Out of Sequence.  There
     is an error in the sequence of the hourly meteorological
     data file.  The message also provides the date of
     occurrence  (in the form of year, month, day, hour as
     YYMMDDHH).

460  Missing Hour Identified in Meteorology Data File.  At
     least one of the meteorological variables is missing or
     invalid for the hour specified  (in the form of year,
     month, day, hour as YYMMDDHH).  If the missing data
     processing option is not used, then this message will be
     generated and any further calculations with the data will
     be aborted.  The model will continue to read through the
     meteorological data file and check the data.

470  Mixing Height Value is Less Than or Equal to 0.0.  This is
     an informational message that may indicate an error in the
     meteorological data file.  Since the plume will always be
     above a mixing of 0.0 or less, no calculations are
     performed for the hour specified (in the form of year,
     month, day, hour as YYMMDDHH).

480  Sum of STAR Frequencies Does Not Total to 1.0.  The ISCLT2
     model accepts STAR data files with either normalized
     frequencies or with a frequency count.  For normalized
     frequencies, the sum of the STAR frequencies should total
     1.0.  If the sum is less than 0.98 or greater than 1.02,
     this non-fatal warning message is generated.  The actual
     sum of the frequencies for each STAR summary is included
     in the printed output file at the end of the listing for
     the STAR frequency input.  The frequency array is not
                              E-18

-------
     automatically normalized to 1.0 as was done by the
     original ISCLT model.


     INPUT/OUTPUT MESSAGE PROCESSING, 500-599

     This type of message is generated during the model input

and output. Typical messages will tell the type of I/O

operation  (e.g., opening, reading or writing to a file), and

the type of file.  If a fatal error of this kind is detected in

a runstream image, a fatal error message is written to the

message file and any attempt to process data is prohibited.  If

a warning occurs, data may or may not be processed, depending

on the processing requirements specified within the run stream

input data.


500  Fatal Error Occurs During Opening of the Data File.  The
     file specified can not be opened properly.  This may be
     the runstream file itself, the meteorological data file,
     or one of the special purpose output files.  This may
     happen when the file called is not in the specified path,
     or an illegal filename is specified.  If no errors are
     found in the filename specification, then this message may
     also indicate that there is not enough memory available to
     run the program, since opening a file causes a buffer to
     be opened which takes up additional memory in RAM.  For
     the special purpose output files, the hint field includes
     character string identifying the type of file and the file
     unit number, e.g., 'PLTFL312'.

510  Fatal Error Occurs During Reading of the File.  File is
     missing, incorrect file type,  or illegal data field
     encountered.  Check the indicated file for possible
     problems.  As with error number 500, this message may also
     indicate that there is not enough memory available to run
     the program if no other source of the problem can be
     identified.

520  Fatal Error Occurs During Writing to the File.  Similar to
     message 510, except that it occurs during a write
     operation.

530  Error Occurs Reading Met Station or Year: File Says.  This
     error occurs only with the ST models.  The surface and
     upper air station numbers and years specified on the ME
     pathway do not agree with the values on the first record
     of the meteorological data file.  The value from the file
     is printed out to help resolve the problem.
                              E-19

-------
540  No RECTABLE/MAXTABLE/DAYTABLE for Averaging Period.  No
     printed output options selected for a particular averaging
     period.  This is a non-fatal warning condition for the
     ISCST2 model.

550  File Unit/Name Conflict for the Output Option.  This error
     indicates that a problem exists with the filename and file
     unit specification for one of the special purpose output
     files.  The associated keyword is provided as a hint.  The
     same filename may have been used for more than one file
     unit, or vice versa.

560  User Specified File Unit < 20 for OU Keyword.  A file unit
     of less than 20 has been specified for the indicated
     special purpose output files.  This is a fatal error
     condition.  File units of less than 20 are reserved for
     system files.  Specify a unit number in the range of 20 to
     100.

565  Possible conflict With Dynamically Allocated FUNIT.  A
     file unit specified for the indicated special purpose
     output files is in the range > 100, and may therefore
     conflict with file units dynamically allocated for special
     purpose files by the model.  This is typically a non-fatal
     warning condition.

570  Problem Reading Temporary Event File for Event.  The
     ISCST2 model stores high value events in a temporary file
     that is used to create the input file for the ISCEV2
     model, if requested,  and also to store the high values for
     the summary tables at the end of the printed output file.
     A problem has been encountered reading this file, possibly
     because the concentration or deposition value was too
     large and overflowed the fixed format field of F14.5.

575  End-of-File Reached Trying to Read STAR Data.  The ISCLT2
     model has encountered an end-of-file for the STAR
     meteorological data trying the read the indicated
     averaging period.  Check the data file for the correct
     number of STAR summaries or modify the CO AVERTIME and/or
     ME STARDATA cards.
                              E-20

-------
            APPENDIX F. DESCRIPTION OF FILE FORMATS

F.I ASCII METEOROLOGICAL DATA

     The ISCST2 and ISCEV2 models are designed to accept a wide
range of ASCII meteorological data file formats.  The use of
ASCII files for meteorological data has two distinct advantages
over the use of unformatted data files, such as are generated
by the RAMMET and MPRM preprocessors (see the next section).
The first advantage is the portability of the data files to
different compilers and computer systems used for running the
models.  The second advantage is that the data file can be
examined easily to determine its contents, and listed to the
computer screen or to a printer for later reference.  The user
may specify the use of the default ASCII format by leaving the
formet field blank on the ME INPUTFIL card.  The user may also
specify FREE-formatted reads for the meteorological data, may
specify the Fortran read format explicitly, or may select the
CARD option, which allows for the input of hourly wind profile
exponents and vertical potential temperature gradients.

     The first record of the meteorological data input file
contains the station number and year for both the surface
station and the upper air (mixing height) station.  For the
formatted ASCII files, these four integer variables are read
using a free-format READ, i.e., the variables must be separated
by either a comma or by one or more blank spaces.  The order of
these variables is as follows:
     Surface Station Number, e.g., WBAN Number for NWS data
     Year for Surface Data  (2 or 4 digits)
     Upper Air Station Number (for Mixing Height Data)
     Year for Upper Air Data (2 or 4 digits)
The model checks these variables against the values input by
the user on the ME SURFDATA and ME UAIRDATA cards (see Section
3.5.3) .
                              F-l

-------
     The rest of the records in the file include the sequential
meteorological data.  The order of the meteorological variables
for the formatted ASCII files and the default ASCII format are
as follows:
Variable
Year (last 2 digits)
Month
Day
Hour
Flow Vector (deg.)
Wind Speed (m/s)
Ambient Temperature (K)
Stability Class
(A=l, B=2, ... F=6)
Rural Mixing Height (m)
Urban Mixing Height (m)
Wind Profile Exponent
(CARD only)
Vertical Potential
Temperature Gradient (K/m)
(CARD only)
Fortran Format
12
12
12
12
F9.4
F9.4
F6.1
12
F7.1
F7.1
F8.4
F8.4
Columns
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-17
18-26
27-32
33-34
35-41
42-48
49-56
57-65
     Calm hours are identified in the ASCII meteorological data
files by a wind speed of 0.0 m/s.  For unformatted RAMMET files
that are converted to the ASCII format by BINTOASC (see Section
C.2), the conversion program checks for calm hours based on the
RAMMET convention of a wind speed equal to 1.0 m/s and a flow
vector equal to the flow vector for the previous hour, and sets
the wind speed to 0.0 in the ASCII file.

F.2 RAMMET METEOROLOGICAL DATA

     The RAMMET preprocessor generates an unformatted file of
meteorological data from National Weather Service observations
suitable for use by several dispersion models, including the
ISCST2 model.  The file contains two types of records, the
first is a header record and the second is the meteorological
data.  The second.contains the data for one 24-hour period
                              F-2*

-------
(midnight to midnight) and is repeated  until  all data are
listed.  The data  are written unformatted to  the file.  This
type of file may also be  generated by the MPRM processor

designed for processing on-site  meteorological data.
      The format of the header record is:


       READ(U) ID1,IYEAR1,ID2,IYEAR2

                        I— Last 2 digits of beginning year of mixing
                         height data.

                     - 5-digit station identification of mixing
                       height data.

                - Last 2 digits of beginning year of hourly
                  surface data.

              - 5-digit station identification of hourly
               surface data.
      The format of  the meteorological records  are:
   READ(u) IYEAR,MONTH,IDAY.PGSTAB,SPEED,TEMP,FLWVEC,RANFLU,MIXHGT

































L Array of mixing
heights (m)
L Array of randomized
flow vectors (to
nearest degree)
- Array of flow vectors (to
nearest 10 degrees)
- Array of temperatures (degrees
Kelvin)
- Array of wind speeds (m/s)
- Array of Pasquitt stability categories
- Day of month (1-31)
- Month of year (1-12)
- Last 2 digits of year
      The DIMENSION statements used to define  the arrays are:


      DIMENSION IKST(24), AWS(24), ATA(24), AFV(24), AFVR(24), AZK2.24)


      The first index in  the AZI  (mixing height)  array controls

which of the two mixing  height values is referenced.   AZI(l,i)

refers to  the rural mixing height values, where i equals from 1
                                  F-3

-------
to 24 and refers to hour of day in local standard time.
AZI(2,i) refers to the urban mixing height values.

     The following preset values are used to indicate missing
data:

        IKST             0
        AWS             -9
        ATA            -99
        AFV            -99
        AFVR           -99
        AZI           -999

F.3 STAR SUMMARY JOINT FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTIONS

        For the ISC2 Long Term dispersion model, the input file
describing the meteorological conditions is a joint frequency
distribution.  These frequency distributions are called STAR
summaries for STability ARray.  The frequency distribution is
constructed using 16 wind direction sectors, with the first
22.5 sector centered on winds from the North (increasing
clockwise), six wind speed classes and six stability classes.
The wind speed classes are 0-3, 3-6, 6-10, 10-16, 16-21 and >21
kts.  The Pasquill stability categories for the ISCLT
dispersion model are grouped into classes as,

                Pasquill
        Class   category         Remarks
          1        A        Very unstable conditions
          2        B        Moderately unstable conditions
          3        C        Slightly unstable conditions
          4        D        Neutral conditions
          5        E        Slightly stable conditions
          6        F        Very stable conditions
                              F-4

-------
A separate STAR summary may  be used for each  averaging period,
such as  a  month or a season,  or for the entire  annual data
period.

     The format of the meteorological file is:
       LOOP ON 1=1,6
       LOOP ON K=1,16
       READ(u.f)  FREQ( U,J,K>,J=1,6 )
                     I  L- Index associated with wind speed class
                     I— Index associated with wind direction sector
                   — Index associated with stability class
              - Frequency of occurrence (decimal), of stability class I, with
                wind speed class J, for wind from wind sector K
       FORMAK6F10.0)

Hence the  meteorological  file  consists of 96 records for each
STAR summary,  the first 16 are for stability class 1, the next
16 are for stability class 2,  and so forth.

F.4 THRESHOLD VIOLATION FILES  (MAXIFILE OPTION)

     The OU MAXIFILE card for  the ISCST2 model allows the user
the option to generate a  file  or files of threshold violations
for specific source group and  averaging period combintations.
The file consists of several header records, each identified
with an asterisk (*)  in column one.  The header information
includes the model name and version number, the first line of
the title  information for the  run,  the list of modeling option
keywords applicable to the results, the averaging period and
source group included in  the file,  and the  threshold value. Any
value equal to or exceeding the threshold value will be
included in the file.  The header also includes the format used
for writing the data records,  and column headers for the
variables  included in the file.  The variables provided on each
data record include the averaging period, the  source group ID,
the date  (YYMMDDHH) for the end of averaging period,  the X and

                                F-5

-------
Y coordinates of the receptor location,  the receptor terrain
elevation and flagpole receptor height,  and the concentration
or deposition value that violated the threshold.  The following
example from a threshold file identifies the contents of the
MAXIFILE:
ISCST2 (92062): A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
MODELING OPTIONS USED:
CONC RURAL FLAT DFAULT
MAXI-FIUE FOR 3-HR VALUES >= A THRESHOLD OF 30.00
FOR SOURCE GROUP: ALL
* FORMAT: <1X,l3.lX.A8,1Xf I8,2(1X, F13.5),2(1X,F7.2),1X,F13.5)
*AVE GRP DATE X Y ELEV FLAG CONC
*
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL
3 ALL

64010206
64010218
64010424
64010506
64010506
64010512
64010515
64010518
64010521
64010524
64010524

76.60445
76.60445
76.60445
76.60445
153.20890
86.60254
86.60254
76.60445
128.55750
.00000
-.00001

64.27876
64.27876
64.27876
64.27876
128.55750
50.00000
50.00000
64.27876
153.20890
100.00000
200.00000

.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00

.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00
.00

30.24433
42.91793
34.63943
38.86485
33.00018
36.78835
33.48913
44.44987
34.85760
58.49796
38.87197
F.5 POSTPROCESSOR FILES (POSTFILE OPTION)

     The OU POSTFILE card for the ISCST2 model allows the user
the option of creating output files of concurrent concentration
or deposition values suitable for postprocessing.  The model
offers two options for the type of file generated - one is an
unformatted file similar to the concentration file generated by
the previous version of ISCST, and the other is a formatted
file of X, Y, CONC (or DEPO) values suitable for inputting to
plotting programs.

     The unformatted POSTFILE option generates a separate
unformatted data record of concurrent values for each averaging
period and source group specified.  The averaging period and
source group combinations may be written to separate files, or
combined into a single file, as with the earlier ISCST model.
Each record begins with the date variable for the end of the
                              F-6

-------
averaging period (an integer variable of the form YYMMDDHH),
the averaging period (e.g., an interger value of 3 for 3-hour
averages), and the source group ID (eight characters).
Following these three header variables, the record includes the
concentration or deposition values for each receptor location,
in the order in which the receptors are defined on the RE
pathway.  The results are output to the unformatted file or
files as they are calculated by the model.

     The formatted plot file option for the POSTFILE keyword
includes several lines of header information, each identified
with an asterisk (*) in column one.  The header information
includes the model name and version number, the first line of
the title information for the run, the list of modeling option
keywords applicable to the results, the averaging period and
source group included in the file, and the number of receptors
included.  The header also includes the format used for writing
the data records, and column headers for the variables included
in the file.  The variables provided on each data record
include the X and Y coordinates of the receptor location, the
concentration or deposition value for that location, the
receptor terrain elevation, the averaging period, the source
group ID, and the either the date variable for the end of the
averaging period (in the form of YYMMDDHH) for short term
averages or the number of hours in the period for PERIOD
averages.  The following example from a formatted postprocessor
                              F-7

-------
file for PERIOD averages identifies the contents of the
POSTFILE:
ISCST2 (92062): A Simple Example Problem for the ISCST2 Model
MODELING OPTIONS USED:
CONC RURAL FLAT
D FAULT
POST/PLOT FILE OF PERIOD VALUES FOR
FOR A TOTAL OF 180
FORMAT: (3(1X,F13.5),
X Y
17.36482 98.48077
34.72964 196.96150
52.09445 295.44230
86.82409 492.40390
173.64820 984.80770
34.20201 93.96926
68.40403 187.93850
102.60600 281.90780
171.01010 469.84630
RECEPTORS.
1X,F8.2,2X,A6,
CONC
.09078
.04353
.02323
.00646
.00389
.00053
.22839
.14398
.06481

SOURCE GROUP:

2X,A8,2X,I8)
ZELEV AVE
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD
.00 PERIOD

ALL


GRP
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL




NUM HRS
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
F.6 HIGH VALUE RESULTS FOR PLOTTING (PLOTFILE OPTION)

     The OU PLOTFILE card for the ISCST2 model allows the user
the option of creating output files of highest concentration or
deposition values suitable for importing into graphics software
to generate contour plots.  The formatted plot files generated
by the PLOTFILE include several lines of header information,
each identified with an asterisk (*) in column one.  The header
information includes the model name and version number, the
first line of the title information for the run, the list of
modeling option keywords applicable to the results, the
averaging period and source group included in the file, the
high value (e.g. 2ND highest) included for plotting, and the
number of receptors included.  The header also includes the
format used for writing the data records, and column headers
for the variables included in the file.  The variables provided
on each data record include the X and Y coordinates of the
receptor location, the concentration or deposition value for
that location, the receptor terrain elevation, the averaging
period, the source group ID, and either the high value included
for short term averages or the number of hours in the period
                              F-8

-------
for PERIOD averages.  The following example from a formatted
postprocessor file for high second highest 24-hour averages
identifies the contents of the PLOTFILE:
ISCST2 (92062): A Simple Example Problem fa
MODELING OPTIONS USED:
CONC RURAL FLAT DFAULT
PLOT FILE OF HIGH 2ND HIGH 24-HR
FOR A TOTAL OF 180 RECEPTORS.
FORMAT: (3(1X,F13.5),1X,F8.2,3X,A5,
X Y CONC
17.36482 98.48077 .00038
34.72964 196.96150 .00759
52.09445 295.44230 .00223
86.82409 492.40390 .00058
173.64820 984.80770 .00012
34.20201 93.96926 .00032
68.40403 187.93850 .73597
102.60600 281.90780 .46271
171.01010 469.84630 .22714
r the ISCST2 Model


VALUES FOR SOURCE GROUP

2X,A8,2X,A4)
ZELEV AVE GRP
.00 24-HR ALL
.00 24- HR ALL
.00 24-HR ALL
.00 24-HR ALL
.00 24- HR ALL
.00 24- HR ALL
.00 24-HR ALL
.00 24- HR ALL
.00 24-HR ALL



: ALL


HIVAL
2ND
2ND
2ND
2ND
2ND
2ND
2ND
2ND
2ND
     The PERIOD average PLOTFILE uses the same format for the
data records as the PERIOD average formatted POSTFILE shown in
the previous section.
                              F-9

-------

-------
                             APPENDIX 6.

                 QUICK REFERENCE CARD  PULL-OUT FOR

                       ISCST2  AND ISCLT2 MODELS
CO Keywords
TITLEONE
TITLETWO
MOOELOPT
AVERT I ME
POLLUTID
HALFLIFE
DCAYCOEF
TERRHGTS
ELEVUNIT
FLAGPOLE
RUNORNOT
EVENTFIL
SAVE FILE
INITFILE
MULTYEAR
ERRORFIL
Type
M-N
0-M
M-N
M-N
M-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
M-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
Parameters
Tjtlel
TitleZ
0 FAULT CONG RURAL GRDRIS NOSTD NOB ID NOCALM MSGPRO
or or
DEPPS URBAN
Timel Time2 Time3 Time4 MONTH PERIOD (ST Model)
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC (LT Model)
WINTER SPRING SUMMER FALL or QUART1 QUART2 OUART3 QUART4
MONTH SEASON QUARTR ANNUAL PERIOD
Pollut
Haft if
Decay
FLAT or EJ.EV
METERS or FEET
(Flagdf)
RUN or NOT
(Evfile) (Evopt) (ST model only)
(Savfil) (Dayinc) (Savfl2) (ST model only)
(Inifil) (ST model only)
SavfH (Inifil) (ST model only)
(Errfil) (DEBUG)
Section
3.2.1
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
SO Keywords
LOCATION
SRCPARAM
BUILDHGT
BUILDWID
LOWBOUND
EM IS FACT
EMI SUN IT
SETVELOC
MASSFRAX
REFLCOEF
SRCGROUP
Type
M-R
M-R
0-R
0-R
0-R
0-R
0-N
0-R
0-R
0-R
M-R
Parameters
Srcid Srctyp Xs Ys (Zs) (Srctyp = POIN1, VOLUME, or AREA)
Srcid Ptemis Stkhgt Stktmp Stkvel Stkdia (POINT Source)
Vlemis Relhgt Syinit Szinit (VOLUME Source)
Aram's Relhgt Xinit (AREA Source)
Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsbh(i),i=1,Nsec
Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsbw(i),i=1,Nsec
Srcid (or Srcrng) Idswak(i),i=1,Nsec
Srcid (or Srcrng) Qf lag Qfact(i), i=1,Nqf
Emifac Emilbl Conlbl (or Deplbl)
Srcid (or Srcrng) Vsn(i), i=1,Nvs
Srcid (or Srcrng) Phi(i),i=1,Nvs
Srcid (or Srcrng) Gamma(i), i=1,Nvs
Grpid Srcid's Srcrng's
Section
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.3
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.6
3.3.6
3.3.7
Type:
M - Mandatory
0 - Optional
N - Non-repeatable
R - Repeatable
                                   G-l

-------
RE Keywords
GRIDCART
GRIOPOLR

DISCCART
DISCPOLR
BOUNDARY
BOUNDELV
Type
0-R
0-R

0-R
0-R
0-R
0-R
Parameters
Net id STA
XY1NC Xinit Xnum Xdetta Yinit Ynum Ydelta
or XPNTS Gridxl GridxZ Gridx3 ... GridxN, and
YPNTS Gridyl GridyS Gridy3 ... GridyN
ELEV Row Zelevl Zelev2 Zelev3 ... ZelevN
FLAG Row Zflagl ZflagZ Zflag3 ... ZflagN
END
Netid STA
ORIG Xinit Yinit
DIST Ringl RingZ Ring3 ... RingN
DDIR Did Dir2 Dir3 ... DirN
or GDIR Oirnum Dirini Dirinc
ELEV Rad Zelevl Zelev2 Zelev3 ... ZelevN
FLAG Rad Zflagl ZflagZ Zflag3 ... ZflagN
END
Xcoord Ycoord (Zelev) (Zflag)
Srcid Range Direct (Zelev) (Zflag)
Srcid Dist(I),I=1,36
Srcid Zelev(I),I=1,36
Section
3.4.1
3.4.1

3.4.3
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.4
Note:   While all RE keywords are optional, at least  one  receptor must be defined for each run.
ME Keywords
INPUTFIL
ANEMHGHT
SURFDATA
UAIRDATA
STARTEND
DAYRANGE
STARDATA
UDROTATE
UINDPROF
DTHETADZ
UINDCATS
AVESPEED
AVETEMPS
AVEMIXHT
Type
M-N
M-N
N-N
M-N
0-N
0-R
0-N
0-N
0-R
0-R
0-N
0-N
M-R
M-R
Parameters
Metfil (Format)
Zref (Zrunit)
Stanum Year (Name) (Xcoord Ycoord)
Stanum Year (Name) (Xcoord Ycoord)
Strtyr Strtmn Strtdy (Strthr) Endyr Endmn Enddy (Endhr) (ST only)
Range! RangeZ Range3 ... RangeN (ST model only)
^FElMMAPRMMJUNJULAyGSEPOCTNOV DEC (LT model only)
WINTER SPRING SUMMER FALL or QUART1 QUART2 QUARTS QUART4
MONTH SEASON QUARTR ANNUAL PERIOD
Rotang
Stab Prof! Prof2 Prof3 Prof4 ProfS Prof6
Stab Dtdzl Dtdz2 Dtdz3 Dtdz4 DtdzS Dtdz6
Ws1 Ws2 Us3 Ws4 WsS
Us1 Ws2 Ws3 Ws4 WsS Ws6 (LT model only)
Aveper Ta1 Ta2 Ta3 Ta4 Ta5 Ta6 (LT model only)
Stab Mixht! Mixht2 Mixht3 Mixht4 MixhtS Mixht6 (LT model only)
Section
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.3
3.5.5
3.5.5
3.5.4
3.5.6
3.5.8
3.5.9
3.5.7
3.5.10
3.5.11
3.5.12
OU Keywords
RECTABLE
MAXTABLE
DAYTABLE
MAXIFILE
PLOTFILE
POST FILE
Type
0-R
0-R
0-N
0-R
0-R
0-R
Parameters
Aveper FIRST SECOND ... SIXTH or 1ST 2ND ... 6TH (ST Model)
INDSRC and/or SRCGRP (LT Model)
Aveper Maxnum (ST Model)
Maxnun INDSRC and/or SRCGRP and/or SOCONT (LT Model)
AvpeM Avper2 Avper3 Avper4 (ST model only)
Aveper Grpid Thresh Filnam (Funft) (ST model only)
Aveper Grpid Hivalu Filnam (Funit) (ST model)
Aveper Grpid Filnam (Funit) (LT model & ST period ave)
Aveper Grpid Format Filnam (Funit) (ST model only)
Section
3.7.1
3.7.3
3.7.1
3.7.3
3.7.1
3.7.1
3.7.1
3.7.3
3.7.1
                                                 G-2

-------
                                APPENDIX H.

                   QUICK REFERENCE CARD  PULL-OUT FOR

                           ISCEV2  (EVENT)  MODEL

            (USED  FOR  EVENT/SOURCE  CONTRIBUTION ANALYSES)
CO Keywords
TITLEONE
TITLETWO
HOOELOPT
AVERT I ME
POLLUTID
HALFLIFE
DCAYCOEF
TERRHGTS
FLAGPOLE
RUNORNOT
ERRORFIL
Type
H-N
0-N
M-N
M-N
M-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
0-N
M-N
0-N
Parameters
Titlel
Title2
D FAULT CONC RURAL GRDRIS NOSTD NOB ID NOCALM MSGPRO
or or
DEPPS URBAN
Timel Time2 Time3 Time4 MONTH PERIOD
Pollut
Haflif
Decay
FLAT or ELEV
(Flagdf)
RUN or NOT
(Errfil) (DEBUG)
Section
3.2.1
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.12
Note:   MONTH and PERIOD averages are ignored by the EVENT model, which can only handle short term
      averages of up to 24 hours.
SO Keywords
LOCATION
SRCPARAM
BUILDHGT
BUILDUID
LOWBOUND
EMISFACT
EMISUNIT
SETVELOC
MASSFRAX
REFLCOEF
SRCGROUP
Type
M-R
M-R
0-R
0-R
0-R
0-R
0-N
0-R
0-R
0-R
M-R
Parameters
Srcid Srctyp Xs Ys (Zs) (Srctyp = POINT. VOLUME, or AREA)
Srcid Ptemis Stkhgt Stktmp Stkvel Stkdia (POINT Source)
Vlemis Relhgt Syinit Szinit (VOLUME Source)
Aremis Relhgt Xinit (AREA Source)
Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsbh(i), i=1,Nsec
Srcid (or Srcrng) Dsbw(i), i=1,Nsec
Srcid (or Srcrng) Idswak(i ), i=1,Nsec
Srcid (or Srcrng) Qflag Qfact(i),i=1,Nqf
Emifac Emilbl Conlbl (or Deplbl)
Srcid (or Srcrng) Vsn(i),i=1,Nvs
Srcid (or Srcrng) Phi(i),i=1,Nvs
Srcid (or Srcrng) Gamma(i), i=1,Nvs
Grpid Srcid's Srcrng's
Section
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.3
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.6
3.3.6
3.3.7
Type:
M - Mandatory
0 - Optional
N - Non-repeatable
R - Repeatable
                                     H-l

-------
HE Keywords
1NPUTFIL
ANENHGHT
SURFDATA
UAIRDATA
UDROTATE
UINDCATS
UINDPROF
DTHETADZ
Type
M-N
H-N
M-N
M-N
0-H
0-N
0-R
0-R
Parameters
Metfil (Format)
Zref (Zrunit)
Stanum Year (Name) (Xcoord Ycoord)
Stanun Year (Name) (Xcoord Ycoord)
Rotang
Usl Us2 Us3 Us4 UsS
Stab Profl Prof2 Prof3 Prof4 ProfS Prof6
Stab Dtdzl Dtdz2 Dtdz3 Dtdz4 DtdzS Dtdz6
Sect i on
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.3
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.5.9
EV Keywords
EVENTPER
EVENTLOC
Type
M-R
M-R
Parameters
Evname Aveper Grpid Date
Evname XR= Xr YR= Yr (Zelev) (Zf lag)
or
RNG= Rng DIR= Dir (Zelev) (Zflag)
Section
3.6.1
3.6.2
OU Keywords
EVENTOUT
Type
M-N
Parameters
SOCONT or DETAIL
Section
3.7.2
Note:   RE Pathway is not used for the ISCEV2 (EVENT)  model. Receptor  locations for specific events are
        identified on the EVent Pathway in combination with particular data periods.
                                                 H-2

-------
                            GLOSSARY
ASCII — American Standard Code for Information Interchange, a
     standard set of codes used by computers and communication
     devices.  Sometimes used to refer to files containing only
     such standard codes, without any application-specific
     codes such as might be present in a document file from a
     word processor program.

CD-144 Format — Card Deck-144 data format available from NCDC
     for National Weather Service surface observations commonly
     used for dispersion models.  Each record represents an
     80-column "card image".

CO — control, the 2-character pathway ID for input runstream
     images used to specify overall job control options.

CO Pathway — Collective term for the group of input runstream
     images used to specify the overall job control options,
     including titles, dispersion options, terrain options,
     etc.

Directory — A logical subdivision of a disk used to organize
     files stored on a disk.

Dispersion Model — A group of related mathematical algorithms
     used to estimate (model) the dispersion of pollutants in
     the atmosphere due to transport by the mean (average) wind
     and small scale turbulence.

DOS — Disk Operating System.  Software that manages
     applications software and provides an interface between
     applications and the system hardware components, such as
     the disk drive, terminal, and keyboard.

EBCDIC — Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code, the
     collating sequence used on IBM mainframe computers.

Echo of inputs — By default, the ISC2 models will echo the
     input runstream images, character by character, into the
     main printed output file.  This serves as a record of the
     inputs as originally entered by the user, without any
     rounding of the numerical values.  The echoing can be
     suppressed with the NO ECHO option.

EOF — End-of-File.

EPA — U. s. Environmental Protection Agency.

Error message — A message written by the model to the
     error/message file whenever an error is encountered that
     will inhibit data processing.  .


                          GLOSSARY-1

-------
Error/Message File — A file used for storage of messages
     written by the model.

EV — BVent, the 2-character pathway ID for input runstream
     images used to specify event inputs for the Short Term
     EVENT model.

EV Pathway — Collective term for the group of input runstream
     images used to specify the event periods and location for
     the Short Term EVENT model.

EVENT Model — A new ISC Short Term model (ISCEV2) developed
     with Version 2 of ISCST, specifically designed to provide
     source contribution  (culpability) information for specific
     events of interest, e.g., design values or threshold
     violations.

Extended Memory — Additional memory on 80386 and 80486 PCs
     that allows programs to address memory beyond the 640 KB
     limit of DOS.  Special software is required to utilize
     this extra memory.

Fatal Error — Any error which inhibits further processing of
     data by the model.  Model continues to read input images
     to check for errors during setup, and will continue to
     read input meteorological data during calculation phase.

Flow Vector —• The direction towards which the wind is blowing.

GMT — Greenwich Mean Time, the time at the oo meridian.

Informational Message — Any message written to the
     error/message file that may be of interest to the user,
     but which have no direct bearing on the validity of the
     results, and do not affect processing.

Input Image — User supplied input, read through the default
     input device, controlling the model options and data
     input.  A single card or record from the input runstream
     file.  Each input image consists of a pathway ID (may be
     blank indicating a continuation of the previous pathway),
     a keyword  (may also be blank for continuation of a
     keyword), and possibly one or more parameter fields.

Input Runstream File — The basic input file to the ISC2 models
     controlling the modeling options, source data, receptor
     locations, meteorological data file specifications, and
     output options.  Consists of a series of input images
     grouped into functional pathways.

ISCEV2 — Industrial Source Complex - Short Term EVENT
     Dispersion Model, Version 2.
                           GLOSSARY-2

-------
ISCST2 — Industrial Source Complex - Short Term Dispersion
     Model, Version 2.

ISCLT2 — Industrial Source Complex - Long Term Dispersion
     Model, Version 2.

JCL — Job Control Language, an IBM mainframe's operating
     system control language for batch jobs.

Joint Frequency Distribution — The joint frequency of wind
     direction sector, wind speed class and stability category
     (see also STAR).

Julian Day — The number of the day in the year, i.e., Julian
     Day = 1 for January 1 and 365 (or 366 for leap years) for
          December 31.

KB — Kilobyte, 1000 bytes, a unit of storage on a disk

Keyword — The 8-character codes that follow immediately after
     the pathway ID in the input run stream data.

LST — Local Standard Time.

Math Co-processor — A computer chip used to speed up floating
     point arithmetic in a personal computer.

MB — Megabyte, one million bytes, a unit of storage on a disk

ME — MEteorology, the 2-character pathway ID for input
     runstream images used to specify meteorological data
     options

ME Pathway — Collective term for the group of input runstream
     images used to specify the input meteorological data file
     and other meteorological variables, including the period
     to process from the meteorological file for the ISCST2
     model.

Meteorological Data File — Any file containing meteorological
     data, whether it be mixing heights, surface observations
     or on-site data.

Missing Value — Alphanumeric character(s) that represent
     breaks in the temporal or spatial record of an atmospheric
     variable.

Mixing Height — The depth through which atmospheric pollutants
     are typically mixed by dispersive processes.

MPRM — Meteorological Processor for Regulatory Models, a
     program designed for the purpose of processing on-site
     meteorological data to prepare them for input to the


                           GLOSSARY-3

-------
     regulatory models, such as ISC.  Produces a file
     comparable to the RAMMET pre-processor output, and also
     capable of producing STAR summaries.

NCDC — National Climatic Data Center, the federal agency
     responsible for distribution of the National Weather
     Service upper air, mixing height and surface observation
     data.

NO ECHO — Option to suppress echoing of the runstream input
     images to the main printed output file.

NWS — National Weather Service.

On-site Data — Data collected from a meteorological
     measurement program operated in the vicinity of the site
     to be modeled in the dispersion analysis.

OU — output, the 2-character pathway ID for input runstream
     images used to specify output options.

OU Pathway — Collective term for the group of input runstream
     images used to specify the output options for a particular
     run.

Overlay — One or more subprograms that reside on disk and are
     loaded into memory only when needed.

Pasquill Stability Categories — A classification of the
     dispersive capacity of the atmosphere, originally defined
     using surface wind speed, solar insolation  (daytime) and
     cloudiness (nighttime).  They have since been
     reinterpreted using various other meteorological
     variables.

Pathway — One of the six major functional divisions in the
     input runstream file for the ISC2 models.  These are
     control, source, REceptor, MEteorology, EVent, and output
     (see these entries in this section for a description).

PC — Personal Computer, a wide ranging class of computers
     designed for personal use, typically small enough to fit
     on a desktop.

Quality Assessment — Judgment of the quality of the data.

Quality Assessment Check — Determining if the reported value
     of a variable is reasonable (see also Range Check).

Quality  Assessment Message — Message written to the
     error/message file when a data value is determined to be
     suspect.
                           GLOSSARY-4

-------
Quality Assessment Violation — Occurrences when data values
     are determined to be suspect (see also Range Check
     Violation).

RAM — Random Access Memory on a personal computer.

RAMMET — Meteorological processor program used for regulatory
     applications capable of processing twice-daily mixing
     heights (TD-9689 format) and hourly surface weather
     observations (CD-144 format) for use in dispersion models
     such as ISCST,  CRSTER, MPTER and RAM.

Range Check — Determining if a variable falls within
     predefined upper and lower bounds.

Range Check Violation — Determination that the value of a
     variable is outside range defined by upper and lower bound
     values (see also Quality Assessment Violation).

RE — RBceptor, the 2-character pathway ID for input runstream
     images used to specify receptor locations.

RE Pathway — Collective term for the group of input runstream
     images used to specify the receptor locations for a
     particular run.

Regulatory Applications — Dispersion modeling involving
     regulatory decision-making as described in the Guideline
     on Air Quality Models (Revised),  (EPA, 1987b).

Regulatory Model — A dispersion model that has been approved
     for use by the regulatory offices of the EPA, specifically
     one that is included in Appendix A of the Guideline on Air
     Quality Models (Revised), (EPA, 1987b), such as the ISC2
     model.

Runstream File — Collectively, all input images required to
     process input options and input data for the ISC2 models.

SCRAM BBS — Support Center for Regulatory Air Models -
     Bulletin Board System, an electronic bulletin board system
     used by EPA for disseminating air quality dispersion
     models, modeling guidance, and related information.

Secondary Keyword — A descriptive alphabetical keyword used as
     a parameter for one of the main runstream keywords to
     specify a particular option.

SO — source,  the 2-character pathway ID for input runstream
     images used to specify input source parameters and source
     groups.
                          GLOSSARY-5

-------
SO Pathway — Collective term for the group of input runstream
     images used to specify the source input parameters and
     source group information.

STAR — STability ARray, a joint frequency distribution summary
     of stability category, wind speed and wind direction. The
     STAR data are used as input for the ISC2 Long Term
     dispersion model.

Station Identification — An integer or character string used
     to uniquely identify a station or site as provided in the
     upper air (TD-5600 and TD-6201), mixing height (TD-9689),
     and surface weather (CD-144 and TD-3280) data formats
     available from NCDC.  There are no standard station
     numbers for on-site data or card image/screening data, and
     the user may include any integer string

Subdirectory — A directory below the root, or highest level,
     directory or another subdirectory, used for organization
     of files on a storage"medium such as a PC hard disk.

Surface Weather Observations — A collection of atmospheric
     data on the state of the atmosphere as observed from the
     earth's surface.  In the U.S. the National Weather Service
     collect these data on a regular basis at selected
     locations.

Surface Roughness Length — Height at which the wind speed
     extrapolated from a near-surface wind speed profile
     becomes zero.

Syntax — The order, structure and arrangement of the inputs
     that make of the input runstream file, specifically, the
     rules governing the placement of the various input
     elements including pathway IDs, keywords, and parameters.

TD-1440 Format — A format available from NCDC for summarizing
     NWS surface observations in an 80-column format; the
     CD-144 format is a subset of this format.  This format has
     been superseded by the TD-3280 format.

TD-3280 Format — The current format available from NCDC for
     summarizing NWS surface weather observations in an
     elemental structure, i.e., observations of a single
     atmospheric variable are grouped together for a designated
     period of time.

TD-5600 Format — A format available from NCDC for reporting
     NWS upper air sounding data.  This format has been
     superseded by the TD-6201 format.

TD-6201 Format — The current format available from NCDC for
     reporting NWS upper air data.  The file structure is


                           GLOSSARY-6

-------
     essentially the same as the TD-5600 format except that
     there is more quality assurance information.

TD-9689 Format — The format available from NCDC for mixing
     heights estimated from morning upper air temperature and
     pressure data and hourly surface observations of
     temperature.

UNAMAP — User's Network for Applied Modeling of Air Pollution,
     a collection of dispersion models and closely related
     support utilities, used for disseminating models prior to
     the SCRAM BBS.

Unformatted File — A file written without the use of a FORTRAN
     FORMAT statement, sometimes referred to as a binary file.

Upper Air Data (or soundings) — Meteorological data obtained
     from balloon- borne instrumentation that provides
     information on pressure, temperature, humidity, and wind
     away from the surface of the earth.

Vertical Potential Temperature Gradient — The change of
     potential temperature with height, used in modeling the
     plume rise through a stable layer, and indicates the
     strength of the stable temperature inversion.  A positive
     value means that potential temperature increases with
     height above ground and indicates a stable atmosphere.

Warning Message — A message written by the model to the
     error/message file whenever a problem arises that may
     reflect an erroneous condition, but does not inhibit
     further processing.

Wind Profile Exponent — The value of the exponent used to
     specify the profile of wind speed with height according to
     the power law (see Section 1.1.3 of Volume II).
                           GLOSSARY-7

-------

-------
                             INDEX

Anemometer height specification 	  3-57
Area sources
     emission rate parameter	3-25
     input parameters 	 3-24, B-8
     irregularly-shaped areas 	  3-20
     specification of location  	  3-20
     specification of source type	3-20
ASCII meteorological data files 	 1-10, F-l
     converting from binary 	 C-3
     default format for ISCST2  	 3-52, F-2
Averaging periods
     options for Long Term model	3-7
     options for Short Term model	3-6
     specifying options for 	 3-6

Binary meteorological data
     see Unformatted meteorological data
Building downwash
     BUILDHGT keyword 	 3-26, B-8
     BUILDWID keyword 	 3-26, 3-28, B-8
     example of building inputs 	  2-16
     LOWBOUND keyword 	 3-26, 3-29, B-9
     modeling options	1-8, 1-9, 2-1, 2-7, 3-5, 3-19
     specification of building dimensions . .  2-17, 3-22, 3-25
     specifying "lower bound" option  	  3-29
Buoyancy-induced dispersion
     and the regulatory default option	2-7, 3-5
     NOBID parameter	3-4
     specifying not to use on MODELOPT card .  . . 2-8, 3-4, B-4

Calm and missing data flags	3-6
Calm flag in output file	2-37
Calms processing	3-5
     specifying NOCALM option 	 3-4
Card image meteorological data
     see also ASCII meteorological data
     specification of CARD format for 	 . .  3-52, 3-54
Cartesian grid receptors
     see also Receptor networks
     specifying a receptor network  	  3-39
     specifying discrete receptors  	  3-47
CO pathway	2-2
     brief tutorial	2-12
     example of inputs for	2-15
     keyword reference  	  3-2, B-3
     modeling options	2-6, 2-12
     order of keywords within	2-5
Command line for running ISCST2 	  2-34, 3-98
Compiling options 	 4-3
     Lahey	D-4
     Microsoft	D-l


                            INDEX-1

-------
Concentration
     adjusting emission rate units for  	 3-34, B-9
     specifying calculation of  	   2-13, 2-42, 3-4, B-4
Concentration file
     converting options with STOLDNEW 	 C-2
     description of files generated by ISCST2 	 F-6
     POSTFILE option for generating 	  3-80

Daily table option	3-77
Data period
     specifying period to process for ISCST2  	  3-61
Decay coefficient	2-5, 3-10
     see also Half life
     DCAYCOEF keyword	3-10, A-2, B-3, B-5
     DECAY parameter	3-10
     default for urban S02	3-10
     relationship to half life	3-10
     specifying	3-10
Deposition
     see also Dry deposition
     specifying calculation of  	  2-42
Discrete receptors  	  3-46
     with Cartesian coordinates 	  3-47
     with polar coordinates 	  3-48
DOS
     limits for DOS versions of models	2-9, 4-6
DOS redirection	.	2-34, 3-98
Dry deposition
     adjusting emission rate units for  	 3-34, B-9
     DEPOS keyword on MODELOPT card	3-4
     MASSFRAX keyword 	  3-35
     number of settling categories  	  3-35
     REFLCOEF keyword 	  3-35
     SETVELOC keyword 	  3-35
     specifying calculation of  	   2-13, 2-42, 3-4, B-4
     specifying emission rates for  	  3-22, 3-23, 3-25
     specifying input parameters for  	  3-35, B-10

Echoing of the runstream file
     suppressing with NO ECHO	2-36
Elevated terrain
     example of inputs for Cartesian grid	3-41
     example of inputs for polar network   	  3-44
     modeling options 	  1-10, 2-16, 2-43, 3-11
     specifying boundary receptor elevations  	  3-49
     specifying receptor elevations . . 3-39, 3-40,  3-43,  3-47,
                                   3-48, 3-49, B-12, B-13, B-14
     specifying units with ELEVUNIT 	  3-12
     TERRHGTS keyword 	  2-43, 3-11
     truncation above stack height  	  1-10
Error handling capabilities 	  2-28
     detailed message descriptions  . .	E-6
     example message summary table  ...   	  2-32


                            INDEX-2

-------
     general description  	 E-l
     message summary table  	 ... E-2
     message types  	  2-28
     syntax of messages	E-3
Error message	2-28, E-3
     example of syntax	2-29
Error/message file	3-93
EV pathway
     keyword reference  	  3-69, B-19
EVENT model (ISCEV2)
     naming convention used for events  	  3-72
     specifying event inputs  	  3-69
     user defined events	3-73
     using events defined by ISCST2	3-71
Extended memory 	  3-93, GLOSSARY-2
     limits for extended memory versions  	  2-9, 4-6

Flagpole receptor heights
     default receptor height,  FLAGDF  	 3-12, B-5
     example of inputs for Cartesian grid	3-41
     example of inputs for polar network  	  3-44
     FLAGDF parameter 	  3-12
     FLAGPOLE keyword 	  3-12, B-3, B-5
     modeling options 	  1-10, 2-16, 3-12
     specifying boundary flagpole receptors 	  3-50
     specifying flagpole receptors  .  .  3-39, 3-40, 3-43, 3-47,
                                   3-48, 3-49, B-12, B-13, B-14
Flat terrain modeling 	  2-16, 3-11

Gradual plume rise
     and the regulatory default option	2-7, 3-5
     GRDRIS parameter 	 3-4
     specification of on the MODELOPT card	3-4, B-4
     specifying the non-regulatory option 	 3-4

Half life
     default value for urban SO2	3-10
     HAFLIF parameter 	  3-10
     HALFLIFE keyword	3-10, A-3, B-3, B-5
     relationship to decay coefficient  	  3-10
High value options for ST	3-74

Initial lateral dimension
     for volume sources	3-24
Initial vertical dimension
     for volume sources	3-24
Input meteorological data files	3-90
Input runstream file
     see also Runstream file
     definition 	  GLOSSARY-2
ISCEV2 model output options 	  3-84
                            INDEX-3

-------
Julian day
     definition 	  GLOSSARY-3
     selecting specific days for processing 	  3-62

Keyword
     definition 	 . .  GLOSSARY-3
     detailed reference 	  3-1, B-l
Keyword/parameter approach
     advantages explained	2-5
     description of	 2-1

Line sources, modeled as volumes  	  3-24
Linking the models	4-5, D-2
     using memory overlays	4-5, D-2
Locations
     specifying receptor location inputs  	  3-38
     specifying source location inputs  	  3-20
Long Term model output options	3-85
                  »
Maximum value options
     for the Long Term model	  3-87
     for the Short Term model	3-76
ME pathway	2-2
     brief tutorial	2-21
     example of inputs for	2-22
     keyword reference  	  3-50, B-15
Message summary table
     example for sample problem 	  2-32
     example showing error condition  	  2-33
Meteorological data
     ASCII format	1-10
     card image format	1-11
     options for Long Term	3-56
     options for Short Term	 .  .  .  .  3-51
     unformatted or binary files  	  .  1-10
Missing data processing option  	  3-4, 3-6
Mixing heights
     specifying averages for ISCLT2 	  3-68
Multiple year analyses for PM-10  	  3-16

OU pathway	2-2
     brief tutorial	2-24
     example of inputs for	2-25
     keyword reference  	  ...  3-73, B-21
Output file
     organization of main print file	2-35
Output options
     for ISCEV2 model	3-84
     for Long Term model	3-85
     for Short Term model 	 .........  3-74
     overview	1-11
                            INDEX-4

-------
Pathways
     input runstream pathways explained 	 2-2
     order of	2-2
Plotting files  	 3-82, 3-96, F-8
Point sources
     and building downwash  	  3-25
     input parameters 	 3-21, B-8
     specification of location  	  3-20
     specification of source type	3-20
Polar receptors
     see also Receptor networks
     specifying a receptor network  	  3-42
     specifying discrete receptors  	  3-42, 3-48
Postprocessing files  	  3-80, 3-95
     estimating the size	3-82
Postprocessor files 	 F-6
Printed output file	3-92

RAMMET preprocessed data files  	 F-2
     converting to ASCII format 	 C-3
RE pathway	2-2
     brief tutorial	2-20
     example of inputs for	2-20
     keyword reference  	  3-38, B-ll
Re-start capability 	  3-14
     file descriptions  	  3-91, 3-93
     INITFILE keyword 	  3-15
     SAVEFILE keyword 	  3-15
Receptor networks
     Cartesian grid	3-39
     defining receptor grids  	  3-39
     example of defining polar  	  2-20
     modifying inputs for	2-44
     polar	3-42
     using multiple	3-45
Receptor options  	  1-10
Receptors
     limits on number of	2-8
Regulatory default option 	  1-8, 2-6
     description  .<	3-5
     DFAULT parameter 	 3-4
     specifying on the MODELOPT card	3-4
Repeat value
     using repeat values for numeric input  ....  3-28, 3-29
Runstream file	1-2, 2-1
     converting old inputs to new format	C-l
     debugging a	2-27
     definition 	  GLOSSARY-5
     description of	3-89
     example file for sample problem	2-26
     Fortran unit number	3-90
     functional keyword reference 	 B-l
     generated for ISCEV2	3-14


                            INDEX-5

-------
     modifying existing 	  2-42
     numeric inputs 	  2-18
     records or input images  	 2-3
     rules for structuring	2-3
     setting up an example	2-10
     specifying the filename for	2-33
     structure	2-2
     use of DOS redirection with	3-90, 3-98
     using the RUNORNOT option with complex   	2-15
Rural dispersion option 	   1-8, 2-13, 3-4
     potential temperature gradients  .  	 3-5
     selection of on MODELOPT card	3-4
     wind profile exponents 	 3-5

Secondary keywords
     use of for certain input parameters	2-2, 2-7
Settling and removal
     MASSFRAX keyword 	  3-35
     REFLCOEF keyword 	  3-35
     SETVELOC keyword 	  3-35
     specifying input parameters for  	  3-35
SO pathway	2-2
     brief tutorial	2-16
     example of inputs for	2-17
     keyword reference  	 3-19, B-7
Source code
     portability to other systems 	  3-99
Source contribution analyses  	  1-14
     use of the EVENT model for	1-14
     use of the SOCONT option for ISCLT2	3-87
Source groups 	  3-36
     limits on number of	2-8
     specifying a group of ALL sources	3-37
     SRCGROUP keyword	3-37, A-5, B-7, B-10
Source IDs
     specifying alphanumeric  	  3-21
Source ranges
     specifying and interpreting  	  3-26
Sources
     see also Area sources
     see also Point sources
     see also Volume sources
     limits on number of	2-8
     specifying source location inputs  	  3-20
     specifying source parameter inputs ......  3-19, 3-21
Stack parameters
     see Point sources	3-21
Stack-tip downwash
     and the regulatory default option	2-7, 3-5
     NOSTD parameter	3-4
     specifying not to use on MODELOPT card  .....  3-4, B-4
STAR frequency files	F-4
     specifying contents of the STAR file	3-9, 3-59


                            INDEX-6

-------
Storage limits  	 2-8
     modifying the storage limits 	 4-6

Temperatures
     specifying averages for ISCLT2 	  3-68
Terrain
     see Elevated terrain
Threshold violation files 	 3-78, 3-94, F-5

Unformatted meteorological data
     description of file structure	F-2
Unformatted meteorological data files
     converting to default ASCII format 	 C-3
     specifying as input to ISCST2  	  3-52, 3-54
Units
     input units for numeric data	2-4
Upper case vs lower case inputs	2-4
Urban dispersion option 	  1-8, 2-13, 3-4
     and decay for SO2	2-5, 3-10, 3-11
     potential temperature gradients  	 3-5
     selection of on MODELOPT card	3-4
     wind profile exponents 	 3-5

Variable emission rates 	  3-30, A-3, B-7
     EMISFACT keyword 	   3-30, 3-32, B-7, B-9
     factors for the Long Term model	3-32
     factors for the Short Term model	3-30
Vertical potential temperature gradients
     regulatory default values for  	 3-5
     specifying inputs for  	  3-66
Volume source 	  3-24
Volume sources
     input parameters 	 3-22, B-8
     specification of location  	  3-20
     specification of source type	3-20

Warning message 	 2-28, E-3
     example of syntax	2-29
Wind profile exponents
     regulatory default values for  	 3-5
     specifying inputs for	3-64
                            INDEX-7

-------

-------
                                     TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
                             (Please read Instructions on the reverie before completing}
 . REPOHT NO.
                               2.
                                                               3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
  User's Guide for  the Industrial Source  Complex (ISC2)
  Dispersion Models,  Volume I - User  Instructions
                                                             5. REPORT DATE

                                                                 Marrh 1QQ?
                                                             6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
 . AUTHOfl(S)
                                                              8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPOHT NC.
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
  Pacific Environmental  Services, Inc.
  3708 Mayfair Street,  Suite  202
  Durham, NC 27707
                                                               10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
                                                              11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS

  Source Receptor  Analysis Branch'
  Technical Support Division
  U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency
      irch Trianolo Park,  NC 27711
                                                              13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
                                                              14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
•Rosoar
5. SUPPLE
15^UPPLEMENTARYf?OTES
16. ABSTRACT
  This volume of the  User's Giude for the  Industrial Source Complex (ISC2) Dispersion
  Models (Version  2)  provides user  instructions for setting up  and  running the ISC2
  models.  The volume is organized  to provide different levels  of detail  to meet the
  different needs  of  various types  of users,  from novice users  to experienced modelers.
  The ISC2 User's  Guide has been developed  as part of a larger  effort to  restructure and
  reprpgram the original ISC models, and to improve the "end-user"  documentation for the
  models.  Volume  II  of the ISC2 User's Guide provides a technical  description of the
  dispersion algorithms utilized in the ISC2   models.  Volume III provides a guide to
  programmers, including a description of  the structure of the  computer code and
  information about  installing and  maintaining the code on various  computer systems.
                                  KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
                   DESCRIPTORS
                                                 b.lOENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED T=SMS  c. COSATI Field. Group
  Air Pollution
  Turbulent Diffusion
  Meteorology
  Mathematical models
  Computer model
                                                   Industrial Sources
                                                   Deposition
                                                   Downwash
                                                   Dispersion
18. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT

  Release Unlimited
 EPA Form 2220-1 (R«x. 4-77)   PREVIOUS EDITION is OBSOLETE
                                                 19. SECURITY CLASS (Tins Re port)
                                                 20. SECURITY CLASS iTIlis pa?(.'
                                                                           i 21. NO. OF PACES

                                                                                  226	
                                                                             22. PPICE

-------